MF 6400 Gearbox Guide

Gearbox
05 - Gearbox
CONTENTS
5A10 - General - GBA20 operation
5A11 - GBA20 input unit
5A12 - GBA20 Power shuttle
5A13 - GBA20 Dynashift
5A15 - GBA20 Selector rails
5A16 - GBA20 Output shaft
5A17 - GBA20 Mainshaft
5A18 - GBA20 Layshaft
5A20 - GBA20 - Super Creeper unit
5B10 - GBA10 - General - Operation
5B11 - GBA10 - Input unit
5B12 - GBA10 - PowerShuttle
5B13 - GBA10 - Dynashift
5B14 - GBA10 - Selector cover
5B15 - GBA10 - Selector rails
5B16 - GBA10 - Output shaft
5B17 - GBA10 - Mainshaft
5B18 - GBA20 - Layshaft
Massey Ferguson 6400 Contents - i

Gearbox
5B19 - GBA10 - Creeper unit
5C10 - GBA25 - General - Operation
5C11 - GBA25 - PowerShuttle
5C12 - GBA25 - Powershift module
5C13 - GBA25 - Robotic mechanical gearbox
5C14 - GBA25 - Creeper unit
5C15 - GBA25 - Super Creeper unit
5D10 - GBA15 - General - Operation
5D11 - GBA15 - Power Shuttle
5D12 - GBA15 - Powershift module
5D13 - GBA15 - Robotic mechanical gearbox
5D14 - GBA15 - Creeper
Contents - ii Massey Ferguson 6400

General - GBA20 operation
5A10 - General - GBA20 operation
CONTENTS
A . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
B . Construction and description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
C . Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
D . Specifications for transmission with power shuttle, Dynashift and input gear train
12
Massey Ferguson 6400 - Edition 4.a 5A10.1

5A10.2 Massey Ferguson 6400 - Edition 4.a

Parts list (70) Snap ring

(71) Lubricating pipe
(1) Bearing cone
(72) Spring
(2) Bearing cup
(77) Washer with flat sections
(3) Shims
(78) Tab washer
(6) Splined washers
(79) Needle bearing
(7) 1st drive pinion
(80) Spacer
(8) Bush
(81) Needle bearing
(11) 1st - 2nd double cone synchro
(82) Spacer
(14) 2nd drive pinion
(16) Bearing cup
(17) Bearing cone
(18) 4th drive pinion
(23) 3rd - 4th double cone synchro
(24) Needle bearing
(26) Circlip
(27) Washer
(28) Needle bearing
(29) 3rd drive pinion (Hare)
(30) Needle bearing
(31) Hare / Tortoise double cone synchronizer
(32) Washer
(35) Ring
(36) Tortoise gear
(37) Bearing cup
(38) Shim(s)
(39) Bearing cone
(40) Bearing cone
(41) Screw
(42) Shim(s)
(43) Laminated shim
(44) Output shaft
(45) Circlip
(46) Stop plate
(48) Bearing cup
(49) Circlip
(50) Deflector
(51) Shim(s)
(52) Cup
(53) Bearing cone
(54) Layshaft
(55) 3rd driven pinion
(56) 4th driven pinion
(57) Spacer
(58) Shim(s)
(59) 2nd driven pinion
(60) 1st driven pinion
(61) Circlip
(62) Needle bearing
(63) Bearing cone
(64) Bearing cup
(65) Gearbox housing
(67) Input gear
(68) Nut
(69) Mainshaft


Gearbox overall view
65 64 63 62 61 59 58 60 57 56 82 23 55 28 80 30 31 54 53 52 51 50
49
40
2 1 4 3
42
43
44
45
48
39
41
46
38
37
11
23
31
71 70 72 68 78 67 1 2 3 6 14 8 11 7 69 77 16 17 18 24 26 27 81 29 79 32 36 35
MA-05-02001A
Fig. 1


Main gearbox
A . General
The gearbox fitted to these tractors has 4 basic gears
The gearbox housing consists of the following main and 2 Hare / Tortoise ranges, giving a total of 8 gear
components, in the order given: ratios in each direction of travel. It consists of a main-
- the power shuttle shaft, a layshaft and an output shaft.
- the input unit containing the Dynashift This transmission covers all usage requirements.
- the gearbox input gear train, power shuttle version.
- the main gearbox Creeper unit
- the creeper unit (if fitted). A unit mounted on the output shaft, to the rear of the
gearbox, provides very slow travel speeds. This unit
Only the gearbox is described in this section. Each consists of an epicyclic drive unit, a mechanically
main component shall be partially discussed in this controlled 4/1 ratio that can only be engaged if the
section as these components are individually and more main gearbox is in Tortoise range.
thoroughly described in their own sections.
Lubrication
Power shuttle Lubrication is ensured by the tractor hydraulic circuit
The power shuttle consists of two oil bath multidisc via a 1.5 bar valve.
clutches (one for forward operation and one for The oil flows in the Dynashift assembly, the reverse
reverse operation). These clutches are located to the shuttle, the layshaft bearings, as well as in the pinions,
front of the input unit, in front of the Dynashift device. bearings and bushes of the main and output shafts.
The power shuttle is controlled by two proportional
solenoid valves operated by a lever located to the left
under the steering wheel and managed by the tractor
electronic system.
Dynashift input unit assembly

It allows to add four input gear ratios to the main unit,
bringing to 32 the maximum number of gears for a
direction of travel. This function is performed by a
hydraulic control linked to two epicyclic gear trains and
two hydraulic clutches.
Gearbox input gear train

The input gear train consists of two meshed pinions:
- one drive pinion housed to the rear of the input unit
of the power shuttle
- the other, a driven pinion secured to the gearbox
mainshaft by splines.
The purpose of the gear train is to send the movement
from the engine to the transmission via the power
shuttle and Dynashift hydraulic device.

Description
B . Construction and description
Drive is transferred from the main unit by the driven
Construction pinion (67) which is permanently meshed with the
drive pinion of the input gear train (power shuttle).
The gearbox consists of three gear trains:
- mainshaft
The driven pinion (67) is secured to the mainshaft (69)
- layshaft by splines.
- output shaft
The two synchroniser hubs (11) (23) are splined to the
These units provide eight basic synchronized gears: mainshaft (69). The 2nd drive pinion (14) is
- 4 gears: 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th idle-mounted on bush (8). 1st (7) and 4th (18) drive
- 2 ranges: Hare or Tortoise pinions are idle-mounted directly on the shaft. The 3rd
drive pinion (29) is mounted on needle bearings (28)
(30), which also act as a thrust bearing. The hub of the
The gearbox is fitted with a reinforced gear train and Hare / Tortoise synchronizer (31) is secured to the
includes three double cone synchronizers. output shaft (44).
The main gearbox comprises four synchronized gears; Driven pinions (55) (56) (59) (60) drive layshaft (54) by
an idle-mounted pinion on the output shaft, which can means of splines. The rear teeth of this shaft are
be immobilized by a synchronizer, is used to increase constantly meshed with the Tortoise pinion (36)
the four initial gears by two and thus obtain 8 basic idle-mounted on the output shaft.
gear ratios. The mainshaft and the layshaft are carried
by tapered roller bearings. The mainshaft bearing cups
are flanged, thus ensuring optimised support against
the housing. The output shaft is fitted on two taper
roller bearings and one needle bearing. All pinions have
helical teeth and are continuously meshed. The lubri-
cating oil for the lower shaftline comes from the front
unit and flows via a channel drilled in the centre of the
output shaft and the mainshaft. Radial drilled holes
send the oil to the various lubrication points of the
pinions, bearings, bushes and synchronizers.
The splines of the Hare / Tortoise synchro hub are lubri-
cated via a radial hole drilled in the output shaft.
The lubrication of the layshaft is ensured by the oil
circulating between it and the PTO shaft. This oil lubri-
cates the end taper roller bearings and the needle
bearing (62). Radial grooves in driven pinions transfer
the oil flow between each pinion.
To ensure correct operation according to the engine
torque sent to the transmission, the bearings are fitted
preloaded: mainshaft, or with clearance: layshaft. The
output shaft may be set either with a slight clearance
or a slight preload.

C . Operation
Remark
On the gearboxes, the gear synchronisers (1st - 2nd
and 3rd - 4th) and the Hare / Tortoise synchronizer are
double cone type.
Synchronizers (double cone) (Fig. 2)

Construction
- The hub of the synchronizer rotates ring G and cone
H by means of three pads I.
- The synchronizer B brake is joined by catches to
coupling flange C which is secured to the pinion by
splines.
Operation
- Axial movement of slider A presses on ring G, which
moves synchronizer B brake towards cone H by
means of balls D and pressure parts E to then drive
coupling flange C and the relevant drive pinion.
Locking position
Axial movement of slider A presses synchronizer B
brake against the flange friction cone C by means of
balls D and pressure parts E. The speed difference
existing between parts to couple generates a radial
rotation limited by pressure parts E, which in turn
creates a pressure on the chamfered teeth of synchro-
nizer B brake against slider A, impeding any relative
movement of it. The pressure applied by slider A and
the angular offset of synchronizer B brake generate
axial pressure between the friction cones of synchro-
nizer B brake and flange C by means of the tooth
chamfers. This axial pressure generates the synchro-
nism by gradually reducing the difference in speed of
the parts to couple. When synchronized, the remaining
pressure applied by slider A against synchronizer B
brake makes it return backwards until the teeth of
slider A are in front of the troughs of the synchronizer
B brake teeth. At this moment, the resistance (until
now preventing the movement of slider A when gears
are shifted) is overridden and slider A can then noise-
lessly mesh in the teeth of flange C of the pinion to
engage. The rigid connection between the shaft and
the pinion is made and the gear is engaged. If, during
gear shifting, the two parts are positioned teeth
against teeth, the chamfers on tooth flanks offset the
gear to engage until each tooth is in front of a trough.
Fig. 2

Neutral position
Slider A is in the middle position. Balls D are pushed in
the V grooves of slider A by pressure springs F. Pinions
can turn freely on the shaft. In this neutral position,
slider A is locked by three balls D held in place by
springs F.
Low range (Tortoise)

Gear engagement is obtained by moving one of the
synchronizer (11) or (23) sliders to join, in rotation,
mainshaft (69) with one of the idle-mounted pinions.
No matter what gear is selected, the drive is trans-
mitted to the layshaft (54). Output shaft (44) drive is
transmitted via the machined teeth of the layshaft
constantly meshed with idle pinion (36) secured to the
output shaft by moving the synchronizer (31) slider
backwards.
High range (Hare)

This range is selected by moving the synchronizer (31)
slider forward, which directly meshes the driven pinion
(29) and the output shaft. Consequently, in 3rd gear
Hare, the layshaft (54) is inoperative. The other gears
are obtained by moving the sliders of synchronizers
(11) or (23) as with the Tortoise range. Drive is trans-
mitted to the output shaft (44) by driven pinions (29)
(55).

Overhaul (double cone)

- If synchronizers (11) (23) (31) are disassembled,
check the wear on synchronizer B brakes.
- Stack coupling flange C, cone H, synchronizer B
brake and ring G.
- Correctly position brake B by turning it backwards
and forwards several times and by manually pushing
it.
- Using a set of laminated shims, measure dimension
X (Fig. 3) at three equidistant points. Take the
average of the three readings.
Remark
Value of dimension X (Fig. 3)
- On a new synchronizer, dimension X must be at least
1.6 mm.
- After operation, and if this dimension is less than or
equal to 0.60 - 0.80 mm, replace the synchronizer B
brake.
- Check dimension X again, using the same method.
- If dimension X remains incorrect, also replace ring G
and cone H or, if necessary, the complete synchro-
nizer.
Fig. 3

D . Specifications for transmission

with power shuttle, Dynashift and
input gear train

12 - 16 Nm 72 - 96 Nm
13 BAR VALVE
PRECHARGE
31 - 35 Nm 242 242 0,10 / 0,18
PRELOAD
1,5 BAR VALVE 6 -8 Nm

JEU
648 13 - 15 Nm 36 - 46 Nm 0 / 0,25
END FLOAT
47 -54 Nm
648
68 - 92 Nm 5206
270
JEU
1 0 / 0,08
END FLOAT
25 - 35 Nm 2 41
37
3
4 33
31 28
JEU
0,60 / 0,80
END FLOAT
DETAIL B DETAIL A
25,5 - 34,5 Nm
PRECHARGE DE 0,05 A JEU DE 0,05
PRELOAD = 0;05 TO PLAY = 0,05
100 - 130 Nm
270
JEU
0,50 / 0,70 549 15 SANS JEU
END FLOAT
23 LIEVRE WITHOUT PLAY
HARE
36 - 46 Nm
M6 12 - 16 Nm 28
M8 20 - 28 Nm
TORTUE
TORTOISE
242 242
PRECHARGE
130 - 170 Nm 0,20 / 0,40 25 - 35 Nm
PRELOAD
DETAIL A 510
PRECHARGE
270 0,14 / 0,20
PRELOAD
DETAIL B
+FREINAGES MECANIQUES
40 - 56 Nm
+MECHANICAL LOCKS
JEU
0 / 0,20 84 - 110 Nm 36 - 46 Nm 20 - 28 Nm 33,8 - 51,5 Nm
END FLOAT
MA-05-02002 A
Fig. 4


GBA20 input unit
5A11 - GBA20 input unit
CONTENTS
A . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Preliminary operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
C . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
D . Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
E . Adjusting the progressivity sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
F . Final operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
G . Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

GBA20 input unit

GBA20 input unit
A . General
The input unit with power shuttle is in the form of an
interchangeable module on which a power shuttle is
assembled. It is fitted at the gearbox input.
It is made of two separate parts: Powershuttle (see

section 5) and Dynashift.
The input unit is fed with movement from the power

shuttle and transmits it to the transmission by means
of a drive pinion located in the rear compartment of the
unit.
Dynashift
The Dynashift is used to electrohydraulically control
four powershift ratios using a lever located to the left
under the steering wheel.
The Dynashift function is performed by two epicyclic

gear trains linked to two hydraulic clutches. For opera-
tion, see section 5.

GBA20 input unit
B . Preliminary operations
Note: On all 6400 series tractors, the gearbox is
fitted with an input unit with power shuttle.
Special points
If the input unit is removed to replace the complete
unit or only the units (1) (2) and the cover (3) in the
Dynashift version (Fig. 1), it is necessary to adjust the
layshaft of the gearbox (see section 5).
1. Disassemble the tractor between the engine and

the gearbox (see section 2).
2. Drain the gearbox and the rear axle.
3. Remove the spacer (4) (see section 3).
Fig. 1

GBA20 input unit
C . Removal
4. Remove the forward clutch from the power shuttle 92
(see section 5).
5. Take out the PTO shaft (1) from the gearbox (Fig.
4) and mark its position. 91
6. Remove the union (91) and the transfer pipe (88)
(Fig. 2), pressure line, lubrication).
7. Remove the elbow union (2) and its transfer pipe
(Fig. 3).
8. Disconnect and remove the progressivity sensor
(1) located under the right-hand side of the selector 542
cover (Fig. 3).
9. Sling the input unit using tool 3378225M11, a
handling bar made locally (see § G) and a suitable 88
MA-05-02003A
lifting device as in Fig. 4.
Fig. 2
Special points
- The sling hides two diametrically opposed screws (1)
on the input unit (Fig. 5). Before fitting the tool on the
unit, remove these screws.
2
MA-05-02004A
Fig. 3
Fig. 4

GBA20 input unit
10. Remove the remaining screws (1) securing the unit

to the gearbox (Fig. 5) without touching screws (2)
(8 mm Allen key) (Fig. 5).
11. With the help of an assistant, carefully pull the unit
forward.
12. Pull out the unit from the gearbox and remove it.
13. Discard the O'rings (3) (Fig. 6).
14. Remove the tool and the handling bar.
15. Position the unit vertically.
16. Separate the power shuttle reverse clutch from
the input box unit (see section 5).
D . Refitting
17. Install the reverse clutch previously removed (see
sections above). Fig. 5
18. On the Dynashift input unit (according to option),
check that the cup (64) (Fig. 7) is fitted.
19. On the gearbox housing, fit new O'rings (3) and
two guide studs "G" (Fig. 6) approximately 200 mm
long (optional).
Note: On the power shuttle version, there is no
locating pin between the gearbox housing and
the input unit.
20. Using the tools used for removal and with the help
of an assistant, position the unit in the gearbox
housing, taking the same safety steps as those
used during removal.
21. Slide the unit on the guide studs (if mounted) until
they are in contact with the housing.
Special points
- If it is difficult to force fit the input unit, remove
the clutch control unit and the selector cover,
then check that the layshaft bearing cone of the
gearbox is correctly fitted in the cup (64) (see Fig. 6
section 5). If not, raise the shaft slightly.
Fig. 7

GBA20 input unit
22. Replace the O'rings (92) on the transfer pipe (88)

(Fig. 2) and refit it along with the union (91), the
thread lightly smeared with Loctite 542 or equiva-
lent.
23. On the input unit, tighten screws (1) (Fig. 5) to 40 -
56 Nm.
24. Refit the transfer pipe and elbow union (2), the
thread lightly smeared with Loctite 542 or equiva-
lent (Fig. 9).
25. Reinstall and adjust the progressivity sensor (see §
E).
26. Put the PTO shaft in the gearbox, with the longest
end "E" (Fig. 8) or paint mark "P" directed towards
the forward clutch of the power shuttle.
27. Install forward clutch (see section 5).
Fig. 8
E . Adjusting the progressivity
sensor
28. Smear the sensor thread with Loctite 577 (Sensor
Sealing or equivalent). Install and adjust the
sensor.
2
29. Screw the sensor (1) home (Fig. 9) without forcing
it. Make sure that its end is in contact with the
drive pinion (2) (see section 5).
Unscrew the sensor 1/2 to 3/4 of a turn. 1
Tighten the nut to a torque of 5 -10 Nm.
For operation, see section 11 - Electronics.
MA-05-02004A
Fig. 9

GBA20 input unit
F . Final operations
30. Refit the spacer (4) (see section 3).
31. If removed, install the selector cover (see section
5).
32. If removed, install the power shuttle clutch control
unit. Refit pipes. Reconnect the connectors (see
section 9).
33. Top up the oil level of the housings and check
using the sight glass located on the rear of the
centre housing.
34. Assemble the tractor between the engine and the
gearbox (see section 2).
35. Carry out a road test using the power shuttle and
using ratios A, B, C and D of the Dynashift.
Check tightness of mating faces of the selector
Fig. 10
cover (if necessary), the spacer (4) and the
hydraulic unions.
G . Service tools
1. Tool available in the AGCO network
- 3378225M11 - Sling for input unit with power
shuttle (Fig. 10)
2. Locally made tool

- Handling bar (Fig. 11)
Fig. 11

GBA20 Power shuttle
5A12 - GBA20 Power shuttle
CONTENTS
A . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Removing and refitting the forward clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
C . Disassembling and reassembling the forward clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
D . Shimming the forward clutch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
E . Disassembling and reassembling the reverse clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
F . Disassembling and reassembling the drive pinion - Shimming the shaft . . . . . . . 19
G . Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

GBA20 Power shuttle

GBA20 Power shuttle
The forward clutch consists of:

A . General - a conventional type oil-bath multidisc clutch
consisting of a cover (33), the rear side of which is
The power shuttle, also called "I.S.C.", consists of two
splined to assemble the input sun gear (53),
electrohydraulically controlled clutches. It is designed
to enable operating direction reversal under load. It can - an input shaft (19) crossing the spacer (4) which
be fitted to all 6400 tractors. separates the engine flywheel from the transmission
oil. The shaft is constantly meshed with the damper
secured to the engine flywheel. It is splined so as to
The power shuttle transmits the drive from the engine rotate with the clutch unit (18) comprising the inter-
to the mainshaft mounted on the front of the main mediate plates (30) and the discs (29) in which piston
gearbox by means of pinions located respectively to (28) moves,
the rear of the input unit and at the gearbox input.
- a drive hub (27) comprising the discs (29) is secured
to the primary shaft (55). The forward clutch is
A lever, mounted to the left under the steering wheel, centred in the cover (38) of the reverse clutch by ball
controls both the power shuttle and A, B, C, D gear bearing (32).
shifting of the Dynashift. It is also fitted with a position
especially used for manual declutching of the transmis-
The reverse clutch consists of:
sion.
- an epicyclic gear train consisting of three double
pinion gears (52) and three single pinion gears (59),
Depending on the position selected by the operator
- a hydraulic braking device for the planet carrier (49),
(forward, neutral, reverse or manual declutching), the
lever manages the proportional solenoid valves of the - a cover (38) supporting the forward clutch and with
forward and reverse clutches by means of the elec- an inner side machined to assemble hydraulic parts.
tronic system of the tractor.
The double and single pinion gears (52) (59) of the
The solenoid valves are located to the front and to the epicyclic gear train mesh respectively on the input and
right of the gearbox on a clutch unit containing the output sun gears (53) (58). The pins (50) are mounted
Dynashift hydraulic control system. idle and held in the planet carrier by plates (63). A
central drilled channel and radial ports supply lubrica-
A filter (60 microns) located under the selector cover,
tion to needle bearings (60).
upstream from the clutch unit, provides complemen-
tary filtering for oil supplying the solenoid valves
(clutches, Dynashift). The planet carrier braking device consists of an annular
piston (39) and a plate (43) that is loaded by springs
(62) and discs (47) integral with the planet carrier
A progressivity sensor screwed to the box housing
through splines.
sends information on shaft rotational speed to the
electronic system.
The intermediate plates (46) are immobilised by the
pins (71).
Shifting of any forward gear to the corresponding
reverse gear, or vice versa, is easy without declutching
or stopping the tractor. This "assisted" gear reversal The fixed unit (1) performs two functions:
enables gradual changing of the operating direction, - it receives the low pressure supplying the forward
even at high travel speeds without abrupt changes in clutch via the pipe (74),
speed. The clutches slow down tractor movement - it acts as casing for the clutch lubricating and cooling
until the required speed is reached so that the direction pump.
of travel can be reversed.
The conventional hydraulically operated clutch pedal is

replaced by an electrohydraulically operated manoeu-
vring pedal. This pedal modulates the pressure in the
forward or reverse clutches through the electronic
system of the tractor and thus facilitates precise move-
ments such as implement hitching.
Construction
The forward and reverse clutches of the power shuttle
are of different design.

GBA20 Power shuttle
The pipes (31) connecting the pump housing (1) and

the cover (38) lubricate the reverse clutch braking
device.
The shims (3) located between the closing spacer (4)

and the fixed unit (1) provide end play for the forward
clutch.
Drive from the power shuttle is transmitted to a

mechanical unit located in the rear compartment of the
input box.
This unit comprises:

- a secondary shaft (1) and helical pinion (2) machined
in one piece (Fig. 1).
The shaft is fitted on two taper roller bearings "R", and

is carried by two bearings of the input unit.
The shims (3) (Fig. 1) fitted between the cover and the
unit are used to preload the bearings.
Fig. 1

GBA20 Power shuttle
Operating principle primary shaft then sends the movement from the
engine to the mainshaft of the main gearbox via the
Forward clutch input pinion.
When the lever under the steering wheel is in the Remark : As with Forward operation, simply pull the
Forward position, the relevant solenoid valve is acti- control lever towards the steering wheel to obtain the
vated and supplies a pressure that moves piston (28). "manual declutching" of the reverse clutch. A valve
This, in turn, compresses the intermediate plates (30) screwed to the top of cover (38) ensures a small
and the discs (29) against cover (33). The movement permanent bleed starting from 13 bar to provide an
from the engine to the gearbox complies with the automatic bleed of the hydraulic supply of piston (39).
following kinematics:
- input shaft (19) splined to unit (18)
Lubrication
- unit housing (18)
As the piston (39) moves, it operates spools (44) that
- intermediate plates (30) act as valves and compress springs (45) via the plate
- discs (29) compressed by the piston (28) (43). The spools have a drilled centre channel and radial
- hub (27) ports, allowing oil to flow to the channels in the cover
- primary shaft (55) (38) and the channels in the front cover of the input
- main box mainshaft via the input pinion. unit, thus lubricating the discs (47) and the interme-
diate plates (46). Lubrication of the mechanical parts of
Simultaneously, the pressure applied behind the
the epicyclic gear train is via the lubricating system of
piston (39) of the braking device drops and the planet
the input unit.
carrier assembly (discs (47), intermediate plates (46)
and epicyclic gear train) rotate freely. At the same time, the lubricating oil flow to the discs
(29) and intermediate plates (30) of the forward clutch
Remark : When the control lever is pulled towards the
is stopped, thus preventing any possible driving of the
steering wheel, a "manual declutching" position of the
discs through a drag effect.
forward clutch is produced.
Neutral position
Lubrication
In neutral position, the supply to the solenoid valves is
During forward operation, the oil flow from the centre
cut, placing the forward and reverse clutches at rest
housing via the pump (14) is directed towards the inter-
and eliminating transmission of the engine movement
mediate plates (30) and the discs (29) via the ports of
to the gearbox.
the forward clutch unit (18) opened by movement of
piston (28). The oil flow is also interrupted. The pressure in the
circuit opens the valve (1) (Fig. 17) and directs the oil to
At the same time, lubrication of the braking device of
the housing.
the planet carrier (discs (47) and intermediate plates
(46)) of the reverse clutch is interrupted.
Note: After replacement of the solenoid valve or its
solenoid, the power shuttle hydraulic unit, the
Reverse clutch
power shuttle unit or one of its components or the
When the previously mentioned lever is moved from
transmission control unit, it is necessary to cali-
the Forward to Reverse position, the solenoid valve
brate the clutch (see section 11).
concerned is activated and supplies the piston (39) of
the braking device of the planet carrier. The piston then
presses on plate (43) which compresses discs (47) and
the intermediate plates (46) against the front cover of
the input unit and stops the rotation of the planet
carrier. The movement from the engine is directly
transmitted to the cover (33) that is integral with the
input sun gear (53) via splines, without passing through
the discs and intermediate plates of the forward
clutch.
Simultaneously, the oil pressure in the piston chamber
(28) drops and frees the discs (29) and intermediate
plates (30).
The input sun gear (53) then drives the double pinion
gears (52) freely mounted on the pins (50) which, in
turn, drive the single pinion gear (59), integral with
primary shaft (55) thus reversing rotation of the output
sun gear (58) splined to the primary shaft (55). The

GBA20 Power shuttle
Parts list (54) Snap ring

(55) Primary shaft
(1) Pump casing
(56) Snap ring
(2) Pump cover
(57) Ball bearing
(3) Shim(s)
(58) Output sun gear
(4) Spacer
(59) Single pinion gear
(5) Locking ring
(60) Needle bearings
(6) Splined ring
(61) Snap rings
(7) O’ring
(62) Springs
(8) Anti-extrusion ring
(63) Stop plates
(9) Snap rings
(64) Screw
(10) Oil seal
(65) Snap ring
(11) Circlip
(66) Screw
(12) Ball bearing
(67) O’ring
(13) Screw
(68) Ball bearing
(14) Lubricating pump
(69) Seal
(15) Sealing ring
(70) Screw
(16) Ring
(71) Pins
(17) Locating pin
(72) Union
(18) Forward clutch unit
(73) 1.5 bar valve
(19) Input shaft
(74) Pipe
(20) Cotter pin
(75) O’rings
(21) Circlip
(76) Pipe
(22) Ball bearing
(77) Screw
(23) Snap ring
(78) Pipe
(24) Seal
(79) Screw
(25) Belleville washers
(80) Flange
(26) Indexing ports
(81) Seal
(27) Drive hub
(82) Strainer
(28) Forward clutch piston
(83) Cover
(29) Forward clutch discs
(84) Plug
(30) Forward clutch intermediate plates
(85) Seal
(86) Pipe
(32) Ball bearing
(87) Pipe
(33) Forward clutch cover
(88) Transfer pipe
(34) Planet carrier cover
(89) Seal (Loctite)
(35) Rivets
(90) Diagnostics connector (lubrication)
(36) Seal
(91) Union
(37) Cover
(92) O’rings
(38) Reverse clutch cover
(93) Union
(39) Reverse clutch piston
(94) Pipe
(40) Rivets
(95) O’rings
(41) Seal
(96) Dust seal
(42) Seal
(97) Screw
(43) Plate
(98) Snap ring
(44) Spools
(99) Screw
(45) Springs
(100)Ring
(46) Reverse clutch intermediate plates
(101)Elbow union
(47) Reverse clutch discs
(48) Ring restrictor
(49) Planet carrier
(50) Pinion gear pins
(51) Spacers
(52) Double pinion gears
(53) Input sun gear

GBA20 Power shuttle
Overall view
32 35 37 34 36 38 40 42 43 44 45
9 11 12 13 14 15 16
33 46
31 47
10 18 30 49
9 29 48
8 28 50
7 51
19 52
20 26 53
19 98
24 55
6 5 4 3 2 1
25 54
100 56
38 70
18 57
69 58
38 46
68 59
67 60
21 61
23 63
22 62
71
66 27 65 64 95 96 97 41 39
MA-05-02005A
Fig. 2

GBA20 Power shuttle
Overall view
72 31 73 93 31
73 92
91
101
90
94
89
88
87 74
86
76 75 74
78 79
77 F
80 80
MA-05-02006A 85 84 83 82 81
Fig. 3

GBA20 Power shuttle
Exploded view
65
45
33 44
27
54
53
32
29
30
5 46
9 62
8
47
7
8 71
6 49
9 17
43 57
42 98
41 56
36 63
39 52
15
25 38 60
70 51
60
50
63
21
34
19
99
22
2
13 28
24 59
23
69 60
100
18 51
12
66 60
11
20 50
68 61
16 58
1 61
MA-05-02007A
3 14
Fig. 4

GBA20 Power shuttle

GBA20 Power shuttle
8. Check that PTO shaft (1) is installed (Fig. 5).

B . Removing and refitting the 9. Refit the clutch using the tool used for removal.
forward clutch
Preliminary operations Final operations
1. Disassemble the tractor between the engine and 10. Replace the seals (67) (75).
the gearbox (see section 2). 11. Refit the pipes (31) (74) (76) (94).
2. Drain the gearbox and the centre housing. 12. Replace the O'rings (95).
3. Remove the spacer from the gearbox (see section 13. Clean the mating faces on the gearbox housing
3). and the cover (37). Smear the mating face of the
4. Remove the pipes (86) (87). Detach and remove housing with Loctite 510 or equivalent.
the covers (37) (83), the flange (80) and the pipe 14. Replace the dust seal (96) and the O'ring (81).
(78) (Fig. 3). 15. Fit the pipe (78), the flange (80) and the covers (37)
5. Remove the pipes (31) (74) (76) (94) (Fig. 3). (83) previously coated with Loctite 510 or equiva-
lent. Tighten the screws to a torque of 84 -110 Nm.
16. Tighten screw (97) moderately and screws (79) to
Removal 44 - 53 Nm.
6. Remove the forward clutch (2) (Fig. 5) and pull it 17. Reconnect the pipes (86) (87).
from the housing using a locally made tool (see § 18. Refit the gearbox spacer (see section 3).
G).
Refitting centre housing.
7. Clean the components. Replace any defective 20. Assemble the tractor between the engine and the
parts. gearbox (see section 2).
Remark 21. Carry out a road test using the power shuttle and
using ratios A, B, C and D of the Dynashift.
- If forward clutch shimming is necessary, refer to
§ D. 22. Check tightness of the mating faces on the spacer
(4), covers (37) (83) and the hydraulic unions.
MA-05-02008A
Fig. 5

GBA20 Power shuttle
31. Split unit (18) fitted with piston (28) from shaft (19).
C . Disassembling and reassembling 32. Remove the Belleville washers and the ring (100).
the forward clutch 33. Remove snap ring (23). Pull out the shaft (19)
complete with bearing (22) from hub (27).
Disassembly 34. Take off circlip (21). Extract bearing (22) from shaft
23. Separate cover (33) from unit (18). Remove clutch (19).
discs (29) and intermediate plates (30). 35. Remove the piston. Remove seals (24) (69) and
24. Remove the front snap ring (9). Remove the discard them. If necessary, extract the bearing (68)
splined ring (6), the anti-extrusion rings (8) and seal from the unit (1) of the pump (14).
(7). 36. If necessary, remove snap ring (54) and remove
25. Remove circlip (11), take off cover (2) from the the input sun gear (53). Remove snap ring (65).
pump (14) complete with bearing (12). Extract bearing (32).
26. Pull the lubricating pump out of the pump casing
(1) and take it apart from the clutch housing (18). Reassembly
27. Remove seal rings (15). If necessary, extract ring
(16) and remove the 1.5 bar valve (73). 37. Make sure that pin (20) is fitted.
28. Place the partially disassembled clutch on a suit- 38. If removed, fit the bearing (32) on cover (33), using
able locally made fixture (Fig. 6) (see § G). a press and a suitable tool. Fit snap ring (65).
29. Compress the Belleville washers (25) and remove 39. If disassembled, refit bearing (68).
the rear snap ring (9) (Fig. 6). 40. Lubricate the new seals (24) (69) and fit them on
30. Remove locking ring (5). Gradually release the the piston.
Belleville washers.
25 100
MA-05-02009A
Fig. 6

GBA20 Power shuttle
41. Fit the piston (28).

Remark
The angular position of the piston depends on the
position of unit (18) lubricating ports. Align the
indexing holes drilled in the unit and the piston (Fig.
7). To align, use a pin of a suitable diameter.
Complete the installation of the piston by gradually
and alternately striking around its top rim with a
plastic mallet. Check that no pieces of the seal
remain after assembly.
42. Using a suitable tool, force fit bearing (22) on shaft
(19), the seal side facing towards the reverse
clutch. Fit the circlip (21).
43. Put the assembly (shaft, bearing, circlip) in the hub
(27). Fit snap ring (23).
44. Refit the ring (100) and the Belleville washers as
shown in Fig. 8. Fig. 7
45. Assemble unit (18) fitted with the piston (28) on
shaft (19).
46. Compress the Belleville washers using the same
procedure as in operation 28. Position the ring (5),
aligning two of the flat sections with those of the
unit (18). Replace the rear snap ring (9) and
correctly position it in the bottom of the groove.
47. Remove the fixture.
48. Check that the seal rings (15) turn freely in their
grooves. Fit the seal rings, lightly coated with
miscible grease, making sure that they do not
protrude beyond the rim of unit (18).
49. If necessary, fit the 1.5 bar valve (73) and tighten to
a torque of 47 - 54 Nm. Insert ring (16) using a suit-
able fixture, with the chamfer "C" in the direction 100
shown in Fig. 9.
50. Lubricate the ring. Assemble pump unit (1) on unit
(18).
51. Lubricate pump (14) with transmission oil and posi- MA-05-02010A
Fig. 8
tion it aligning the flats of the rotor with those on
the unit (18).
52. Manually check the angular movement of the rotor
on the flat sections of unit (18).
53. Fit the bearing (12) on the cover (2) of the pump. Fit
the cover. Install circlip (11) and screws (13) and
tighten to a torque of 25 -35 Nm.
54. Lubricate and install a new assembly (O'ring (7)
and anti-extrusion ring (8)). Slide on the splined ring
(6). Fit a new front snap ring (9).
55. Soak the discs (29) in a transmission oil bath for
approximately 1 hour. Check that they are correctly
impregnated.
Fig. 9

GBA20 Power shuttle
56. Position the intermediate plates (30), aligning the

tabs and the discs (29) on hub (27) according to the
type of tractor (see remark and Fig. 10). 30 27 29
Remark
- The clutch comprises 5 discs and 5 intermediate
plates.
57. Put the forward clutch cover (33) on the unit (18),
with the pins of the intermediate plates inserted
into the notches of the forward clutch cover.
Fit and tighten the screws (66) to a torque of 25.5
-34.5 Nm.
58. Manually check the rotation of the hub (27).
59. If necessary, refit the input sun gear (53) and fit
snap ring (54).
D . Shimming the forward clutch MA-05-02011A

Fig. 10
This operation consists in obtaining an end play J1 of

0.60 to 0.80 mm between the pump cover (2) and the
spacer (4) (Fig. 11).
Remove the PTO shaft to perform this operation. 65 38
60. Install the clutch on the cover (38) of the reverse

clutch, using the tool used in Fig. 5, § B.
61. Fit a 2 mm shim (3) on cover (2) (Fig. 11).
62. Lubricate the lip of seal (10). Protect the lip of the
seal by fitting a protector (see section 3) on the
splines of the shaft (19). Fit two guide screws on
opposite sides of the gearbox housing and tempo- 3
rarily fit the spacer (4) without Loctite. Gradually
tighten several screws.
63. Place a dial gauge at the end of shaft (19) and 19
check the clearance by moving the shaft sideways
(Fig. 11).
Note: Check that the snap ring (65) of the
bearing (32) is correctly in contact with the
cover (38) (Fig. 11).
64. Remove spacer (4). Depending on the reading
previously obtained with the dial gauge, define a
new thickness for shim(s) (3) in order to obtain a J1
clearance of between 0.60 mm and 0.80 mm
(Fig. 11).
4
2 32
J1 = 0,60/0,80 mm
MA-05-02012A
Fig. 11

GBA20 Power shuttle
68. Recover the spools (44) and the springs (45) (Fig.
E . Disassembling and reassembling 12).
the reverse clutch 69. Remove the large springs (62) and the pins (71).
70. On cover (38), remove:
Preliminary operations - the plate (43)
65. Remove the forward clutch (see § B). - the seal (42) and discard it
66. Remove the input unit (see section 5). - the piston (39)
- the seals (36) (41) and discard them
Disassembly (Fig. 12) - the unions (72), the valve (1) (Fig. 18) and the
O'ring (75) of the 17 bar supply port (Fig. 3).
67. Remove the screws (70) and the cover (38).
Fig. 12

GBA20 Power shuttle
71. Immobilise the planet carrier (49) with a holding

tool, ref. 3378240M1 (see Fig. 13 and § G).
72. Remove screws (99) securing the cover (34) (Fig.
13) and remove it.
73. Remove clutch plates (47) and intermediate plates
(46).
74. Separate the output sun gear (58), held by the snap
rings (61), from the primary shaft (55) (Fig. 12).
75. Remove snap ring (56) (Fig. 12).
76. Remove the planet carrier (49) with the double and
single pinion gears (52) (59).
77. On the planet carrier (49), remove:
- the plates (63)
- the double pinion gears (52) and the pins (50).
Note and mark their location.
- the single pinion gears (59) and pins (50). Note
and mark their location. Fig. 13
- the snap ring (98) and bearing (57).
Remarks
- The rotation of planet gears around the pins (50)
is on two rows of needle bearings (60), joined
and separated by a spacer (51).
- When the planet gears and the shafts have been
removed, check that no needle or spacer
remains in the planet carrier.
Reassembly
78. Clean and check all components. Replace any
defective parts.
79. Check that the ports in the pinion gear pins and the
channels in the planet carriers are not blocked.
80. Where necessary, fit the pinion gears with two
rows of needle bearings coated with miscible
grease and separated by a spacer.
Fig. 14
81. On the planet carrier, refit:
- bearing (57) and snap ring (98)
- double and single pinion gears (52) (59) posi-
tioned as shown in Fig. 14.
- pins (50), with the lubricating ports placed facing
those in the planet carrier (49).
Special points
Each end of the pins (50) is provided with:
- a port, one of which is closed off by a rivet (35) while
the other is used for pinion gear lubrication,
- a flat section and a shoulder that stop any pin rotation
or any side movement.

GBA20 Power shuttle
82. Install the partially assembled planet carrier. Fit the

snap ring (56) and the rear snap ring (61).
83. Position marks "R" (punch marks) on the double
pinion gears (52) (Fig. 15) so that they pass through
a centerline meeting at "O" (Fig. 15).
Remark
- The mark on the front side of the pinion gear
corresponds to the alignment of the two splines.
It is mandatory to respect the positions of the
punch marks during assembly of the output sun
gear (58).
84. Slide the output sun gear (58), correctly oriented as
shown in Fig. 2, on to the primary shaft (55),
making sure that the punch marks of each pinion
gear remain in the required position.
85. Fit the front snap ring (61).
86. Soak the discs (47) in a transmission oil bath for Fig. 15
impregnated.
87. Fit the discs (47) and the intermediate plates (46)
depending on the type of tractor (see Remark and
Fig. 16).
Remark
- The clutch comprises 4 discs and 3 intermediate
plates.
88. Check the presence of the locating pin (17) (Fig.
12).
89. Refit the cover (34). Check that it is correctly posi-
tioned on the pins (50) of the pinion gears and in
the locating pin (Fig. 12).
90. Immobilise the planet carrier, using the same
method as used during disassembly.
91. Fit and tighten the screws (99) (Fig. 12) to a torque
of 36 - 46 Nm. The thread should be previously
smeared with Loctite 242 or equivalent.
92. On cover (38), check for the presence of rivets (40) Fig. 16
at the end of the channels and refit:
- piston (39) with new lubricated seals (36) (41),
gradually and alternately striking around the
piston rim with a plastic mallet. Check that no
fragments of the seal remain after assembly,
- plate (43) with a new lubricated seal (42), aligning
the holes of the plate with those in the cover
(38). Insert the plate using the same method as
used for piston (39).

GBA20 Power shuttle
93. Install the pins (71) and the springs (62) (Fig. 17) in
their respective location on the input unit.
94. Smear the spools (44) and the springs (45) with
miscible grease. Fit and stick the spools in each
compartment of the cover (38), with the points
towards the unions (72) (Fig. 2). Slide and stick a
spring (45) in each spool.
95. On the external face of the cover (38), place three
sufficiently long and equally spaced studs in the
holes provided for screws (64).
96. Install and position the cover, with the valve port
(1) directed upwards (Fig. 18).
Important: Before fitting screws (70), check
that the spools (44) slide freely in each
compartment of the front cover on the input
unit.
To do this, compress the springs (45), using a
screwdriver passed through the tapped holes
of the unions (72).
Remark
- If the springs cannot be compressed, investigate
the cause..
97. Pretighten screws (70).
98. During pretightening, check that the spools (44)
still slide freely. Also check that each end of the
(large) springs (62) is correctly housed in its respec-
tive seat.
99. Tighten screws to a final torque of (70) (Fig. 12) 36
- 46 Nm. After completing the tightening, check
again that each spool can move freely and restore
its initial position.
Remark
- A spool valve blocked open can limit or interrupt
lubrication of the forward clutch when operating.
Fig. 17
100.It is imperative to install and tighten the valve (1)
to 6 - 8 Nm max. (Fig. 18) after fitting its seal. Fit
and tighten the unions (72).
101.Install the forward clutch input unit (see section 5).
Fig. 18

GBA20 Power shuttle
105.Remove the Dynashift unit (see section 5).

F . Disassembling and reassembling 106.Take out the screws (12). Remove stop plate (11).
the drive pinion - Shimming the
shaft Disassembly (Fig. 19)
Special point 107.Remove screws (4) (13). Remove housing (5).
108.Remove shims (3).
As the Dynashift unit is set back, the available space is
limited to the rear of the input unit; therefore the drive 109.Remove the stop circlip (6) .
pinion (2) and the secondary shaft (1) are machined in 110.Separate the bearing cup (7) from the secondary
a single piece. shaft (1).
111.Take off cover (15). Extract the cup (16).
Preliminary operations 112.Remove the stop circlip (10) .
113.Separate bearing cone (9) from the shaft (1).
102.Remove the forward clutch (see § B).
114.Remove the shaft (1) and pinion (2) assembly from
103.Remove the input unit (see section 5). the housing (14).
104.Remove the reverse clutch (see § E). 115.Extract the cup (8).
Fig. 19

GBA20 Power shuttle
Reassembly (Fig. 19) Shimming the shaft (1) (Fig. 20)

116.Check that the ports of the secondary shaft (1) are 129.Position a dial gauge feeler pin on the end of the
not clogged. shaft.
117.Clean and check all components. Replace any 130.Pull the shaft, turning it to and fro from left to right
defective parts. to correctly "seat" the cones in the bearing cups.
118.Lubricate the cones and the cups of the bearing 131.Set the dial gauge to zero.
before assembling. 132.Repeat operation 130, but this time by pushing.
119.Fit the cup (8). 133.Depending on the clearance measured, select a
120.Install the shaft (1) and pinion (2) assembly of the new shim (3) thickness to obtain a preload: P1 =
housing (14). 0.10 to 0.18 mm (Fig. 20)
121.Slide the bearing cone (9) on the shaft (1). Note: If possible, shim to the maximum toler-
122.Install the stop circlip (10). ance.
123.Fit the cup (16) in the cover (15). 134.Remove screws (4) (13). Remove housing (5).
124.Put the cover on the pinion (2). 135.Fit the final shims (3) selected in operation 133 on
125.Slide the bearing cone (7) on the shaft (1). the cover (15). Install the unit (5). Fit and defini-
tively tighten screws (4) (13) to 36 - 46 Nm with the
126.Install the stop circlip (6).
thread previously coated with Loctite 242 or equiv-
127.Determine the thickness of shims (3) to obtain a alent.
temporary clearance of 0.1 to 0.15 mm approx. for
136.Position the stop plate (11). Coat the thread of the
final shimming with preloading (see below). Posi-
screws (12) with Loctite 242 or equivalent and
tion the shims and the unit (5). Tighten screws (4)
tighten to 12 - 16 Nm.
and (13) to a torque of 36 - 46 Nm.
128.Put the unit (14) in a vice.
Fig. 20

GBA20 Power shuttle
Final operations
137.Refit the Dynashift unit (see section 5).
138.Refit the reverse clutch (see § E).
139.Refit the input unit (see section 5).
140.Refit the forward clutch (§ B).
G . Service tools
1. Tool available in the AGCO network
- 3378240 M1 - Planet carrier holding tool (Fig. 21
2. Locally made tools

- Belleville washer compression tool (Fig. 22)
(1) U iron profile: 60 Fig. 21
(2) Threaded rod: Ø 8
(3) Round iron machined with the following dimen-
sions:
Ø = 36, L = 60.
Fig. 22

GBA20 Power shuttle
- Sleeve for removing and refitting the clutch

assembly (Fig. 23)
(1) Pipe: Tu52B outer Ø 42.4 thickness 5
(2) Pipe: Tu52B outer Ø 48.3 thickness 2.9
Fig. 23

GBA20 Dynashift
5A13 - GBA20 Dynashift
CONTENTS
A . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
B . Operating principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
A . Preliminary operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
B . Removing and disassembling the cover, housing, forward clutch and brake . . . . . 9
C . Removing and splitting the planet carrier assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
D . Disassembling the reverse clutch and brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
E . Assembling the planet carriers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
F . Reassembling the reverse clutch and the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
G . Refitting the cover, forward clutch, brake and housing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
H . Shimming the planet carriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
I . Assembling and fitting the input unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
J . Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

GBA20 Dynashift

GBA20 Dynashift
Secondary epicyclic gear train

A . General
This epicyclic gear train is controlled by hydraulic
The Dynashift unit is mounted between the reverse clutches and brakes.
clutch of the power shuttle and the mechanical unit
consisting of the drive pinion (see section 5). It is a The secondary ring gear (34) is:
hydraulically operated gear shift mechanism which
- either locked on the primary shaft (7) by three clutch
provides the gearbox with four input ratios.
discs (3) and the Belleville washer (4) located in the
The function is ensured by two epicyclic gear trains front part of the unit,
linked to two hydraulic clutches.
- or immobilised in relation to the housing by three
Dynashift design enables selection of four ratios, brake discs (15) and a piston (22).
without declutching, using a lever located under the
steering wheel.
When there is no pressure, the piston (22) is pulled
The Dynashift unit is controlled by two solenoid valves
back by the twelve springs (20) and the Belleville
mounted on the clutch unit located on the front
washer (4) by means of the thrust plate (16).
right-hand side of the gearbox. The two solenoid
valves are controlled by the electronic system of the When the 17 bar pressure is built up in the circuit, the
tractor. piston (22) moves forward and locks the brake discs
(15) while pushing the thrust plate (16) that
compresses the Belleville washer (4).
B . Operating principle The speed of the secondary ring gear is established as
follows:
The Dynashift input unit comprises two epicyclic gear - speed equals engine speed if the front piston is not
trains: under pressure,
- the primary epicyclic gear train, the main part of the - speed nil when the front piston is under pressure.
input unit, used to transmit the movement from the
engine to the gearbox, The secondary sun gear (61) is either:
- the secondary epicyclic gear train controls the speed - locked on the secondary shaft with four clutch discs
of the primary sun gear. (50) and a Belleville washer (52) located on the rear
part of the unit,
Primary epicyclic gear train - or immobilised in relation to the housing by means of
three brake discs (41) and a piston (37).
The movement enters via the primary ring gear (31)
which is splined onto the transmission shaft (7). It
rotates at engine speed. When there is no pressure, the piston (37) is pushed
The movement exits via the planet carrier (28) which is forward by the Belleville washer and six springs (65).
splined onto the secondary shaft (53). The primary sun
gear (64) is driven by the secondary epicyclic gear train. The 17 bar pressure moves the piston (37) back and
The speed of this sun gear determines the drive unit locks the brake discs (41). It compresses the Belleville
ratio of the gearbox. washer (52) by means of the thrust plate (45) which
releases the clutch discs of the secondary shaft.
Immobilisation of either the secondary ring gear (34) or

the secondary sun gear (61) modifies the speed of the
secondary planet carrier (39). The latter drives the
primary sun gear (64), and this establishes the gearbox
drive unit ratio.
Challenger MT500B - Edition 4.a 5A13.3

GBA20 Dynashift
5A13.4 Challenger MT500B - Edition 4.a

GBA20 Dynashift
Parts list (Fig. 1 - 2) (54) Splined hub

(55) Circlip Overall view
(1) Secondary ring gear carrier
(56) Spacer
(2) Intermediate plates
(57) Ball bearing
(58) Ball bearing
(4) Belleville washer
(59) Reverse clutch housing
(5) Splined hub
(60) Locking ring
(6) Needle bearing
(61) Secondary sun gear
(7) Primary shaft
(62) Locking ring
(8) Ring restrictor
(9) Screw
(64) Primary sun gear
(10) Friction washer
(65) Springs
(11) Bearing
(69) Circlip
(12) Washer
(70) Stop
(13) Front cover
(71) Shim(s)
(14) Clutch housing
(72) Locking ring
(15) Front brake discs
(74) Rivets
(16) Thrust plate (clutch - brake)
(75) Deflector
(17) Clutch plate
(76) Tab washer
(18) Screw
(77) Spring washer
(19) Screw
(20) Springs
(21) Spacer housing
(22) Front piston
(23) Rivet
(24) O’ring
(25) Screw
(26) O’ring
(27) Ball bearing
(28) Primary planet carrier
(29) Stop plate
(30) Screw
(31) Primary ring gear
(32) O’ring
(33) Screw
(34) Secondary ring gear
(35) O’ring
(36) O’ring
(37) Rear piston
(38) Clutch plate
(39) Secondary planet carrier
(40) Cover
(41) Rear brake discs
(42) Screw
(43) O’ring
(44) Clutch plate
(46) Screw
(47) Cover
(49) Locking ring
(53) Secondary shaft Fig. 1

GBA20 Dynashift
Exploded view
Fig. 2

GBA20 Dynashift
Explanation of the ratios Legend

Ratio A: 1/1.620 reduction (Fig. 3) Lubrication
The two pistons (22) and (37) are simultaneously pres- 17 bar low pressure
surized by the 17 bar circuit.
The secondary ring gear (34) is locked onto the housing Transmission of movement to the gearbox
by means of the front brake.
The secondary sun gear (61) is locked onto the housing
by the rear brake. Pilot flow to the primary sun gear (64)
Consequently, the secondary epicyclic gear train is
locked.
The primary sun gear (64) is locked.
The reduction ratio is only defined by the primary

epicyclic gear train. This is a conventional type of kine-
matics: movement input is by the ring gear and output
is by the planet carrier, the sun gear remaining still.
22 37
34
61
64
MA-05-02013A
Fig. 3

GBA20 Dynashift
Ratio B: 1/1.386 reduction (Fig. 4) Legend

The front piston (22) is pressurized. Lubrication
Front brake locks the secondary ring gear (34) onto the
17 bar low pressure
housing.
Rear piston (37) is not under pressure.
The secondary sun gear (61) rotates with the Transmission of movement to the gearbox
secondary shaft (53) (clutch clamped).
The secondary planet carrier (39) rotates at a low Pilot flow to the primary sun gear (64)
speed, driving the primary sun gear (64).
The rotational speed of the primary planet carrier (28)
corresponds to the speed difference between the
primary ring gear (31) and the primary sun gear (64).
The reduction effect is therefore minor.
22 37
34
31 39
64
28
61
53
MA-05-02014A
Fig. 4

GBA20 Dynashift
Ratio C: 1/1.1704 reduction (Fig. 5) Legend

The rear piston (37) is pressurized. Lubrication
The rear brake locks the secondary sun gear (61) onto
17 bar low pressure
the housing.
The front piston (22) is not pressurized.
The secondary ring gear (34) rotates with the primary Transmission of movement to the gearbox
shaft (7) thereby transmitting a higher speed to the
secondary planet carrier (39). Pilot flow to the primary sun gear (64)
The primary sun gear (64) is driven by the secondary
planet carrier (39) at a greater speed than in ratio B.
Therefore, the reduction ratio is lower.
22 37
34
7 39
64
61
MA-05-02015A
Fig. 5

GBA20 Dynashift
Ratio D: Ratio 1/1 (Fig. 6) Legend

The two pistons are not under pressure. The two Lubrication
clutches are therefore clamped.
17 bar low pressure
The secondary ring gear (34) rotates with the primary
shaft (7).
The secondary sun gear (61) is locked on the Transmission of movement to the gearbox
secondary shaft (53) thereby mechanically locking the
entire system. Pilot flow to the primary sun gear (64)
Consequently, the ratio is 1:1 (direct drive).
34
7 61
53
MA-05-02016A
Fig. 6

GBA20 Dynashift
C . Preliminary operations
the gearbox (see section 2).
2. Drain the gearbox and the rear axle.
3. Remove the forward clutch from the power shuttle
(see section 5).
4. Remove the input unit (see section 5).
5. Put the input unit vertically and separate the
reverse clutch from the power shuttle of the input
unit (see section 5).
D . Removing and disassembling the

cover, housing, forward clutch and
brake
(Fig. 7 - Fig. 8)
6. Using two lugs or two rings made locally, remove
the shaft (7), cover (13) and housing (21) assembly
(Fig. 7). Recover the stop (70).
7. Remove the piston (37) from the housing (21).
Discard the O'rings (35) (36).
8. Using tool ref. 3376888M1 and 2 spacers 11-20 x
70, ref. 3779375M1 (see § L), immobilise the ring
gear (34). Remove the screws (33) and separate
the ring gear (34) from the ring gear carrier (1).
Compress the spring washer (77) while pressing
against the ring gear (31). Take off circlip (69).
Remove the primary ring gear (31) and ball bearing
(27). Remove the spring washer.
Fig. 7

GBA20 Dynashift
9. Provisionally refit the ring gear (34) and the screws 12. Remove the housing (21) and the piston (22).
(33). With the tool used in operation 8, immobilise Discard the O'rings (24) (26).
the ring gear (34) again (Fig. 8). Take out the 13. Remove the discs (3) (15), intermediate plates (2),
screws (25). clutch plate (17), hub (5), springs (20) and the
10. Remove the ring gear (34) and ring gear carrier (1) thrust plate (16).
assembly. 14. Remove the Belleville washer (4), the unit (14), the
11. Definitively separate the ring gear (34) from the shaft (7) on the internal face of the cover (13) and
ring gear carrier (1). recover the friction washer (10).
Fig. 8

GBA20 Dynashift
E . Removing and splitting the

planet carrier assembly
15. Gently compress the planet carrier assembly using
tool ref. 3376920 M2, and the adaptor plate, ref.
3378239 M1 (see § L) (Fig. 10).
16. Remove the ring (72). Remove the tab washer (76),
planet carrier assembly and the shims (71)
mounted along the mating faces of the primary
planet carrier (28).
17. Remove the secondary sun gear (61) and the
locking ring (49) (if necessary).
18. Take off circlip (55). Remove the bearing (57) and
the spacer (56).
19. Split the secondary planet carrier (39) from the
primary planet carrier (28).
Fig. 9
20. Remove the locking ring (60) and bearing (58).
21. Place the secondary planet carrier in vertical posi-
tion. Remove the needles (63) by hitting the planet
carrier gently against a wooden shim (Fig. 9). Split
the planet carrier from the primary sun gear (64)
along with the ring (62) and deflector (75).
Fig. 10

GBA20 Dynashift
F . Disassembling the reverse clutch

and brake
22. Remove the clutch plate (38), springs (65) and
discs (41) (the latter should be separated from the
clutch plate (44)).
23. Remove the reverse clutch housing assembly (59),
thrust plate (45) and the last disc (41). Remove the
friction washer (51). If necessary, take out the
screws (19) and remove the stop plate (29).
24. Remove the screws (46). Remove the cover (47)
and the Belleville washer (52). Separate the thrust
plate (45), discs (50) and intermediate plates (48).
25. Remove the hub (54).
G . Assembling the planet carriers

26. Check and clean all components. Replace any
defective parts.
27. Make sure the lubrication holes on the planet
carrier pins are not obstructed.
28. Check the end play and rotation of each pinion gear
by hand.
29. Assemble the primary sun gear (64), complete
with locking ring (62) and deflector (75), on the
secondary planet carrier (39).
30. In each hole of the primary sun gear, slide three
needles (63) home into the bottom of the groove of
the secondary planet carrier.
31. Fit the bearing (58), then the locking ring (60).
32. Assemble the secondary planet carrier on the
primary planet carrier (28). Turn the pinion gears to
ensure they mesh correctly.
33. Position the spacer (56), bearing (57) and fit the
circlip (55).
34. Check the primary pinion gears backlash by hand.
35. Fit the locking ring (49) (if it was removed) on the
secondary sun gear (61).

GBA20 Dynashift
H . Reassembling the reverse clutch

and the brake
defective parts.
37. Turn the planet carriers over in order to access the
screws (46) (Fig. 11).
38. Fit the secondary sun gear (61), the housing (59)
and the hub (54), with its internal grooves pointing
downwards (Fig. 11).
39. Fit: the discs (50), the intermediate plates (48), the
thrust plate (45) and the Belleville washer (52) as
per Fig. 1, then the cover (47).
40. Centre the reverse clutch assembly (59) with tool
3376887M1 (see § L et Fig. 12).
41. Lightly smear screws (46) with Loctite 242 or Fig. 11
equivalent and tighten them to a torque of 13 - 15
Nm. Remove the tool. Separate the housing unit
from the planet carriers.
If removed, refit the stop plate (29). Insert and
tighten the screws (19) to 12 - 16 Nm with their
threads lightly greased with Loctite 242 or equiva-
lent.
42. Smear the washer (51) with miscible grease and fit
it on the cover (47).
43. Fit a disc (41).
44. Fit the housing assembly (59) and the washer (51)
on the secondary shaft (53). Assemble the hub
(54), making sure its internal grooves face upwards
(Fig. 13).
45. Fit the two remaining discs (41) either side of the
clutch plate (44). Refit the springs (65) (Fig. 13).
Fig. 12
Fig. 13

GBA20 Dynashift
I . Refitting the cover, forward

clutch, brake and housing
46. Check that the rivets (23) (74) are fitted.
Note: If it is necessary to replace the bearing
(11), force fit a new bearing (6) with its face
flush with the back end of the bearing.
Degrease the mating faces of the bearing and
of the washer (12). Apply a light coating of
Loctite 638 or equivalent to one of the washer
faces. Stick the washer to the bearing and
leave to dry for a few minutes.
47. Fit the bearing on the front cover (13) making sure
to align the lubricating channels. Lightly smear the
screws with Loctite 242 or equivalent and tighten
to a torque of:
- screws (9): 12 -16 Nm Fig. 14
- screws (42): 20 -28 Nm
48. Place the cover on a suitable fixture. 58. Fit and tighten the screws (18) to a torque of 20 -23
49. Slide the primary shaft (7) through the internal face Nm.
of the cover (13) and the housing (14) together Connect a pressure gauge fitted with a valve and
with the washer (12) (Fig. 14). suitable fixture to the front piston port. Feed the
50. Fit the Belleville washer (4) as indicated in Fig. 1, a circuit with compressed air at 0.3 bar. Close the
disc (15) and the thrust plate (16). valve and check that no pressure drop occurs for 1
51. Place the hub (5) on the primary shaft (7) with the minute.
internal grooves facing upwards (Fig. 14). Fit the 59. Fit the bearing (27) on the primary ring gear (31).
discs (3) and the intermediate plates (2). 60. Refit the ring gears (31) (34), secondary ring gear
52. Fit the two remaining discs (15) either side of the carrier (1), bearing (27) and spring washer (77).
clutch plate (17). Carry out the operations 8 to 11 in reverse order.
53. Refit the springs (20). Fit the O’ring (32). Tightening torques:
54. Check that the rivets are fitted in the housing (21). - screws (25): 31 - 35 Nm, with Loctite 242 or
Make sure the channels in the pistons (22) (37) equivalent
within the housing (21) are not blocked.
- screws (33): 13 -15 Nm, with Loctite 242 or
55. Lubricate the O'rings (24) (26) and assemble them equivalent
on the piston (22) and in the housing (21) respec-
61. Lubricate and assemble new O'rings (35) (36).
tively.
Place the piston (37) in the housing (21) and force
56. Position the piston in the housing and fit it using a fit it using a small plastic mallet to hit progressively
small plastic mallet to hit progressively round the round the edge. Use a suitable fixture to hold the
edge. piston. Check tightness of O'rings. Use the same
57. Ensure the seal (32) is fitted and position the method as for the front piston.
housing (21) on the cover (13). Check that the
housing lubricating channel aligns with that of the
cover.
Note: When replacing the cover (13) or the

spacer (21) it is necessary to check and possibly
adjust the forward clutch of the power shuttle
(see section 5).

GBA20 Dynashift
J . Shimming the planet carriers

Adjusting J1 clearance (Fig. 15)
Note: For adjusting clearances J1 and J2, springs
(65) and clutch plate (38) must be removed.
On reverse clutch housing (Fig. 17)

62. Use a depth gauge to measure dimensions B and
C at two opposing points. Take the average of the
two measurements. Calculate dimension:
A=C-B
On the planet carrier assembly (Fig. 16)

63. Install the secondary sun gear (61) complete with
locking ring (49) on ball bearing (57). Fig. 15
64. Measure dimension D using a depth gauge.
65. Determine gap E between primary planet carrier
(28) and hub (54) (Fig. 18) according to the formula:
E=D-A
66. Fill space E with shims (71) having a value of E +
0.50 min. to + 0.70 max., to obtain a clearance of:
J1 = E + 0.50 to 0.70
Fig. 16
Fig. 17

GBA20 Dynashift

67. Place the secondary sun gear (61) on housing (59)
and the planet carrier assembly on the shaft (53).
Fit washer (76) and ring (72).
68. Position a dial gauge feeler pin as per Fig. 19 and
check the clearance by moving the planet carrier
assembly vertically.
69. Depending on the measured clearance, select the
thickness of shims (71) to obtain J2 = 0 to 0.20
mm.
70. Remove the planet carrier assembly.
71. Fit springs (65). Position clutch plate (38), ensuring
that the notches align with the tabs of the cover
(40).
72. Ensure presence of shims (71) defined at operation
66.
Fig. 18
73. Install the sun gear (61) and the planet carrier
assembly and compress it using tool 3376920M2
and the adaptor plate 3378239 M1 (see Fig. 10 and
§ L).
74. Fit shims (71) selected at operation 69 against the
primary planet carrier (28). Install washer (76) and
ring (72) (Fig. 19).
75. Check the secondary pinion gear backlash by hand.
K . Assembling and fitting the input

unit
76. Screw two guide studs on the housing (21)
(Optional).
77. Using a sling (Fig. 7), install the primary shaft
assembly (7), the cover (13) and the housing (21),
making sure that the lubrication channels are
aligned.
78. Turn the shaft in order to engage the pinion gears Fig. 19
in the ring gears.
79. Remove the guide studs (if used). Fit the screws 83. Install the input unit (see section 5) and the
(30), tighten to 72 - 96 Nm. Lightly coat the thread forward clutch of the power shuttle (see section 5).
with Loctite 242 or equivalent.
80. Check shaft rotation. gearbox (see section 2).
81. If it is necessary to replace the cover (13), fit the 85. Top up the oil level in housings and check using the
ring restrictor (8) lightly smeared with Loctite 648 dipstick located to the rear of the rear axle.
or equivalent. Ensure the product does not block
86. Carry out a road test.
any lubricating ports.
82. Refit the power shuttle reverse clutch (see section 5).

GBA20 Dynashift
Fig. 20 Fig. 21
L . Service tools
Tools available in the AGCO network
- 3376887 M1 - Centring tool (Fig. 20)
- 3376888 M1 - Secondary ring gear holding tool
(Fig. 21)
- 3376920 M2 - Planet carrier compression tool
(Fig. 22)
- 3378239 M1 - Adaptor plate for planet carrier
compression tool (Fig. 23)
Tool to be ordered from your Spare Parts

dealer
- 3779375 M1 - Spacers to use with secondary ring
gear holding tool (Fig. 21) Fig. 22
Fig. 23

GBA20 Dynashift

GBA20 Selector rails
5A15 - GBA20 Selector rails
CONTENTS
A . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
A . Servicing guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
B . Creeper fork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
C . Hare and Tortoise fork - Mechanical lock assembly - 1st /2nd - 3rd / 4th forks -
Selector rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
D . Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21


Parts list
A . General
(1) Plug
The selector rail (7) holding the different forks is (2) Spring
located on the right-hand side of the gearbox, on the (3) Locking stud
selector cover side. It passes through the gearbox (5) 1st - 2nd Fork
housing and the control piston of the Hare and Tortoise (6) 3rd - 4th Fork
range (13). (7) Guide pin
It is held in position by a set screw (8). A cup plug (9) (8) Set screw
closes off the bore at the front and a cover (15) closes (9) Cup cap
the rear end.
(10) Cylinder
(11) O’ring
The 1st - 2nd (5) and 3rd - 4th (6) forks are not adjust- (12) O’ring
able. The creeper fork (28) is adjustable by mechanical (13) Hare and Tortoise range piston
pressure.
(14) O’ring
(15) Cover
Two adjustments are necessary to obtain the correct (16) Screw
functioning of fork (20) in both ranges (Hare/Tortoise): (17) Screw
- adjustment of the space between the fork pads and (18) Stop
the synchromesh sliding coupler (19) Adjusting screw
- adjustment of the stop (18), in relation to the position (20) Hare / Tortoise fork
of the indexing pin mounted on the selector cover. (26) Nut
(27) Locking screw
An optional creeper unit may be fitted (see chapter 5). (28) Creeper fork
(29) End-of-travel pin


Overall view
Fig. 1

Exploded view
Fig. 2

Remark
B . Servicing guide The selector rail can also be removed through the front
on tractors not fitted with a creeper unit. To do this it
This guide describes a succession of operations to be
is necessary to:
followed depending on the mechanical component to
be worked on. - split the tractor between the engine and the gearbox
(see section 2).
- remove the gearbox spacer (only on tractors fitted
Creeper fork with 6-cylinder engine, see section 3).
- See section 5.
Creeper fork
Hare / Tortoise fork - Remove the selector cover (see section 5).
- Remove the selector cover (see section 5). - Remove the right-hand hydraulic cover (see section 9).
- Remove the right-hand hydraulic cover (see section 9). - Remove the creeper fork.
- Remove the creeper fork (if fitted).
- Move the selector rail forward.
- Disassemble the hydraulic parts (ram) of the Hare/
Tortoise mechanism.
- Take out the range fork.
1st, 2nd and 3rd, 4th gear fork

- Remove the selector cover (see section 5).
- Remove the right-hand hydraulic cover (see section
9).
- Remove the left-hand hydraulic cover (see section 9)
for closed centre and TFLS hydraulic equipment.
- Disassemble the hydraulic parts (ram) of the Hare/
Tortoise mechanism.
- Move the selector rail backwards.
- Take out the 1st, 2nd and 3rd, 4th gear forks.
Selector rail
- Remove the selector cover (see section 5).
- Remove the right-hand hydraulic cover (see section 9).
- Remove the left-hand hydraulic cover (see section 9)
for closed centre and TFLS hydraulic equipment.
- Disassemble the hydraulic components of the Hare/
Tortoise mechanism.
- Take out the 1st, 2nd and 3rd, 4th gear forks.
- Move the selector rail backwards as far as it will go
and disengage it through the selector cover aperture.

Fig. 3 Fig. 4
C . Creeper fork
Disassembly
1. Disconnect the control cable.
2. Remove the selector cover (see section 5). Take
out the plugs (1), the springs (2) and the locking
pins (3) to release the selector rail (Fig. 2).
3. Remove the right-hand hydraulic cover(s) (see
section 9).
4. Take out the screw (1), pull the rod (2) and the lever
(3) outwards to release the finger of the fork (Fig.
3).
5. Unscrew the nut (26) and the locking screw (27) on
the fork (28).
6. Take out set screw (8).
7. Turn the selector rail (7) and drive out the pin (29) Fig. 5
(Fig. 4 - Fig. 5).
Note: Ensure the pin does not fall into the
housing. Move the selector rail forward.
8. Drive the pin (1) from the sleeve (2) (Fig. 6).
Note: If the pin cannot be accessed on 4WD
tractors, carry out operations 9 to 12.
9. Disconnect the front differential lock control
hoses.
Fig. 6

Fig. 7 Fig. 8
10. Remove the guard (1) and separate the rear sleeve
(5) from the transmission shaft (3) (Fig. 7).
11. With the help of a trolley jack, lift the rear axle
beam of the tractor. Turn the drive pinion to
correctly position the coupling sleeve (2) (Fig. 6).
12. Drive out the pin (1) (Fig. 6).
13. Provisionally fit the set screw (8) in order to hold
the selector rail in place to remove the fork (28).
14. Slide the sleeve (2) and coupler (1) closer together
on the linkage shaft (3) (Fig. 8).
15. Move the sleeve, linkage shaft and coupler
assembly towards the external left-hand side, then
take it out of the fork (28) (Fig. 8) and remove it via
the right-hand cover aperture.
Note: Note and mark the assembly order of the
sleeve (2) (Fig. 8).
16. Remove the fork (28) on the selector rail (7) (Fig. 9). Fig. 9
17. Disassemble the lever (3) (Fig. 3).
18. To remove the creeper gear control link (1), turn it
so it passes beneath the selector rail (7) (Fig. 10).
Discard the O'ring (3).
Fig. 10

Reassembly
defective parts.
20. Refit the control linkage and pull it as far to the right
as possible. Install a new lubricated O'ring (Fig.
11).
21. Reassemble the lever (3) (Fig. 12). Tighten the
screw.
22. Refit the fork on the selector rail.
Note: Ensure that the finger (1) of the creeper
gear control linkage points towards the front of
the tractor (Fig. 12).
23. Couple the linkage shaft and coupler assembly
inside the housing, then position it in the fork.
Note: Point the machined groove on the sleeve
(2) towards the rear of the tractor (Fig. 13).
Fig. 11
24. Slide the sleeve and coupler onto the linkage shaft.
25. Force fit a new double pin (1) into the sleeve (2)
(Fig. 6).
26. Take out set screw (8).
27. Force fit a new pin (29) and turn the selector rail (7)
(Fig. 4 - Fig. 5).
28. Clean the set screw (8), smear it lightly with
Loctite 542 and tighten it to a torque of 38 - 43 Nm.
29. Ensure that the ball mounted at the end of the
locking screw (27) returns correctly to its initial
position after pressure has been applied manually
by the locking screw. Position the fork (28) and
locking screw on flat section “M” of the selector
rail (7) (between the two locking catches) (Fig. 1)
Fully tighten the screw without forcing it in order to
compress the ball.
Loosen the screw by one quarter turn. Clean the
nut (26) and smear it with Loctite 270 or equiva-
lent, and tighten to a torque of 15 - 20 Nm while Fig. 12
holding the locking screw.
Check the the fork locks correctly.
30. Turn and push the rod (2) in order to engage the
finger in the fork. Fit the screw (1) lightly smeared
with Loctite 542 or equivalent (Fig. 3).
31. Check that the rod operates correctly.
32. Check that the O’rings of the internal hydraulic
pipes are not damaged (see section 9).
Fig. 13

33. Refit the right-hand side cover (see section 9).

34. Attach the electrical harnesses with a clip retainer.
35. Refit the trailer braking valve (if fitted, open
centre), checking that the O’rings are not
damaged. Tighten the screws to a torque of 25 -35
Nm.
36. Reconnect the pipes and hoses of the hydraulic
cover.
37. Refit the strainer, support and filter (open centre).
38. If necessary, carry out operations 9 and 10 in
reverse order.
39. Refit the plugs (1), the springs (2) and the locking
pins (3) (Fig. 2). Refit the selector cover (see
section 5). Reconnect and adjust the creeper unit
control cable (see section 5).
40. Refit the wheel.
41. Remove the axle stand and the jack.
42. Tighten the wheel nuts to a torque of 400 - 450
Nm.
43. Top up the oil level in the rear axle and gearbox.
44. Start the tractor.
45. Check the operation of the electric and electronic
circuits and the oil tightness of the mating face of
the cover and hydraulic unions.
46. Carry out a road test of the creeper gear controls
and 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th gears of the Hare / Tortoise
ranges.

D . Hare and Tortoise fork - Mechan-

ical lock assembly - 1st /2nd - 3rd /
4th forks - Selector rail
Remark
This section deals in detail with the disassembly, reas-
sembly of the gear shifting mechanism on tractors
fitted with open centre hydraulic equipment. For
closed centre or Twin Flow Load Sensing hydraulics
see § B - Servicing guide.
Preliminary operations
47. Remove the selector cover (see section 5).
48. Remove the right-hand hydraulic cover (see
section 9). Fig. 14
Disassembly
49. Remove the plugs (1), the springs (2) and the
locking pins (3) (Fig. 2).
50. Take out set screw (8) (Fig. 14).
51. Drive out the cup plug (9) forwards by striking the
rear of the selector rail (7) (Fig. 14).
52. Place the Tortoise and Hare fork (20) in the Hare
position.
53. Remove the adjusting screws (19).
54. Remove the screws (16) and remove the cover
(15).
55. Take out the Hare and Tortoise piston (13) and
discard the O' rings.
56. Take off the cylinder (10) and discard the O' ring.
57. Turn the pump suction pipe (1) upwards, without
loosening the screws (2) holding the collar onto the
pipe (Fig. 15) (open centre). Fig. 15
58. Move the selector rail (7) to the rear in order to
release the forks.
Note: Slide the rail underneath the rear axle
housing reinforcement (Fig. 16).
59. Extract the 1st - 2nd and 3rd - 4th forks.
60. Extract the Hare and Tortoise fork.
Fig. 16

61. If necessary, remove the stop (18).

62. Take the selector rail out through the selector
cover aperture by passing it through the Hare /
Tortoise cylinder bore (Fig. 17).
Reassembly
defective parts.
64. Refit the selector rail through the selector cover
aperture by passing it through the Hare / Tortoise
cylinder bore (Fig. 6).
Refit the forks.
65. Check that the hydraulic ports in the Hare /
Tortoise cylinder (10) are not obstructed. Refit the
cylinder fitted with a new O' ring (11) (Fig. 18).
Note: The cylinder (10) is held in position (Fig. Fig. 17
18):
- at the front, by the shoulder machined on its
outer diameter,
- at the rear, by the cover (15).
66. Slide the selector rail forwards into the Hare /
Tortoise fork and the 3rd, 4th, 1st, 2nd forks.
67. On the piston (13), fit O' rings (12) (14), then intro-
duce it into the cylinder bore (10) and onto the
selector rail (7) (Fig. 18).
Note: Turn the adjusting screw holes towards
the tapped holes on the fork. Temporarily lock
the piston with a screw (19).
68. Fit the cover (15) with screws (16) and tighten
them to a torque of 25 - 35 Nm.
69. Clean the set screw (8), smear it lightly with
Loctite 542 or equivalent and tighten it to a torque
of 38 - 43 Nm.
70. Smear the cup plug (9) with Loctite 542 or equiva-
lent and insert it flush with the housing.
71. Fit the locking pins, springs and locking plugs.
Tighten the plugs to a torque of 50 - 70 Nm.
Fig. 18

Adjusting the clearance of the Hare /

Tortoise fork pads and the synchromesh
sliding coupler
Principle
- The positioning of fork (20) is obtained by acting
upon the difference between the distance between
the centre lines of the tapped holes "Y" and the
centre lines of the receiving indents "Z" on piston
(13).
- A different fork movement is obtained by acting
either on the front screw or on the rear screw
according to the adjustment required (Fig. 19).
72. Position the control piston (13) and the sliding

coupler "C" in the high range (Hare) (Fig. 21).
73. Maintain the sliding coupler manually against Fig. 19
pinion "L" of the high range (Fig. 21).
74. Adjust the position of the fork (20) using the two
adjusting screws (19) previously cleaned in solvent
and lightly smeared with Loctite 221, in order to
obtain a clearance of J1 = 0.3 mm between the
rear face of the pad and the sliding coupler (Fig. 20
- Fig. 21).
Note: For this adjustment, use the locally made
tool (see § E).
Fig. 20
Fig. 21

75. Position the control piston (13) and the sliding

coupler "C" in the low range (Tortoise) (Fig. 22).
76. Check that there is a clearance of J2 = 0.3 mm
minimum (this value is determined by the clear-
ance J1) between the pad and the sliding coupler
when the latter rests against the pinion "T" of the
low range (Fig. 22).
Alternatively and progressively tighten the screws
(19) to a torque of 25 - 35 Nm taking care not to
modify the adjustment.
Note: In the Tortoise position, if face "X" of the
fork pad (20) is driven against the sliding
coupler "C" (Fig. 21), increase clearance J1 (Fig.
21).
77. Check for the correct operation of the fork.
Fig. 22

Adjusting the the Hare / Tortoise fork stop

Principle
- locking is adjusted by an adjustable stop (18) located
on the Hare / Tortoise fork. This adjustment is
obtained using a tool (see § D) whose role consists
of conveying to the stop the positioning of the
indexing pin, mounted on the selector cover.
- The aim of this adjustment is to provide safety to the
Hare / Tortoise mechanism, during operation, by
mechanically immobilising the fork in the Hare or
Tortoise position.
Reminder
- It is essential to adjust the clearance between the
Hare / Tortoise fork pads and the synchromesh
sliding coupler, before adjusting the stop (18).
Fig. 23
On the cover (Fig. 25)
78. Place the indexing pin (35) in the high range (Hare).
79. Engage 3rd gear.
80. Place the tool on the selector cover (Fig. 23).
Special points
81. It is essential to equally share the clearance
between the indexing pin and the plunger (31) (Fig.
25, detail A).
82. Using the tool, measure dimension X according to
Fig. 23 and Fig. 25.
On the gearbox (Fig. 25)

83. Engage 3rd gear. Using the tool, set dimension X
to the gearbox.
84. Apply manual pressure on the fork towards the
Hare range.
Fig. 24
85. Adjust the stop (18) (Fig. 24 - Fig. 25) by placing it
in contact with the tool.
86. Lightly smear the threads of screw (17) with
Loctite 242 or equivalent and tighten it to a torque
of 40 - 50 Nm.

Legend
L Mechanism synchronised in Hare
X Dimension of tool measured on the selector
cover and set to the gearbox
(18) Stop
(31) Plunger
(35) Indexing pin
(3) Engaged gear (example 3rd gear)
Fig. 25

Check
87. Check the operation of the Hare and Tortoise
ranges.
88. Check the smooth operation of all gears.
Final operations
89. Refit the right-hand hydraulic cover (see section 9).
90. 90. Refit the selector cover (see section 5).
91. Reconnect and adjust the creeper unit control (if
fitted) (see section 5).
centre housing.
93. Carry out a road test of:
- gears from 1st to 4th and vice versa
- the Hare and Tortoise ranges
- the creeper unit (if fitted).
94. Check for the oil tightness of the cover mating
faces and the hydraulic unions.
Tightening torque
- Rear wheel nuts: 400 - 450 Nm.

E . Service tools
1 . Tools available in the AGCO network
- 3378325M11 - Hare and Tortoise fork lock adjust-
ment tool (Fig. 26)
2 . Locally made tool
- Shim hinged on suitable fixture S (Fig. 27)
Fig. 26
Fig. 27


GBA20 Output shaft
5A16 - GBA20 Output shaft
CONTENTS
A . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
C . Removing and refitting the selector rail and the forks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
D . Removing, refitting and shimming the shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
E . Final operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

GBA20 Output shaft

GBA20 Output shaft
Parts list
A . General
(21) Synchronizer cone (Hare)
Bearings (28) (30) separated by a spacer (80) rotate (22) Synchronizer cone (Tortoise)
drive pinion (29) on the shaft. Bearings (79) (81) (24) Needle bearing
operate as axial stops. (27) Thrust washer
(28) Needle bearing
A double cone synchronizer enables gear range (29) 3rd drive pinion (Hare)
shifting between pinions (29) (Hare) and (36) (Tortoise). (30) Needle bearing
(31) Hare / Tortoise double cone synchronizer
Preloading, or the clearance between bearing cones (32) Thrust washer
(39) (40) and their respective cups (48) (37) is adjusted (35) Ring
depending on the thickness of circlip (49). (36) Tortoise gear
(37) Bearing cup
Description (38) Shim(s)
(39) Bearing cone
The output shaft transmits movement from the
(40) Bearing cone
different ranges to the rear axle transfer shaft. It is
(41) Screw
fitted on the lower transmission line at the rear of the
unit. (42) Shim(s)
(43) Laminated shim
(44) Output shaft
It is supported at the front by a needle bearing fitted in
(45) Circlip
the mainshaft bore and at the rear by two opposing
taper roller bearings. (46) Stop plate
(48) Bearing cup
(49) Circlip
The shaft (44) supports:
(79) Needle bearing
- the drive pinion (36) fitted idle onto the combined
(80) Spacer
bearings (28) (30)
(81) Needle bearing
- the idle-mounted pinion (36) and bush (35) assembly
- the Hare / Tortoise synchromesh (31), held in rota-
tion by splines.
To ensure correct operation of the assembly

depending on the load applied to transmission, several
adjustments are required:
- J3 clearance: via the circlip (49), to cancel the clear-
ance between the bearing cones (39) (40) and their
respective bearing cups.
- J4 clearance: the shim(s) (38) positioned between
the shoulder of the shaft (44) and the bearing cone
(39) allow(s) end play for the pinion (29).
- J5 clearance : the shim(s) (42) between the bearing
cone (40) and the laminated shim (43) cancel the end
play of the cones (39) (40) on the shaft (44).
Note: The output shaft without creeper gears is

different to that with creeper gears.

GBA20 Output shaft
Overall view
Fig. 1

GBA20 Output shaft
Exploded view
Fig. 2

GBA20 Output shaft
1. Split the tractor between the gearbox and the rear
axle (see section 2).
3. If necessary, remove screw (1) (Fig. 11).
C . Removing and refitting the

selector rail and the forks
Remark
Access to the output shaft requires separation from
the tractor. Consequently, the sensor rail removal is
made easier following separation which is to be made
from the rear side of the gearbox housing. Apart from Fig. 3
this point, the procedure remains unchanged.
Disassembly
4. If the tractor is fitted with a creeper unit, remove
pin (1), locknut (2), adjustable lock (3), fork (4) with
sleeve (5) (Fig. 3).
5. Remove the selector rail and the forks (see section 5).
Reassembly
defective parts.
7. Refit the selector rail and the forks (see section 5).
8. Depending on the equipment, install sleeve (5),
fork (4), adjustable lock (3) and pin (1) (Fig. 3). To
adjust the fork, see section 5.

GBA20 Output shaft
D . Removing, refitting and shim-

ming the shaft
9. If the shaft is fitted with a creeper unit, remove the
unit (see section 5).
Special points
Bearing cones and cups shall be paired if reused.
Disassembly
10. Take out the screws (41).
11. Remove stop plate (46).
12. Remove bearing cup (48).
13. Remove circlip (45).
14. Remove laminated shim (43) and shims (42). Fig. 4
15. Remove bearing cones (40) (39).
16. Remove shims (38) and circlip (49).
17. Pull and remove shaft (44) backwards while
holding the gear train assembly.
18. Through the selector cover aperture, remove:
synchronizer (31), Hare / Tortoise synchronizer
rings , pinion (29) and needle bearing (28) (30)
assembly, 3rd synchronizer ring, two needle bear-
ings (79) (81) and thrust washers (27) (32).
19. If necessary, remove the Tortoise pinion (36).
Special points
If work is necessary on this pinion, first remove the
input unit (see section 5) to gain access to the layshaft
of the gearbox in order to remove the pinion involved
through the gear selector cover aperture.
20. Remove cup (37).

21. Remove needle bearing (24). Identify the assembly
direction.
Reassembly
defective parts.
23. Put needle bearing (24) in the bore of mainshaft
"R", taking care to position the smaller diameter of
the flexible bush towards the 3rd drive pinion
(Hare) (29) (Fig. 4).
24. Fit the shaft in the housing without the pinions.
25. Fit a temporary circlip (49), minimum thickness.
26. Place bearing cup (37).

GBA20 Output shaft
Preparing for J3 clearance adjustment

(Fig. 5)
27. Slide cones (39) (40) and hold them against the
shoulder of shaft (44) by applying pressure by
hand. Fill space Y between the rear of cone (40)
and the groove of circlip (45) with shims (42) and
laminated shim (43) which will be placed against
circlip (45). Take a new circlip. The circlip must be
held closed in the groove under a slight pressure
(Fig. 6).
28. Install cup (48) and stop plate (46). Tighten screws
(41) to a torque of 25 -35 Nm.
Fig. 5
Fig. 6

GBA20 Output shaft

29. Put the feeler pin of a dial gauge against the end of
shaft (44) (Fig. 8 or Fig. 9).
Note: For gearboxes fitted with creeper unit,
use unit plate (1) (Fig. 9) to replace stop plate
(46) (Fig. 8). Tighten the screws to a torque of
33.8 - 51.5 Nm.
30. Push the shaft, turning it alternately from right to
left to correctly seat the cones in the cups.
31. Reset the dial gauge to zero.
32. Repeat operation 30 this time pulling.
33. If the end play recorded is greater than 0.05 mm,
determine the thickness of final circlip (49), which
shall be mounted later during operation 42, to
obtain:
J3 = - 0.05 to + 0.05 mm.
Fig. 7
34. Take off circlip (45).
35. Remove laminated shim (43) and shims (42).
36. Remove screws (4) and stop plate (46).
37. Remove cup (48) and bearing cones (40) (39),
pairing them with their cups, cup (37), temporary
circlip (49), mounted during operation 25, and shaft
(44).
Fig. 8
Fig. 9

GBA20 Output shaft
Assembling the pinions and the shaft

38. On a workbench, preassemble 3rd drive pinion (29)
with synchronizer rings (21) and 3rd gear, bearings
(79) (81), washers (27) (32) and synchronizer (31).
39. If removed, put the Tortoise pinion (36) with its
synchronizer ring (22) in the housing. Refit the
input unit (see section 5).
40. In the housing, install: 3rd drive pinion (29) fitted
with needle bearings (28) (30) (recess "R" directed
towards the 3rd - 4th synchronizer (Fig. 10)) and
synchronizer (31).
Note: If bush (35) is damaged, replace the
pinion assembly (the bush is rebored after
force-fitting). Needle bearings (28) (30) are
force-fitted and separated by spacer (80).
41. Fit output shaft (44) holding the gear train
assembly (Fig. 11). Fig. 10

42. Fit the circlip (49) defined at the operation 33. On
the shaft: slide the cones and cups paired during
operation 37.
43. Install stop plate (46). Tighten screws (41) to a
torque of 25 - 35 Nm.
44. Put the feeler pin of a dial gauge against the end of
shaft (44) (Fig. 8 or Fig. 9).
Note: For gearboxes fitted with creeper unit,
use unit plate (1) (Fig. 9) to replace stop plate
(46) (Fig. 8). Tighten the screws to a torque of
33.8 - 51.5 Nm.
45. Push the shaft, turning it alternately from right to
left to correctly seat the cones in the cups.
Depending on the value read on the dial gauge, Fig. 11
determine the thickness of shim Z (38) to obtain:
J4 = 0.20 to 0.40 mm (Fig. 12)
48. Remove screws (4) and stop plate (46).
49. Take off bearing cup (48).
50. Remove cones (40) (39).
51. On the shaft, slide: the required thickness of shims
Z (38), and cones (39) (40).
Fig. 12

GBA20 Output shaft

52. Carry out shimming to obtain:
J5 = no clearance
53. Using the thickness of shims Y (42) (43), deter-
mined during operation 27, determine the thick-
ness of shims Z (38) to obtain:
J5 = Y - Z
54. Fit cup (48) and stop plate (46). Tighten screws (41)
to a torque of 25 - 35 Nm.
55. Slide the thickness of shims selected during oper-
ation 53 on the shaft.
56. Place circlip (45).
Note: Position laminated shim (43) on circlip
side.
The circlip shall be quite firmly fitted under slight
pressure in the groove. Check that it is correctly Fig. 13
positioned.
Note: Install the creeper unit (depending on
option).
57. Manually check the rotation of the shaft and its
gear train.
58. Install the forks and the selector rail (see §C).
E . Final operations
59. Refit the selector cover (see section 5), previously
checking the presence of the screw (1) (Fig. 11).
60. Assemble the tractor between the gearbox and the
rear axle (see section 2).
61. Check:
- hydraulic tightness of the circuits
- correct operation of electric circuits
62. Carry out a road test on the controls.
63. Check for hydraulic tightness of the gear selector
cover and gearbox mating faces on the rear axle.

GBA20 Output shaft

GBA20 Mainshaft
5A17 - GBA20 Mainshaft
CONTENTS
A . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
C . Disassembling and reassembling the shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
D . Final operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
E . Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

GBA20 Mainshaft

GBA20 Mainshaft
Parts list
A . General
(1) Bearing cone
The mainshaft (69) is mounted on two taper roller bear- (2) Bearing cup
ings (1) (17) with bearing cups (2) (16), resting in the (3) Shim(s)
two lower bearings of the main unit. Each bearing cup (6) Serrated washers
has a root face giving it maximum contact with the (7) 1st drive pinion
housing. At the front it receives the drive pinion (67). (8) Ring
(11) 1st, 2nd double cone synchronizer
Between the two lower bearings, it holds the 1st (7) (14) 2nd drive pinion
and 2nd (14) idle mounted drive pinions, as well as the (16) Bearing cup
1st and 2nd gear synchromesh assembly (11), whose (17) Bearing cone
hub is held by splines. At the rear, it holds the 4th gear
(18) 4th drive pinion
drive pinion (18) and the 3rd and 4th gear synchromesh
(23) 3rd, 4th double cone synchronizer
assembly (23).
(26) Circlip
(33) 4th synchronizer cone
The 1st, 2nd (11) and 3rd, 4th (23) synchronizers are of
(47) 3rd synchronizer cone
the double cone type.
(67) Drive pinion
(68) Nut
The rear bore contains a needle bearing that holds the (69) Mainshaft
front end of the output shaft. The turning parts are
(70) Snap ring
lubricated by a central channel and radial bores.
(72) Spring
The taper roller bearings are mounted with preload (73) 1st synchronizer cone
obtained by shim(s) (3) inserted between the serrated
(74) 2nd synchronizer cone
washers (6) positioned against the drive pinion (67) and
(77) Washer with flat sections
the ring (8). A washer (77) with flat sections acts as a
stop for the 1st drive pinion (7). (78) Tab washer

GBA20 Mainshaft
Overall view
Fig. 1

GBA20 Mainshaft
Exploded view
2
1
67
78
68
17
16 1
77
7 14
26 73 8
2
6
11
74
3
47
23 69
72
70
71
33
4
MA-05-02017A
18
Fig. 2

GBA20 Mainshaft
To take out the mainshaft, it is necessary to remove
the gearbox.
2. Split the gearbox from the engine (see section 2).
4. Remove the input unit assembly (see section 5).
5. Remove the layshaft (see section 5).
6. Remove the selector rail and the forks (see section
5). Remove the output shaft (see section 5).
C . Disassembling and reassembling

the shaft Fig. 3
Disassembly
Note: If work is only carried out on drive pinion
(67), hold the pinion and 1st, 2nd synchronizer
assembly in position using a screwdriver so as not
to move the washer with flat sections (77).
8. Remove 3rd, 4th synchronizer (23) and cones (33)
(47). Note the assembly order.
9. Position locking tool 3378082M1 (Fig. 3) and the
holding sleeve of shaft (69) (Fig. 4), made locally
(see § E).
10. Remove lubricating pipe (71) and spring (72).
11. Remove the safety device from nut (68) and loosen
with socket 3378010M1 (Fig. 5 et § E).
12. Remove drive pinion (67) with cone (1).
13. Remove washers (6) and shim(s) (3).
14. Remove the tool and sleeve (Fig. 3 - Fig. 4). Fig. 4
15. Pull the shaft out of the housing backwards, while
holding the 1st, 2nd pinion assembly together.
16. Remove 1st, 2nd pinion and synchronizer (11)
assembly with ring (8). Remove cups (16) (2).
Note: Keep cups and cones paired if reused.
17. If necessary, remove washer with flat sections
(77), extract cone (1) (17) and remove snap ring
(70).
Fig. 5

GBA20 Mainshaft
Reassembly
18. Clean the housing and the mating faces.
19. With compressed air, check that no channels in the
gearbox or in the shaft are clogged.
defective parts.
21. Lubricate cones, cups, bearings bores and the ring.
22. Using a suitable fixture, press fit bearing cone (17)
on shaft (69) (if removed).
23. Fit snap ring (70).
24. Install cups (2) (16).
25. Install the 1st, 2nd pinion, synchronizer (11), cones
(73) (74) and ring (8) assembly.
26. Fit the shaft from the rear of the housing while
holding the pinion / synchronizer assembly
together (Fig. 6), making sure that ring (8) is
correctly fitted in pinion (14). Fig. 6
27. Install locking tool 3378082M1 (see § E) and locally
made holding sleeve (Fig. 3 - Fig. 4).
28. Force-fit cone (1) on pinion (67).
29. Install washers (6) separated by a number of shims
(3) sufficiently thick to obtain a temporary clear-
ance of 0.10 to 0.15 mm approx in preparation for
shimming with preload (see later).
30. Install pinion (67) on shaft (69).
31. Fit the nut (68) using socket 3378010M1 and
tighten to 130 - 170 Nm (Fig. 5).
32. Remove the tool and sleeve (Fig. 3 - Fig. 4).
33. Shim the shaft.
34. Position the dial gauge feeler pin at the end of the
shaft (Fig. 7).
35. From the front of the housing, pull the shaft,
turning it alternately from left to right in order to
correctly seat the cones in the cups.
Fig. 7
37. Repeat operation 35, but this time by pushing.
38. Depending on the clearance measured, select the
thickness of final shims required and necessary to
obtain a preload:
P1 = 0.14 mm to 0.20 mm. If possible, shim to the
maximum tolerance.
39. Install the locking tool and the holding sleeve (Fig.
3 - Fig. 4).
40. Loosen nut (68).

GBA20 Mainshaft
41. Remove pinion (67).

42. Position shims (3) selected during operation 38
between two washers (6).
43. Install the pinion.
44. Degrease the thread of the shaft with a solvent.
45. Lightly smear new nut (68) with Loctite 270 then
tighten to 130 - 170 Nm.
46. Lock the nut in place by bending the collar into the
grooves using a suitable drift.
47. Insert spring (72) and lubricating pipe (71) in the
shaft.
48. Remove the tool and the holding sleeve.
49. Fit pinion (18), 4th, 3rd synchronizer cone (33) (47)
and 3rd, 4th synchronizer (23). The lubrication
grooves are directed towards the 4th pinion (18).
50. Fit a new circlip (26), opening it as little as possible.
After assembly, check that the circlip is not bent.
51. Manually check:
- the end play of the pinions
- the rotation of the shaft and its pinions.
52. Check that the 1st, 2nd synchronizer operates
properly.
D . Final operations
53. Install and shim the output shaft (see section 5).
54. Refit the layshaft (see section 5).
55. Refit the input unit assembly (see section 5).
56. Shim the layshaft (see section 5).
57. Install the forks and the selector rail (see section 5).
58. Refit the selector cover (see section 5).
59. Couple the gearbox to the engine (see section 2).
60. Couple the gearbox and the rear axle (see section 2).
61. Check operation of electric circuits.
62. Carry out the road test on the controls.
63. Check for hydraulic tightness of the unions and
mating faces (selector cover, gearbox on rear axle).

GBA20 Mainshaft
E . Service tools
1. Tools available in the AGCO network
- 3378010 M1 - Socket for nut - Mainshaft (Fig. 8)
- 3378082 M1 - Locking tool - Mainshaft (Fig. 9)
2. Locally made tool

Holding sleeve for the mainshaft (Fig. 10)
Fig. 8
Fig. 9
Fig. 10

GBA20 Mainshaft

GBA20 Layshaft
5A18 - GBA20 Layshaft
CONTENTS
A . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
B . Final operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
C . Removing and refitting the shaft and pinion assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
D . Removing and refitting pinions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
E . Replacing the taper roller bearings and the shaft (54) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
F . Shimming the pinions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
G . Shimming the shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
H . Final operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
I . Service tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

GBA20 Layshaft

GBA20 Layshaft
A . General
The layshaft and its pinions form the upper transmis-
sion line of the gearbox. The shaft (54) holds the 1st
(60), 2nd (59), 3rd (55) and 4th (56) driven pinions. The
rear teeth are constantly meshed with the Tortoise
pinion.
The front end of the shaft is supported by the taper

roller bearing (63) (64) at the rear of the input unit and
by the bearing (52) (53) fitted in the rear bearing of the
unit.
The pinions (56) (60) are held in position by the spacer

(57) and the pinions (55) (56) by the spacer (82). The
axial clearance of the pinions is obtained by inserting
shim(s) (58) between the pinions (59) (60).
Parts list
(50) Oil deflector
(51) Shim(s)
(52) Bearing cup
(53) Bearing cone
(54) Shaft
(57) Spacer
(58) Shim(s)
(61) Circlip
(62) Needle bearing
(63) Bearing cone
(64) Bearing cup
(82) Spacer

GBA20 Layshaft
Overall view
Fig. 1
Exploded view
Fig. 2

GBA20 Layshaft
Special points
To correctly shim the taper roller bearings of the
layshaft it is necessary to remove the gearbox.
B . Final operations
2. Split the gearbox from the engine (see section 2).
3. Remove the clutch (see section 4).
Remark
Each reused bearing cone must be paired with its
corresponding cup.
C . Removing and refitting the shaft

and pinion assembly
Removal
6. To release the rear end of the shaft, remove oil
deflector (50), using an inertia extractor, shims (51)
and cup (52) (Fig. 3).
7. Pull out the shaft and related pinion assembly from
the front side of the housing (Fig. 4) by tilting it so
that the set of pinions come out of the lower
shafts.
Note: To remove the shaft, do not put the
handling bar in the bore so as not to damage
needle bearing (62) (Fig. 4). If necessary, carry Fig. 3
out the operation with the help of an assistant.
Fig. 4

GBA20 Layshaft
Refitting
defective parts.
9. In the housing, position the assembled shaft with
its related pinions.
10. If necessary, check the shimming of the shaft or
carry it out (see § G). Otherwise, install cup (52),
initial shims and oil deflector (50).
D . Removing and refitting pinions

Removal (Fig. 1)
11. Remove the bearing cone (63).
12. Remove circlip (61) by opening it up as little as
possible.
13. Remove 2nd pinion (59), shims (58), 1st pinion (60)
and spacer (57).
14. Remove 4th pinion (56), spacer (82) and 3rd pinion
(55).
Refitting (Fig. 1)
defective parts.
16. Install 3rd pinion (55), spacer (82) and 4th pinion
(56).
17. Slide in spacer (57), install 1st pinion (60) and 2nd
pinion (59) , temporarily without the shims (58).
18. Fit the circlip (61).
19. Shim the pinions (see § F).
20. Otherwise, install the initial shims and fit bearing
cone (63) (see § E).
21. Install the shaft, assembled with related pinions, in
the housing (see § C).

GBA20 Layshaft
E . Replacing the taper roller bear-

ings and the shaft (54)
Removal
22. Remove the shaft and pinion assembly (see § C).
23. Extract bearing cones (53) (63) and discard them.
24. If necessary, replace the shaft.
Refitting
25. If replacement of shaft (54) is confirmed, fit a new
needle bearing (62) in abutment against the
shoulder of the shaft, using a press and a suitable
fixture. Make sure that the needle bearings rotate
after assembly. Reassemble the pinions (see § D).
26. Fit bearing cones (63) (53) using a press and a suit-
able fixture.
27. Position the shaft, assembled with related pinions,
in the housing (see § C).
28. Shim the shaft (see § G).
F . Shimming the pinions

Reminder
Pinions shall be stacked temporarily without shims
(58).
29. Measure the space between the 1st pinion (60)

and the 2nd pinion (59) using a set of shims.
30. Depending on the measured distance, choose
shims of an appropriate thickness to obtain a clear-
ance J1 between 0 and 0.25 mm.
31. Remove circlip (61), opening it up as little as
possible, and remove pinion (59).
32. Slide the final shims, previously selected, onto the
shaft. Install the pinion and correctly fit the circlip.
33. Fit bearing cone (63) (see § E).
34. Install the shaft, assembled with related pinions, in
the housing (see § C).

GBA20 Layshaft
G . Shimming the shaft

Remark
Refit the input unit (see section 5).
35. Shim the shaft to obtain a clearance:

J2 = 0 to 0.08 mm (Fig. 6)
36. Install the locally made tool (Fig. 7 and § I) in the
shaft.
37. Slightly compress the spring, while tightening the
nut of the tool, to correctly seat the cones in the
cups.
38. Rotate the shaft a few turns. Check spring
compression again.
39. Using a depth gauge (Fig. 5), measure dimension X
between side A of bearing cup (52) and side B of Fig. 5
the housing (Fig. 6).
40. Measure thickness Y of oil deflector (50).
41. Calculate the difference between X and Y.
42. Determine the thickness of shims required to
obtain J2. If possible, set to the minimum toler-
ance threshold.
43. Remove the compression tool.
44. Fit shims (51) selected in operation 42.
45. Fit the oil deflector in the housing.
Fig. 6
Fig. 7

GBA20 Layshaft
H . Final operations I . Service tool

46. Refit the input unit (see section 5). Locally made tool (Fig. 8)
47. Refit the selector cover (see section 5).
- Shaft holding tool
48. Refit the clutch (see section 4).
(1) Locally adapted washer MF 1610037 M2
49. Couple the gearbox and the engine (see section 2). (2) Washer MF 3619200 M2 to be machined
50. Assemble the tractor between the gearbox and the (3) Washer LL 12U
rear axle (see section 2). Inner Ø : 12,5
51. Check: Outer Ø 40
- oil tightness of the hydraulic circuits thickness : 2,5
- correct operation of electric circuits (4) Nut HM10
52. Carry out a road test of all controls. (5) Outer. Ø : 79,7 +0 / -0,2
53. Check oil tightness of unions and mating faces (6) Threaded rod M10 x 150
(gear selector cover, gearbox on rear axle). L: 1000
(7) Spring
Inner Ø : 40
Thread Ø: 4
L: 95
Fig. 8

GBA20 Layshaft

GBA20 - Super Creeper unit
5A20 - GBA20 - Super Creeper unit
CONTENTS
A . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Kinematics and operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
C . Removing—refitting and disassembling—reassembling the epicyclic gear trains 12
D . Disassembling—reassembling the planet carriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
E . Adjusting the control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Massey Ferguson 6400 - Issue 4.a 5A20.1

5A20.2 Massey Ferguson 6400 - Issue 4.a

A . General
The super creeper reducing unit (1) is located at the
rear of the main gearbox (Fig. 1). It is fitted as an
option.
It comprises:
- an input epicyclic gear train fitted with three
planetary gears
- an output epicyclic gear train fitted with five
planetary gears
Each epicyclic gear train (input and output) consists of
a sun gear/planet carrier/ring gear assembly.
Each ring gear (19) is machined in a single block
(Fig. 2).
1
MA-05-05091A
Fig. 1
19
19
MA-05-05092A
Fig. 2

Parts list (Fig. 3)

(1) Input planet carrier
(2) Friction washer
(3) Cover
(4) Output planet carrier
(5) Bolts
(6) M8 screws
(7) Circlip
(8) Coupler
(9) Input planetary gears
(11) Output planetary gears
(12) Pins
(13) Input planetary gear plates
(14) Sun gear
(15) Stop plate
(16) Input epicyclic gear train
(17) Output epicyclic gear train
(18) Folded friction washer
(19) Ring gear block
(20) Dowels
(21) Link shaft
(22) Output planetary gear plates
(44) GBA20 gearbox output shaft

View of the assembly

20
15 9 10 12 1 19 11 10
20 22
12
4 8 7
13
44
16 2
21
18 14
17
5 F
3
5
19
6
5
5
F
MA-05-05093A Fig. 3

Parts list (Fig. 4)

(2) Friction washer
(3) Cover
(5) Bolts
(6) M8 screws
(8) Coupler
(12) Pins
(14) Sun gear
(15) Stop plate
(20) Dowels

Blown-up view
9 20
10
13
12 1
22
11
10
12
15
8
18
16
19
14
2
4
17
3
5 6
MA-05-05094A
Fig. 4

B . Kinematics and operation

Kinematics
Kinematics of the input epicyclic gear train
(16) (Fig. 5)
- Ring gear block (19) blocked.
- Drive input via output shaft (44) of the GBA20
gearbox.
- Drive output via planet carrier (1).
Kinematics of the output epicyclic gear train

(17) (Fig. 5)
- Drive continuity ensured by sun gear (14).
- Drive output to rear axle via planet carrier (4).
NOTE: Sun gear (14) is secured by the splines on the
planet carrier (1).

19 1
44
16
1 19 4
14
17
MA-05-05096A Fig. 5

Operation (Fig. 6)
Coupler (8) is secured by splines on the link shaft (21). 4 8 21
Movement of lever A to Snail position moves the
coupler (8) forwards and engages it with planet carrier
(4) via its external teeth. The link shaft speed (21) is
1/14 that of the gearbox output shaft (44).
When coupler (8) is engaged in the output planet
carrier (4), the needle roller bearing (1) allows link shaft
(21) to turn at a different speed to that of the output
shaft (44) (Fig. 6). 44
When the super creeper range is selected, the Snail

indicator light on the instrument panel comes on. The
electrical signal corresponding to selection of the
super creeper range is transmitted via switch C, which
is fitted on the control unit (Fig. 7). 1
In normal gears, the gearbox output shaft (44) is

engaged with the link shaft (21) when coupler (8) is
moved backwards, thus ensuring direct drive (Fig. 8).
MA-05-03102A
Fig. 6
MA-05-03107A
Fig. 7

44 21
MA-05-05098A
Fig. 8

C . Removing—refitting and
26 27
disassembling—reassembling the
epicyclic gear trains
Preliminary steps
1. Uncouple the tractor between the gearbox and the
rear axle (see chapter 2).
2. Remove (Fig. 9):
- the locknut (26)
- the adjustable lock (27)
- the fork (28) and coupler (8)
8 28
Removal
3. Remove the screws (5).
MA-05-05099A Fig. 9
4. Separate the super creeper unit from the gearbox.
Place it on a workbench.
Disassembly
5. Remove the M8 screws (6).
6. Remove:
- the cover (3)
- the output planet carrier (4)
- the sun gear (14)
- the input planet carrier (1)
7. Retain the folded friction washer (18).
8. Separate the stop plate (15) from the ring gear
block (19).
NOTE: The dowels (20) are force fitted onto the ring
gear block (19).

Reassembly
9. Check and clean all components. Replace those 18
that are defective.
10. Check that all dowels (20) are present on the ring
gear block (19).
11. Assemble stop plate (15) on the ring gear block.
12. Lightly smear the folded friction washer (18) with
miscible grease.
Position the folds of the friction washer
face-to-face with the slots (Fig. 10).
Insert the friction washer facing the input planet
carrier (1).
13. Refit:
- the sun gear (14)
- the output planet carrier (4) MA-05-05100A Fig. 10
- the cover (3)
14. Fit and tighten the M8 screws (6) to a torque of
25–35 Nm.
Refitting
15. Assemble the super creeper unit on the gearbox.
16. Fit and tighten bolts (5) to a torque of
33.8–51.5 Nm.
Final steps
17. Refit (Fig. 9):
- the locknut (26)
18. Adjust the fork locking mechanism (27) (see Fig. 9
and chapter 5).
19. Couple the tractor between the gearbox and the

D . Disassembling—reassembling
the planet carriers
Disassembling the input planet carrier
20. Position the input planet carrier (1) under a press
and on top of a plate with a hole to allow removal
of the pins (12).
21. Drive out a pin using the press and a locally made
drift (Ø 12 mm) in the direction of the arrows
(Fig. 11).
NOTE: The pin is force fitted into part E of the
planet carrier (Fig. 11).
22. Remove the planetary gears (9) and plates (13)
from the planet carrier. E
Retain the needle bearings (10).
MA-05-05101A
23. Repeat steps 21 and 22 to disassemble the two Fig. 11
other planetary gears.
Reassembling the input planet carrier 10

24. Clean and check all components. Replace those
that are defective.
Preparing a planetary gear (Fig. 12)

25. Lightly smear the bore of the planetary gear (9)
with miscible grease.
26. Arrange needle bearings (10) on the grease
cartridge, taking care not to omit any.
27. Repeat steps 25 and 26 to prepare the other two
planetary gears.
9
MA-05-05102A
Fig. 12

Installing a planetary gear pin

28. Place the input planet carrier (1) on a press.
1
29. Slide a planetary gear (9) fitted with its needle
bearings (10) and plates (13) into the planet carrier.
30. Line up the planetary gear and plates with the
planet carrier pin hole (12). 9
31. Check that the axial channel and radial bore of the
pin are not blocked. 10
32. Turn the axial channel inlet of the pin (12) as shown
in Fig. 13. 13
33. Slide the pin partly into (Fig. 13):
- the planetary gear (9)
- the plates (13)
Turn the pin. Turn the radial bore R as shown in
Fig. 13.
34. Fit the pin (12) so that its blunt end is almost level 12
with surface F of the planet carrier (Fig. 14).
35. Check manually on planetary gear (9):
- the presence of slight axial clearance
- the free rotation of the planetary gear.
36. Repeat steps 29 to 35 to fit the other two pins.
1
R
13
9
MA-05-05103A Fig. 13
12
MA-05-05104A
Fig. 14

Disassembling the output planet carrier

37. Position the output planet carrier (4) under a press
of the pins (12).
(Fig. 15).
39. Remove planetary gear (11) and plates (22) from
the planet carrier.
40. Repeat steps 38 and 39 to disassemble the other E
four planetary gears.
MA-05-05105A
Fig. 15
Reassembling the output planet carrier
that are defective.
Preparing a planetary gear (Fig. 16) 10

44. Repeat steps 42 and 43 to prepare the other four
planetary gears.
11
MA-05-05106A
Fig. 16


45. Place output planet carrier (4) under a press.
46. Fit friction washer (2) into the base of the planet
carrier (4).
47. Slide a planetary gear (11), fitted with its needle
bearings (10) and plates (22), into the planet carrier.
planet carrier pin hole (12).
2
pin are not blocked.
in Fig. 17.
51. Slide the pin partly into (Fig. 17): 4
- planetary gear (11)
- plates (22)
11
Fig. 17. 10
52. Fit the pin (12) so that its blunt end is almost level
with surface F of the planet carrier (Fig. 18). 22
54. Repeat steps 47 to 53 to fit the other four pins.
12
4
R
22
11
MA-05-05107A Fig. 17
12
MA-05-05108A Fig. 18

E . Adjusting the control 1 2
(Fig. 19–Fig. 20)

55. Place control lever A in the Snail position (Fig. 19). A
56. Screw clevis (1) level with the end of the threaded
part of cable (6) (Fig. 19).
57. Fit clevis (1) on lever A using clip (7) and tighten nut
(2) (Fig. 19).
7 6 4
58. Lock nut (3) on the sheath end (5).
59. Fit the sheath end and Grower washer on the
support. Tighten nut (4). 5 3
NOTE: Check that the cable is not pinched.
60. Place connecting rod B in the "creeper unit"
position (Fig. 20) (reducer dog (8) engaged towards C
the rear [Fig. 4]), fork locked.
61. Screw clevis (9) level with the end of the threaded MA-05-03098A
Fig. 19
part of cable (6) (Fig. 20).
62. Fit clevis (9) on connecting rod B using clip (10) and
tighten nut (11) (Fig. 20).
63. Adjust stop (12) with nut (13), making sure that
connecting rod B is still firmly locked.
64. Tighten nut (14).
NOTE: After tightening, check that the cable is not
pinched.
65. Check that the control is locked in the "direct drive"
position.
Fig. 20

GBA10 - General - Operation
5B10 - GBA10 - General - Operation
CONTENTS
A . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
C . Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
D . Tightening torques and sealing products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Massey Ferguson 6400 - Issue 4.a 5B10.1

5B10.2 Massey Ferguson 6400 - Issue 4.a

pinions. Regardless of the speed selected, the move-

A . General ment is transmitted to layshaft (51). Output shaft (47)
drive is transmitted via the machined teeth of the
The Heavy Duty gearbox with PowerShuttle layshaft. The gear teeth mesh with the Tortoise pinion
comprises 32 forward speeds and 32 reverse speeds. (40) engaged to the output shaft (47) when the sliding
coupler of synchromesh (69) moves backwards.
The mainshaft and the layshaft are supported by taper
roller bearings. They are drilled, as required, to lubri-
cate bearings, free pinions and the Hare/Tortoise
synchronisation system under pressure. High range (Hare)
This range is selected by forward movement of the
The layshaft is supported at its front end by a cylin- slide of the synchromesh (69), which establishes a
drical roller bearing and at its rear by two taper roller direct drive between the third driving pinion (35) and
bearings. output shaft (47). Consequently in 3rd gear, the
layshaft (51) is passive. The other gears are obtained
by moving the sliding couplers of gear synchromesh
On gearboxes with a PowerShuttle, the 1st -2nd gear (16) or (27) as for the Low range.
synchromesh (16), 3rd -4th gear synchromesh (27)
and Hare / Tortoise range synchromesh (69) are
double cone types.
Lubrication (Fig. 1)
When the Hare / Tortoise synchromesh (69) is moved The lubricating oil flow is controlled by the R restrictor.
to the rear, it makes the Tortoise pinion rotate and It is then directed to the pipe (4) connected to the input
doubles the four speeds to give the eight basic unit ().
speeds. Oil flows through two axial channels, one of which
crosses the layshaft while the other is blind, machined
All pinions have rectified teeth and are helically cut. in the output shaft. Radial channels feed the various
They are in constant engagement. The drive shaft of pinions, the bearings and the Hare / Tortoise synchro-
the PTO clutch crosses the layshaft. mesh.
The input unit assembly located at the front (see Needle roller bearings (67) are lubricated by an oil film
chapter 5) provides the main box with four input ratios. flowing between the PTO shaft and the layshaft. The
oil deflector (76) maintains the oil near the bearing
mounted at the back of the input unit.
Description
The gearbox drive is provided by the drive pinion (1)
integral with the mainshaft (7).
The two hubs of the gear synchromeshes (16) and
(27), as well as pinion (1) are integral with the main-
shaft (7) via splines.
First driving pinion (19) and fourth driving pinion (24)
are idle-mounted on the shaft (7).
Second driving pinion (13) is idle-mounted on the ring
(8), which is integral with the shaft (7) via splines.
Third driving pinion (35) is fitted on taper roller bear-
ings.
All the pinions on layshaft (51) are splined to and rotate
with the latter. The gear teeth on layshaft (51) mesh
with Tortoise pinion (40) which idles on the output
shaft.
Low range (Tortoise)

A synchronised gear is engaged by moving of one of
the slides of gear synchromeshes (16) or (27) to
engage layshaft (7) in one of the four idle-mounted

Parts list (Fig. 1) (65) Washer

(66) Snap ring
(1) Drive pinion
(67) Needle bearing
(2) Washer
(3) Nut
(69) Hare / Tortoise synchromesh (double cone)
(71) Progressivity sensor
(5) Snap ring
(72) Nut
(6) Spring
(75) Cover
(7) Mainshaft
(76) Oil deflector
(8) Bush
(9) Bearing cone
Legend
(10) Bearing cup
(11) Shim(s) A, B, D, F Details
(12) Laminated shim G Groove
(13) Driving pinion (2nd) R Restrictor
(16) 1st - 2nd gear synchromesh (double cone) VR Creeper unit (optional)
(19) Driving pinion (1st gear)
(20) Bearing cone
(21) Bearing cup
(22) Bearing cup
(23) Bearing cone
(24) Driving pinion (4th)
(27) 3rd - 4th gear synchromesh (double cone)
(28) Seal ring
(29) Snap ring
(31) Special washer
(33) Bearing cone
(34) Bearing cup
(35) Driving pinion (3rd) (Hare)
(36) Bearing cup
(37) Bearing cone
(40) Tortoise pinion
(41) Locating pin
(43) Bearing cone
(44) Bearing cup
(45) Shim(s)
(46) Rear bearing
(47) Output shaft
(48) Screw
(49) Bearing cup
(50) Bearing cone
(51) Layshaft
(52) Nut
(53) Shim
(54) Bearing cone
(55) Bearing cup
(56) Circlip
(57) Driven pinion (3rd)
(58) Spacer
(59) Driven pinion (4th)
(60) Spacer
(61) Driven pinion (1st)
(62) Spacer
(63) Shim(s)
(64) Driven pinion (2nd)

Overall view
68 64 63 62 71 72 61 60 59 58 57 56 69 51 54 55 53
65
49
66 1
2 50
3
4
67
52
41
48
76 B A
D
45
1
2 47
5 43
R
44
F F
F
46
36
VR
4 3 6 7 8 13 16 19 20 21 24 27 35 40 75 37 41
48 46
F
12 24 27 28 29 34
G
69
27 44
16 45
47
B D A
10 9 11 22 23 31 33 35 43
MA-05-05111A
Fig. 1

Page left blank intentionally

B . Operation
Hare / Tortoise synchromesh (69) (double
cone) (Fig. 2)
NOTA: On gearboxes with PowerShuttle, all gears are
synchronised including the Hare / Tortoise function.
The gear synchromeshes are all double cone types.
Locking position
Axial displacement of sliding coupler A provides a
thrust against ring K, which in turn presses against
synchroniser brake B, pushing it towards cone J
through the action of balls D, springs F and pressure
system E.
When the corresponding pinions are at the required
speed, the sliding coupler meshes with the coupling
flange C of the combined gear.
The operating principle is identical for 1st - 2nd gear
synchromesh (16) and 3rd - 4th gear synchromesh
(27).
Advantages of the double cone synchromesh

- Increased reliability
- Increased stress strength
Fig. 2

Overhaul (double cone)

C . Specifications
If it is necessary to disassemble gear synchromeshes
(16), (27) and (69), check the wear on synchroniser See Fig. 4.
brakes B in the following manner:
1. Stack the coupling flange C, cone J, synchroniser
Legend
brake B and ring K.
2. Correctly position brake B by turning it backwards A, B Details
and forwards several times and by manually C Support spacer for Belleville washers
pushing it. D Semi set-right adjustment (see chapter 5)
3. Using a set of laminated shims, measure dimen- E Progressivity sensor adjustment (see
sion X (Fig. 3) at three equidistant points. chapter 5)
Calculate the average of the three values and G Groove turned towards the Hare / Tortoise synchro-
proceed as described below, depending on the mesh
result obtained.: J Clearance
Value of dimension X O Synchromesh lubrication port (Tortoise side)
On a new synchroniser, dimension X must be P Preload
1.6 mm minimum.
After operation, if this value is less than or equal
to 0.60 - 0.80 mm:
- replace the synchroniser brake B,
- check the measurement of X again, using the
same process.
if dimension X remains incorrect, also replace
ring K and cone J or, if necessary, the synchro-
niser assembly.
Fig. 3

C
P = 0/0,15 mm
E
X = 8,60/8,68 mm
J = 0,02/0,31 mm D
A B
P = 0,01/0,05 mm
J = 0,60/0,80 mm
P = 0,10/0,20 mm maxi
G
B
J = 0/0,20 mm A J = 0,50/0,70 mm
MA-05-05112A
Fig. 4

D . Tightening torques and sealing

products
See Fig. 5 for tightening torques and sealing products
to use.
A sealing product specific for plastics is recommended
for fitting the progressivity sensor.
As a general rule, each product can be replaced by one
of an equivalent type.
Legend
A Progressively tighten the nut to a torque of
30 - 70 Nm. Rotate the shaft a few turns.
Tighten the nut permanently to a torque of
100 - 150 Nm with Loctite 270 plus mechan-
ical lock.
B Selector rail support.

36 - 46 Nm M6 12 - 16 Nm 47 - 57 Nm 31 - 35 Nm 13 - 15 Nm 12 - 16 Nm 5 - 7 Nm 29 - 37 Nm 36 - 46 Nm
M8 20 - 28 Nm
B
242 242 242 242 242 221
648
5206
w w-w
grade 10,9 - 140 Nm 36 - 46Nm

grade 12,9 - 160 Nm
A
F
57 - 67 Nm
102 - 138 Nm 25,5 - 34,5 Nm

47 - 78 Nm
270
510
47 - 54 Nm
1,5 bar 549 5206 648 130 - 170 Nm 85 - 120 Nm

36 - 46 Nm 47 - 68 Nm
270
40 - 48 Nm
F 10 - 14 Nm
12,5 - 13 Nm 13 bar 29 - 37 Nm 29 - 37 Nm 221

MA-05-05113A Fig. 5


GBA10 - Input unit
5B11 - GBA10 - Input unit
CONTENTS
A . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
C . Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
D . Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
E . Adjusting of the progressivity sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
F . Final operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
G . Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

GBA10 - Input unit

GBA10 - Input unit
A . General
The GBA10 input unit is fitted at front of the gearbox.
It is an interchangeable module upon which a reverse
shuttle is fitted which can transmit power to the
forward and reverse gear ratios.
It is made of two separate parts:
- the PowerShuttle (see section 5) ;
- Dynashift.
Dynashift
The input unit is used to electrohydraulically control
four powershift ratios using a lever located to the left
under the steering wheel.
It is located between the PowerShuttle and the driving
pinion mounted in the rear housing.
The Dynashift function is performed by two epicyclic
gear trains linked to two hydraulic clutches.
For operation, see section 5.

GBA10 - Input unit
1. Split the tractor between the engine and the
gearbox (see chapter 2).
2. Drain the gearbox.
3. Remove the gearbox selector cover (see
chapter 5). Through the opening cover, remove the
screw (1) holding the flange (2) (Fig. 1).
NOTA: The flange (2) supports the front end of the
selector rails. It allows for the easy horizontal
removal of the input unit.
4. Move the flange away from the housing sliding it
backwards along the selector rails.
NOTA: The flange (2) is positioned on the rear
housing of the input unit by means of two
Mecanindus pins (3) (Fig. 2).
5. Remove the clutch cover plate (see chapter 3).
6. Remove the PowerShuttle control unit (see
chapter 9). Disconnect and mark the position of
the hydraulic pipes connected to the following
functions:
- gearbox lubrication;
- low pressure Dynashift ;
- PowerShuttle reverse clutch low pressure

GBA10 - Input unit
MA-05-05114A
Fig. 1
Fig. 2

GBA10 - Input unit
C . Removal
7. Remove the forward clutch from the PowerShuttle 64 V 70
(see chapter 5).
8. Take out the PTO shaft (1) from the gearbox
(Fig. 4) and mark its position. 64
9. Disconnect and remove the progressivity sensor
(2) located above the gearbox (Fig. 4 and Fig. 5).
10. Loosen the four screws (64) (L = 145 mm)
attaching the unit to the gearbox (Fig. 3).
Sling the input unit using tool 3378225M11, a
handling bar made locally (see § G) and a suitable 64
lifting device (Fig. 4). 64
11. Remove the remaining V screws (L = 145 mm).
IMPORTANT: Do not intervene on the short screws
(70) (L = 25 mm, Fig. 3) so as to avoid splitting the V
unit.
12. With the help of an operator, carefully pull the unit
forwards and remove it from the gearbox.
13. Remove the handling bar and tool.
14. Place the unit in a vertical position on a workbench.
15. Separate the reverse clutch from the input unit
(see chapter 5).
V 70
MA-05-00320B
Fig. 3

GBA10 - Input unit
3378225M11
1
2
MA-05-05115A
Fig. 4
Fig. 5

GBA10 - Input unit
D . Refitting
16. Refit the reverse clutch onto the input unit (see
chapter 5).
17. If necessary, screw a guide stud (L = 55 mm) to
the unit mating face with the gearbox. Ensure that
this guide stud remains accessible once the input
unit has been refitted.
18. Place the locating pin (1) (Fig. 6).
Check:
- the presence of the flange (2) (Fig. 6) and its
Mecanindus pins (3) (Fig. 2).
- the lubricating pipe (4) (Fig. 6).
19. With the help of an operator and using the tools
used during removal, position the input unit in the
gearbox housing taking the same safety precau-
Fig. 6
tions as previously.
20. Push and position the unit onto the gearbox
housing mating face.
Unscrew the guide stud (if used).
21. Remove the tool (Fig. 4).
Tighten the screws (64) and V screws (Fig. 3) of
the input unit to a torque of 47 - 57 Nm.
IMPORTANT: The thread of each screw should be
cleaned and lightly coated with Loctite 542 or
equivalent. If the screws need replacing, fit
genuine screws whose thread is already coated
with a special product.
22. Refit and adjust the progressivity sensor (see § E).
23. Position the undercut part of the PTO shaft back-
wards. Insert this PTO shaft into the upper shaft-
line of the gearbox.
24. Install forward clutch (see section 5).

GBA10 - Input unit
E . Adjusting of the progressivity

sensor 2
25. Lightly smear the sensor thread (2) with Loctite
Form Gasket 2 or equivalent (Fig. 7).
26. Screw the sensor home without forcing it. Make
sure that its end is in contact with the driving pinion
fitted in the rear housing of the input unit (see
chapter 5).
27. Loosen the sensor by one half to three quarters of
a turn. Tighten the nut to a torque of 5 - 7 Nm.
NOTA: For operating details, see chapter 11.
MA-05-05116A
Fig. 7
28. Refit the PowerShuttle control unit (see chapter 9).
Reconnect the hydraulic pipes as marked on
removal.
29. Refit the clutch cover plate (see chapter 3).
30. Check once more for the presence of Mecanindus
pins (3).
Apply the flange (2) to the rear part of the housing
(Fig. 2).
Clean and lightly smear the thread of the screw (1)
with Loctite 221 or equivalent (Fig. 1). Tighten this
screw to a torque of 36 - 46 Nm.
31. Refit the selector cover (see chapter 5).
32. Top up the oil level in the housings. Check it using
the sight glass located at the rear left-hand side of
the rear axle.
34. Carry out a road test of the PowerShuttle and A, B,
C and D ratios of the Dynashift.
35. Check the oil tightness of the selector cover
mating face and of hydraulic unions.

GBA10 - Input unit
G . Service tools
Tool available in AGCO network
• 3378225M11: Sling for housing with PowerShuttle
(Fig. 8)
MA-05-05117A
Fig. 8
Locally made tool

• Handling bar (Fig. 9)
Fig. 9

GBA10 - PowerShuttle
5B12 - GBA10 - PowerShuttle
CONTENTS
A . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Removing - refitting the forward clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
C . Disassembling - reassembling the forward clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
D . Shimming the forward clutch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
E . Disassembling - reassembling the reverse clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
F . Disassembling - reassembling the driving pinion - Shimming the shaft . . . . . . . . 26
G . Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29


Construction
A . General
The forward and reverse clutches of the PowerShuttle
The PowerShuttle, also called “ISC”, consists of two are of different design.
electrohydraulically controlled clutches. It makes
possible to reverse the direction under load. Forward clutch
The PowerShuttle transmits the drive from the engine The forward clutch consists of:
to the mainshaft mounted on the front of the main - a conventional type oil-bath multidisc clutch
gearbox by means of pinions located respectively to consisting of a cover (33), the rear side of which is
the rear of the input unit and at the gearbox input. splined to assemble the input sun gear (53);
- an input shaft (19) passing through the clutch cover
A lever located to the left, under the steering wheel,
plate (4) that separates the engine flywheel from the
controls the PowerShuttle.
transmission oil. The shaft is constantly meshed
Depending on the position selected by the operator with the vibration damper secured to the engine
(forward, neutral, reverse), the lever manages the flywheel. It is splined so as to rotate with the clutch
proportional solenoid valves of the forward and reverse unit (18) comprising the intermediate plates (30) and
clutches by means of the electronic system of the the discs (29) in which piston (28) moves;
tractor.
- a drive hub (27) comprising the discs (29) and integral
The solenoid valves are located to the front and to the with the primary shaft (55).
right-hand side of the gearbox on a clutch unit The forward clutch is centred in the cover (38) of the
containing the Dynashift hydraulic control system. reverse clutch by ball bearing (32).
A filter (60 microns) located under the right-hand
selector cover, upstream of the clutch unit, provides Reverse clutch
additional filtering for oil supplying the solenoid valves The reverse clutch consists of:
(clutches and Dynashift).
- an epicyclic gear train consisting of three double
A progressivity sensor, screwed to the top of the planet gears (52) and three single planet gears (59);
gearbox housing, sends shaft rotational speed infor- - a hydraulic braking device for the planet carrier (49),
mation to the electronic system. - a cover (38) supporting the forward clutch and with
an inner side machined to assemble hydraulic parts.
Shifting of any forward gear to the corresponding
reverse gear, or vice versa, is easy without declutching The double and single planet gears (52) (59) of the
or stopping the tractor. This "assisted" gear reversal epicyclic gear train mesh respectively on the input and
enables gradual changing of the operating direction, output sun gears (53) (58). The pins (50) are mounted
even at high travel speeds without abrupt changes in idle and held in the planet carrier by plates (63). A
speed. The clutches slow down tractor movement central drilled channel and radial ports supply lubrica-
until the required speed is reached so that the direction tion to needle bearings (60).
of travel can be reversed.
The planet carrier braking device consists of an annular
The conventional hydraulically operated clutch pedal is piston (39) and a plate (43) that is loaded by springs
replaced by an electrohydraulically operated manoeu- (62) and discs (47) integral with the planet carrier
vring pedal. This pedal modulates the pressure in the through splines.
forward or reverse clutches through the electronic
system of the tractor and thus facilitates precise move- The intermediate plates (46) are immobilised by the
ments such as implement hitching. pins (71).

Fixed unit Drive transmission

The fixed unit (1) performs two functions: Drive from the PowerShuttle is transmitted to a
- it receives the low pressure supplying the forward mechanical unit located in the rear compartment of the
clutch via the pipe (74), input box.
- it acts as a housing for the clutch lubricating and a secondary shaft (1) and helical pinion (2) machined in
cooling pump. one piece (Fig. 1).
The pipes (31) (86) connecting the lubricating pump The shaft is mounted on two taper roller bearings with
unit (1) and cover (38) lubricate the reverse clutch different sections and is supported by two bearings
braking device. The pipe (87) provides the hydraulic link (Fig. 1).
to the lubricating diagnostics connector. Shims (3) (Fig. 1) fitted between bearing cup (16) and
The shims (3) located between clutch cover plate (4) the rear housing (5) are used to preload the bearings.
and the fixed pump unit (1) provide the axial clearance
for the forward clutch.
5 2 1 2
16 3
Fig. 1
MA-05-05129A

Operating principle a small permanent bleed starting from 13 bar to

provide an automatic bleed of the hydraulic supply of
Forward clutch piston (39).
When the lever under the steering wheel is in the
Forward position, the relevant solenoid valve is acti- Lubrication
vated and supplies a pressure that moves piston (28).
This, in turn, compresses the intermediate plates (30) As the piston (39) moves, it operates spools (44) that
and the discs (29) against cover (33). The movement act as valves and compress springs (45) via the plate
from the engine to the gearbox complies with the (43). The spools have a drilled centre channel and radial
following kinematics: ports, allowing oil to flow to the channels in the cover
(38) and the channels in the front cover of the input
- input shaft (19) splined to unit (18),
unit, thus lubricating the discs (47) and the interme-
- unit housing (18), diate plates (46). Lubrication of the mechanical parts of
- intermediate plates (30), the epicyclic gear train is via the lubricating system of
- discs (29) compressed by the piston (28), the input unit.
- hub (27), At the same time, the lubricating oil flow to the discs
- primary shaft (55), (29) and intermediate plates (30) of the forward clutch
- main unit mainshaft via the input pinion. is stopped, thus preventing any possible driving of the
discs through a drag effect.
Simultaneously, the pressure applied behind the
piston (39) of the braking device drops and the planet
carrier assembly (discs (47), intermediate plates (46) Neutral position
and epicyclic gear train) rotate freely. In neutral position, the supply to the solenoid valves is
cut, placing the forward and reverse clutches at rest
Lubrication and eliminating transmission of the engine movement
to the gearbox.
During forward operation, the oil flow from the centre
housing via the pump (14) is directed towards the inter- The oil flow is also interrupted. The pressure in the
mediate plates (30) and the discs (29) via the ports of circuit opens the valve (77) (Fig. 19) and directs the oil
the forward clutch unit (18) opened by movement of to the housing.
piston (28).
At the same time, lubrication of the braking device of NOTA: After replacement of the solenoid valve or its
the planet carrier (discs (47) and intermediate plates solenoid, the PowerShuttle hydraulic unit, the Power-
(46)) of the reverse clutch is interrupted. Shuttle unit or one of its component or the transmis-
sion control unit, it is necessary to calibrate the clutch
(see chapter 11).
Reverse clutch
When the previously mentioned lever is moved from
the Forward to Reverse position, the solenoid valve
concerned is activated and supplies the piston (39) of
the braking device of the planet carrier. The piston then
presses on plate (43) which compresses discs (47) and
the intermediate plates (46) against the front cover of
the input unit and stops the rotation of the planet
carrier. The drive from the engine is directly trans-
mitted to the cover (33) that is integral with the input
sun gear (53) via splines, without passing through the
discs and intermediate plates of the forward clutch.
Simultaneously, the oil pressure in the piston chamber
(28) drops and frees the discs (29) and intermediate
plates (30).
The input sun gear (53) then drives the double planet
gears (52) freely mounted on the pins (50) which, in
turn, drive the single planet gear (59), integral with
primary shaft (55) thus reversing rotation of the output
sun gear (58) splined to the primary shaft (55). The
primary shaft then sends the movement from the
engine to the mainshaft of the main gearbox via the
input pinion.
NOTA: A valve screwed to the top of cover (38) ensures

Parts list (Fig. 2) (56) Snap ring

(57) Ball bearing
(1) Pump housing
(2) Pump cover
(59) Single planet gears
(3) Shim(s)
(4) Clutch cover plate
(61) Snap rings
(5) Locking ring
(62) Springs
(6) Splined ring
(63) Stop plates
(7) O’ring
(64) Screw
(8) Anti-extrusion rings
(65) Snap ring
(9) Snap rings
(66) Screw
(10) Sealing ring
(67) O’ring
(11) Circlip
(68) Ball bearing
(12) Ball bearing
(69) Seal
(13) Screw
(70) Screw
(71) Pins
(15) Sealing rings
(72) Unions
(16) Ring
(98) Snap ring
(19) Input shaft
(100)Ring
(20) Pin
(21) Circlip
Legend
(22) Ball bearing
(23) Snap ring A, B, C, D Details
(24) Seal
(26) Indexing ports
(27) Drive hub
(32) Ball bearing
(35) Rivets
(36) Seal
(40) Rivets
(41) Seal
(42) Seal
(43) Plate
(44) Spools
(45) Springs
(48) Ring restrictor
(49) Planet carrier
(50) Planet gear pins
(51) Spacers
(52) Double planet gears
(53) Input sun gear
(54) Snap ring
(55) Primary shaft

Overall view
38 70 100 33 32 72 35 34 36 38 40 42 43 45 44 64 46
A
47
48
A
B 49
648
9 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 50
4 31 86 51
10 30 52
9 29 53
28 54
8 26 55
7 19 56
6 24 61
5 20 25 B 57
3 18 98
2 1 69 58
D
C 68 59
D C
67 60
21
23
22 66 27 65 71 41 39 63 54
549
38 43 62
MA-05-05118A
Fig. 2

Parts list (Fig. 3)

(67) O’ring
(72) Unions
(73) 1.5 bar valve
(74) Pipe (17 bar forward clutch)
(75) O’rings
(76) Pipe (17 bar reverse clutch)
(77) 13 bar valve
(78) Pipe (shuttle lubrication)
(79) Screw
(80) Flange
(81) Seal
(82) 500 micron strainer
(87) Pipe
(88) Union
(91) Union
(93) Union
(94) Pipe
(95) O’rings
(96) Union
(97) Screw
(101) Screw
(102) Dust seal
(103) Sleeve
(104) Retaining ring
Legend
Z Detail

GP20 and GPA40 overall view
Z 73
31
72
86
76
72
75
88
F
74 F
75
89 83
91
Dynashiftlubrication
96
542
90
75
95 97
510
94 93
67 87
F1
79 78 101 102 81 103 82
Hydraulic control unit 80 104

MA-05-05002A
Z F1
Fig. 3

Parts list (Fig. 4)

(73) 1.5 bar valve
(74) Pipe (17 bar forward clutch)
(75) O’rings
(76) Pipe (17 bar reverse clutch)
(78) Pipe (shuttle lubrication)
(79) Screw
(80) Flange
(81) Seal
(82) 500 micron strainer
(84) Plug
(85) Seal
(87) Pipe
(88) Union
(91) Union
(93) Union
(94) Pipe
(95) O’rings
(96) Union
(97) Screw
Legend
Z Detail

GPA30 overall view
Z
77
73
31
72
86
76
72
75
88
F
74 F
75
89 83
91
Dynashift lubrication
96
542
90
75
95 97
510
94 93 78
67 87
78
82
79 80 81
84 85
Hydraulic control unit
MA-05-05119A
Z
Fig. 4

Parts list (Fig. 5) (63) Stop plates

(65) Snap ring
(1) Pump housing
(66) Screw
(2) Pump cover
(68) Ball bearing
(3) Shim(s)
(69) Seal
(5) Locking ring
(70) Screw
(6) Splined ring
(71) Pins
(7) O’ring
(73) 1.5 bar valve
(8) Anti-extrusion rings
(77) 13 bar valve
(9) Snap rings
(98) Snap ring
(11) Circlip
(99) Screw
(12) Ball bearing
(100)Ring
(13) Screw
(15) Sealing rings
(16) Ring
(19) Input shaft
(20) Pin
(21) Circlip
(22) Ball bearing
(23) Snap ring
(24) Seal
(27) Drive hub
(32) Ball bearing
(36) Seal
(40) Rivets
(41) Seal
(42) Seal
(43) Plate
(44) Spools
(45) Springs
(49) Planet carrier
(50) Planet gear pins
(51) Spacers
(52) Double planet gears
(53) Input sun gear
(54) Snap ring
(56) Snap ring
(57) Ball bearing
(59) Single planet gears
(61) Snap rings
(62) Springs

Exploded view
Forward clutch Reverse clutch

65
45
33 44
27
23
54 77
53
32
29
30
5 46
9 62
8
47
7
8 71
6 49
9 17
43 57
42 56
41 98
36 63
25 52
39
15
38 60
40 51
70 60
50
63
34
19
99
22
2
13 28
24 59
21
69 60
100
18 51
12
66 60
11
20 50
68 61
16 58
1 61
14
3 73
MA-05-05003A
Fig. 5


Removal
B . Removing - refitting the forward
clutch 6. Remove the forward clutch (2) (Fig. 6) and pull it
from the housing using a locally made tool (see
Preliminary operations § G).

the gearbox (see chapter 2).
2. Drain the gearbox and the centre housing.
Refitting
3. Remove the clutch plate from the gearbox (see 7. Clean the components. Replace any defective
chapter 3). parts.
4. Remove the flanges from each end of the pipe 8. Check that PTO shaft (1) is installed (Fig. 6).
(78). Remove the pipe (Fig. 3, Fig. 4). 9. Refit the clutch using the tool used for removal.
5. Remove pipes (31) (74) (86) (87) and (94). NOTA: If forward clutch shimming is necessary,
refer to § D.
Fig. 6
MA-05-05120A

Final operations
C . Disassembling - reassembling
10. Replace the pipe seals (74) (94). the forward clutch
11. Refit pipes. Carry out operation 5 in reverse order.
12. Replace the pipe seals (78). Refit the pipe. Tighten Disassembly
the flange holding screws at each end of the pipe
to a torque of 25 - 35 Nm. 18. Separate cover (33) from clutch unit (18). Remove
clutch discs (29) and intermediate plates (30).
13. Refit the clutch plate on the gearbox (see
chapter 3). 19. Remove:
14. Top up the oil level in the housings. Check it using - the front snap ring (9) and the splined ring (6)
the sight glass located at the rear left-hand side of (Fig. 7);
the rear axle. - the anti-extrusion rings (8);
15. Assemble the tractor between the engine and the - the seal (7).
gearbox (see chapter 2). 20. Remove circlip (11), take off cover (2) from the
16. Carry out a road test of the PowerShuttle and A, B, pump (14) complete with bearing (12).
C and D ratios of the Dynashift. 21. Pull the lubricating pump out of the pump housing
17. Check the oil tightness of the mating faces and (1) and take it apart from the clutch unit (18).
hydraulic unions. 22. Remove seal rings (15). If necessary, extract ring
(16) and remove the 1.5 bar valve (73).
23. Place the partially disassembled clutch on a suit-
able locally made fixture (Fig. 7) (see § G).
24. Compress the Belleville washers (25) and remove
the rear snap ring (9) (Fig. 7).
25. Remove locking ring (5). Gradually release the
Belleville washers.
26. Split unit (18) fitted with piston (28) from shaft (19).
27. Remove the Belleville washers and the ring (100)
(Fig. 7).
28. Remove snap ring (23). Pull out the shaft (19)
complete with bearing (22) from hub (27).
29. Take off circlip (21). Extract bearing (22) from shaft
(19).
30. Remove the piston. Remove seals (24) (69) and
discard them. If necessary, extract the bearing (68)
from unit (18).
31. If necessary, remove snap ring (54) and remove
the input sun gear (53). Remove snap ring (65).
Extract bearing (32).

100 25
F
F
MA-05-05121A
Fig. 7

Reassembly
32. Make sure that pin (20) is fitted.
33. If removed, fit the bearing (32) on cover (33), using
a press and a suitable tool. Fit snap ring (65). 18
34. If disassembled, refit bearing (68).
35. Lubricate the new seals (24) (69) and fit them on
the piston.
36. Fit the piston (28), using a pin of suitable diameter
to align the index holes bored in the unit (18) and
piston (Fig. 8).
NOTE: The angular position of the piston depends
on the position of unit (18) lubricating ports.
Complete the installation of the piston by gradually 28
and alternately striking around its top rim with a
plastic mallet. Check that no fragments of the seal
remain after assembly,
37. Using a suitable fixture, force fit the bearing (22) on
the shaft (19), with the sealed side directed
towards the reverse clutch. Fit the circlip (21).
38. Put the assembly (shaft, bearing, circlip) in the hub
(27). Fit snap ring (23).
18
MA-05-05122A
Fig. 8

39. Refit the ring (100) and the Belleville washers as

shown in Fig. 9.
40. Assemble unit (18) fitted with the piston (28) on
shaft (19).
41. Compress the Belleville washers using the same
procedure as in operation 23. Position the ring (5), 100
aligning two of the flat sections with those of the
unit (18). Replace the rear snap ring (9) and
correctly position it in the bottom of the groove.
42. Remove the fixture.
43. Check that the seal rings (15) turn freely in their
grooves. Fit the seal rings, lightly coated with
miscible grease, making sure that they do not
protrude beyond the rim of unit (18).
44. If necessary:
- Fit and tighten the 1.5 bar valve (73) to
47 - 54 Nm.
- Lightly smear the outer rim of the ring (16) with
Lodtite 648 or equivalent, and fit it home using a
suitable fixture, with chamfer C turned as shown
in Fig. 10.
Check that the hydraulic ports are not blocked by
the product.
45. Lubricate the ring. Assemble pump housing (1) on
unit (18). 100
MA-05-05123A
Fig. 9
648
16
MA-05-05124A
Fig. 10

46. Lubricate pump (14) with clean transmission oil

and position it aligning the flat sections of the rotor
with those on the unit (18). 29 27 30
47. Manually check the angular movement of the rotor
on the flat sections of unit (18).
48. Fit the bearing (12) on the cover (2) of the pump. Fit
the cover. Install circlip (11) and screws (13) and
tighten to a torque of 36 - 46 Nm.
49. Lubricate and install a new assembly (O'ring (7)
and anti-extrusion ring (8)). Slide on the splined ring
(6). Fit a new front snap ring (9).
28
50. Soak the discs (29) in a transmission oil bath for
impregnated.
51. Fit the required number of intermediate plates (30)
and discs (29) to the hub (27), first fitting a plate
against the piston (28) and ensuring their catches MA-05-05007A
Fig. 11
are correctly aligned (Fig. 11).
52. Lightly smear the mating face of the clutch cover
(33) on the unit (18) with Loctite 549 or equivalent.
Place the cover on the unit, the catches of the
intermediate plates lodged in the notches cut into
the clutch cover.
Fit and tighten the screws (66) to a torque of
25.5 - 34.5 Nm.
53. Manually check the rotation of the hub (27).
54. If necessary, refit the input sun gear (53) and fit
snap ring (54).

D . Shimming the forward clutch

This operation consists in obtaining an axial clearance
J of 0.60 to 0.80 mm between the pump cover (2) and 65 38
the clutch cover plate (4) (Fig. 12).
Remove the PTO shaft to perform this operation.
55. Install the forward clutch on the reverse clutch

cover (38), using the tool used in Fig. 6, § B. 4
56. Fit a 2 mm shim (3) on cover the (2) (Fig. 12).
57. Lubricate the lip of the clutch cover plate seal. 3
Protect the lip of the seal by fitting a protector (see
section 3) on the splines of the shaft (19). Fit two
guide studs on opposite sides of the gearbox 19
housing and temporarily install the clutch cover
plate (4) without using Loctite. Gradually tighten
several screws.
58. Place a dial gauge at the end of shaft (19) and
check the clearance by moving the shaft sideways
(Fig. 12).
IMPORTANT: Check that the snap ring (65) of
bearing (32) is correctly in contact with cover (38)
(Fig. 12) by pushing the shaft (19) back as far as 2 32
possible.
59. Remove clutch cover plate (4).
Depending on the reading previously obtained with
the dial gauge, define a new thickness for shim(s)
(3) in order to obtain a J clearance of between
0.60 and 0.80 mm (Fig. 12). J = 0,60/0,80 mm
MA-05-05008B
Fig. 12

Disassembly (Fig. 13)

E . Disassembling - reassembling
the reverse clutch 62. Remove the screws (70) and the cover (38).
63. Recover the spools (44) and the springs (45).
Preliminary operations 64. Remove the large springs (62) and the pins (71).
60. Remove the forward clutch (see § B). 65. On cover (38), remove:
61. Remove the input unit (see chapter 5). - the plate (43),
- the seal (42) and discard it,
- the piston (39),
- the seals (36) (41) and discard them;
- the unions (72), the 13 bar valve (77) (Fig. 19) and
the O'ring (75) of the 17 bar supply port (Fig. 3,
Fig. 4).
Fig. 13

66. Immobilise the planet carrier (49) with a holding

tool, ref. 3378240M1 (see Fig. 14 and § G).
67. Remove screws (99) securing the cover (34)
(Fig. 13, Fig. 14) and remove it.
68. Remove clutch discs (47) and intermediate plates
(46).
69. Separate the output sun gear (58), held by the snap
rings (61), from the primary shaft (55) (Fig. 13).
70. Remove snap ring (98) (Fig. 13).
71. Remove the planet carrier (49) with the double and
single planet gears (52) (59).
72. On the planet carrier (49), remove:
- the plates (63),
- the double planet gears (52) and the pins (50).
Mark their position,
- the single planet gears (59) and pins (50). Mark
their position, Fig. 14
- the snap ring (56) and bearing (57).
NOTA: The rotation of planet gears around the pins
(50) is on two rows of needle bearings (60), joined
and separated by a spacer (51).
IMPORTANT: if the planet gears and the pins are to
be removed, check that no unwanted needle or
spacer remains in the planet carrier after refitting.
Reassembly
defective parts.
74. Check that the ports in the planet gear pins and the
channels in the planet carriers are not blocked.
75. Where necessary, fit the planet gears with two
rows of needle bearings coated with miscible
grease and separated by a spacer.
76. On the planet carrier, refit:
- bearing (57) and snap ring (56),
- double and single planet gears (52) (59) posi- 59 49
tioned as shown in Fig. 15;
- pins (50), with the lubricating ports placed facing
those in the planet carrier (49). 52
NOTA: Each end of the pins (50) is provided with:
- a port, one of which is closed off by a rivet (35)
while the other is used for planet gear lubrica-
tion;
- a flat section and a shoulder that stop any pin
rotation or any side movement.
MA-05-05125A
Fig. 15

77. Install the partially assembled planet carrier. Fit the

snap ring (98) and the rear snap ring (61) on the
output sun gear (58).
78. Position marks R (punch marks) on the double
planet gears (52) (Fig. 16) so that they pass
through a centerline meeting at O (Fig. 16).
IMPORTANT: The mark on the front side of the
planet gear corresponds to the alignment of the
two splines. It is mandatory to respect the posi-
tions of the punch marks during assembly of the
output sun gear (58).
79. Slide the output sun gear (58), correctly oriented as
shown in Fig. 2, on to the primary shaft (55),
making sure that the punch marks of each planet
gear remain in the required position.
80. Fit the front snap ring (61).
81. Soak the discs (47) in a transmission oil bath for Fig. 16
impregnated.
82. Refit the required number of discs (47) and inter-
mediate plates (46). 46 62 50 47
83. Check the presence of the locating pin (17)
(Fig. 17).
84. Refit the cover (34). Check that it is correctly posi- 71
tioned on the pins (50) of the planet gears and in
the locating pin (Fig. 17).
85. Immobilise the planet carrier, using the same
method as used during disassembly.
86. Fit and tighten the screws (99) (Fig. 17) to a torque
of 36 - 46 Nm. The thread should be previously
smeared with Loctite 242 or equivalent. 17
87. On cover (38), check for the presence of rivets (40)
at the end of the channels.
Refit:
- piston (39) with new lubricated seals (36) (41),
gradually and alternately striking around the 99
piston rim with a plastic mallet. Check that no 34
fragments of the seal remain after assembly,
- plate (43) with a new lubricated seal (42), aligning
the holes of the plate with those in the cover
(38). Insert the plate using the same method as
used for piston (39).
49
MA-05-05126A
Fig. 17

88. Install the pins (71) and the springs (62) (Fig. 17,
Fig. 18) in their respective location on the input
unit.
89. Smear the spools (44) and the springs (45) with
miscible grease. Fit and stick the spools in each
compartment of the cover (38), with the points
towards the unions (72) (Fig. 2). Slide and stick a
spring (45) in each spool.
90. On the external face of the cover (38), place three
sufficiently long and equally spaced studs in the
holes provided for screws (64).
91. Install and position the cover, with the 13 bar valve
port (77) directed upwards (Fig. 19).
92. Before fitting screws (70), check that the spools
(44) slide freely in each compartment of the front
cover on the input unit. To do this, compress the
springs (45), using a screwdriver passed through
the tapped holes of the unions (72). If the springs
cannot be compressed, investigate the cause..
93. Pretighten screws (70).
During pretightening, check that the spools (44)
still slide freely. Also check that each end of the
(large) springs (62) is correctly housed in its respec-
tive seat.
94. Tighten screws (70) (Fig. 13) to a final torque of
29 - 37 Nm. After completing the tightening, check
again that each spool can move freely and restore
its initial position.
IMPORTANT: A spool that is blocked open may limit
or interrupt lubrication to the forward clutch.
95. Fit the 13 bar valve (77) with its seals on cover (38)
and tighten to a torque of 12.5 - 13.5 Nm
maximum (Fig. 19). Fit and tighten the unions (72).
Fig. 18
Final operation
96. Install the input unit (see section 5) and the
forward clutch (see § B).
Fig. 19


F . Disassembling - reassembling
the driving pinion - Shimming the 101.Remove screws (13) and housing (5). Recover the
locating pin (4).
shaft
102.Where necessary, remove bearing cup (16) and
The rearward position of the Dynashift unit, caused by shims (3).
the presence of the reverse shuttle clutch in the 103.Take out the secondary shaft (1), pinion and
housing of the unit, limits the space available at the bearing cones (7) (9) assembly from cover (14).
rear of the input unit. 104.Take off bearing cup (8).
For this reason the secondary shaft (1) and the pinion 105.Where needed, separate the bearing cones from
(2) are machined as a single component (Fig. 20). the shaft.
106.Drive out the roller bearing (1), the gearbox front
Preliminary operations intermediary shaft support (see chapter 5).
Remove the oil deflector (2) and discard it if neces-
97. Remove the forward clutch (see § B). sary (Fig. 21).
99. Remove the reverse clutch (see § E).
100.Remove the Dynashift unit (see chapter 5).
4 13 16 5 3
14
2 1
Fig. 20
MA-05-05128A

Reassembly (Fig. 20) 113.Determine the thickness of shims (3) required in

order to obtain a temporary clearance of 0.10 mm
107.Check that the lubricating ports on secondary shaft to 0.15 mm approximately. For the definitive shim-
(36) are not blocked. Check for the presence of the ming with pre-loading, see the following para-
R lubrication restrictor. graphs.
108.Clean and check all components. Replace any 114.Place the previously determined shims in unit (5)
defective parts. followed by the bearing cup (16).
109.Lubricate the bearing cones and cups with clean 115.Place the locating pin (4) and the unit on the cover
transmission oil before assembly. (14). Tighten the screws (13) to a torque of
110.Insert bearing cones (7) (9) in contact with pinion 29 - 37 Nm, after lightly smearing the threads with
(2) using a suitable press and fixture. Loctite 242 or equivalent.
111.Place the bearing cup (8) in cover (14). 116.Place the unit in a vice with jaw protectors, and
112.Refit the secondary shaft (1), pinion and bearing carry out a definitive shimming of the shaft.
cones assembly inside the cover.
3 2 1
1 2
MA-05-05127A Fig. 21

Shimming the shaft (1) (Fig. 20, Fig. 21,

Fig. 22)
IMPORTANT: It is recommended to remove oil deflector
(2) (Fig. 21) in order to avoid any interference between
it and the shaft (1) (Fig. 20).
117.Position the dial gauge feeler pin on the end of the

shaft.
118.Pull hard on shaft (1), alternately turning it from left
to right in order to correctly seat the cones in the
bearing cups.
119.Set the dial gauge needle to zero.
120.Repeat the operation 118, this time pushing.
121.Depending on the clearance measured, select a
thickness of shims (3) to obtain a preload (Fig. 22)
P = 0.05 to 0.15 mm.
NOTE: If possible, shim to the maximum tolerance.
122.Remove screws (13). Remove unit (5).
123.Position the definitive shims (3) selected during
operation 121 along with bearing cup (16) in the
unit (5).
1
124.Refit the unit, shim(s) and bearing cup assembly on
the cover (14), first checking for the presence of
3
the locating pin (4).
125.Fit and tighten the screws (13) to a final torque of
29 - 37 Nm, with their threads lightly greased with
Loctite 242 or equivalent. P = 0,05/0,15 mm
126.Manually check the rotation of the shaft.
MA-05-00352B
127.Position the oil deflector (2) as shown in Fig. 21.
Fit the roller bearing (1) home against the unit
housing.
Fig. 22
Final operations
128.Refit the Dynashift unit (see chapter 5).
129.Refit the reverse clutch (see § E).
130.Refit the input unit (see chapter 5).
131.Refit the forward clutch (§ B).

G . Service tools
• 3378240M1: Planet carrier holding tool (Fig. 23)
Locally made tools

• Sleeve for removing - refitting the clutch assembly
(Fig. 24)
(1) Pipe: Tu52B outer Ø 42.4 thickness 5
(2) Pipe: Tu52B outer Ø 48.3 thickness 2.9
• Belleville washer compression tool (Fig. 25)

(1) U iron profile: 60
(2) Threaded rod: Ø 8 Fig. 23
(3) Round iron machined with the following dimen-
sions: Ø = 36, L = 60
Fig. 24
Fig. 25


GBA10 - Dynashift
5B13 - GBA10 - Dynashift
CONTENTS
A . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
C . Preliminary operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
D . Removing and disassembling the cover, housing, front clutch and brake . . . . . . 14
E . Removing and splitting the planet carrier unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
F . Disassembling the rear clutch and brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
G . Assembling the planet carriers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
H . Reassembling the rear clutch and the brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
I . Refitting the cover, front clutch, brake and housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
J . Shimming the planet carriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
K . Assembling the input unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
L . Final operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
M. Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

GBA10 - Dynashift

GBA10 - Dynashift

A . General
This epicyclic gear train is controlled by two hydraulic
The Dynashift unit is located between the reverse clutches and brakes.
clutch and the driving gear of the PowerShuttle (see
chapter 5). The secondary ring gear (34) is:
It is a hydraulically operated gear shift mechanism - either locked onto the primary shaft (7) by the three
which provides the gearbox with four input ratios. clutch discs (3) and the Belleville washer (4) located
The function is ensured by two epicyclic gear trains in the front part of the housing;
linked to two hydraulic clutches. - or immobilised in relation to the housing by three
The design of the Dynashift allows selection of each of brake discs (15) and a piston (22).
the four ratios while driving under load without When there is no pressure, the piston (22) is pulled
declutching, using a lever located to the left-hand side back by the twelve springs (20) and the Belleville
under the steering wheel. washer (4) by means of the thrust plate (16).
The Dynashift unit is controlled by two solenoid valves When the 17 bar pressure is built up in the circuit, the
mounted on the clutch unit located on the front piston (22) moves forward and locks the brake discs
right-hand side of the gearbox. The two solenoid (15) while pushing the thrust plate (16) that
valves are controlled by the tractor electronic system. compresses the Belleville washer (4).
The speed of the secondary ring gear is established as
follows:
- speed equals engine speed if the front piston is not
under pressure;
B . Operating principle - speed nil when the front piston is under pressure.
The Dynashift input unit comprises two epicyclic gear
trains : The secondary sun gear (61) is either:
- the primary epicyclic gear train, the main part of the - either locked onto the secondary shaft by means of
input unit, used to transmit the movement from the four clutch discs (50) and two Belleville washers (52)
engine to the gearbox; located on the rear section of the housing;
- the secondary epicyclic gear train controls the speed - or immobilised in relation to the housing by means of
of the primary sun gear. three brake discs (41) and a piston (37).
When there is no pressure, the piston (37) is pushed
forward by the Belleville washers and the six springs
Primary epicyclic gear train (65).
The movement enters via the primary ring gear (31) The 17 bar pressure moves the piston (37) back and
which is splined onto the primary shaft (7). The ring locks the brake discs (41). The piston compresses the
gear turns at the same speed as the engine. Belleville washers (52) by means of the thrust plate
The movement exits via the planet carrier (28) which is (45) which releases the secondary shaft clutch discs.
splined onto the secondary shaft (53). The primary sun
gear (64) is driven by the secondary epicyclic gear train. Immobilisation of either the secondary ring gear (34) or
The speed of this sun gear determines the drive unit the secondary sun gear (61) modifies the speed of the
ratio of the gearbox. secondary planet carrier (39). The latter drives the
primary sun gear (64), and this detemines the gearbox
reduction ratio.

GBA10 - Dynashift
Parts list (Fig. 1) (57) Ball bearing

(58) Ball bearing
(59) Rear clutch housing
(60) Locking ring
(3) Front clutch discs
(62) Locking ring
(5) Splined hub
(6) Needle bearing
(7) Primary shaft
(65) Springs
(8) Ring restrictor
(69) Circlip
(9) Screw
(70) Stop
(71) Shim(s)
(11) Bearing
(72) Locking ring
(12) Washer
(74) Rivets
(13) Front cover
(75) Deflector
(14) Clutch housing
(76) Tab washer
(77) Spring washer
(78) Washer
(17) Clutch plate
(79) Locating pin
(18) Screw
(80) Oil restrictor (gearbox lower shaftline lubrication)
(20) Springs
(21) Spacer housing
(22) Front piston
(23) Rivet
(24) O’ring
(25) Screw
(26) O’ring
(27) Ball bearing
(29) Rivets
(30) Screw
(33) Screw
(35) O’ring
(36) O’ring
(37) Rear piston
(38) Clutch plate
(40) Cover
(42) Screw
(44) Clutch plate
(46) Screw
(47) Cover
(49) Locking ring
(50) Rear clutch discs
(53) Secondary shaft
(54) Splined hub
(55) Circlip
(56) Spacer

GBA10 - Dynashift
Overall view
648 242
17 11 2 3 5 7 6 12 10 4 14 42 9
648
18 13 8 242
23
25
29
20
16
15 22
24 77
27
26 37 33
31 242
21 74 70 69
1
28 64 75 76 53 50 71 72 58 63
34 39
62
35 56
61 60
36 57
49 55
59 65
48
30
80 38 44 45 40 41 47 51 54 78 52 46 79 242
648 242
Fig. 1
MA-05-05130A

GBA10 - Dynashift
Parts list (Fig. 2) (57) Ball bearing

(58) Ball bearing
(59) Rear clutch housing
(60) Locking ring
(3) Front clutch discs
(62) Locking ring
(5) Splined hub
(6) Needle bearing
(7) Primary shaft
(65) Springs
(8) Ring restrictor
(69) Circlip
(9) Screw
(70) Stop
(71) Shim(s)
(11) Bearing
(72) Locking ring
(12) Washer
(74) Rivets
(13) Front cover
(75) Deflector
(14) Clutch housing
(76) Tab washer
(77) Spring washer
(78) Washer
(17) Clutch plate
(79) Locating pin
(18) Screw
(20) Springs
(21) Spacer housing
(22) Front piston
(23) Rivet
(24) O’ring
(25) Screw
(26) O’ring
(27) Ball bearing
(29) Rivets
(30) Screw
(33) Screw
(35) O’ring
(36) O’ring
(37) Rear piston
(38) Clutch plate
(40) Cover
(42) Screw
(44) Clutch plate
(46) Screw
(47) Cover
(49) Locking ring
(50) Rear clutch discs
(54) Splined hub
(55) Circlip
(56) Spacer

GBA10 - Dynashift
Exploded view
Fig. 2

GBA10 - Dynashift

GBA10 - Dynashift
Explanation of the ratios Legend

Ratio A: 1/1.620 reduction (Fig. 3) Lubrication
- The two pistons (22) (37) are simultaneously under 17 bar low pressure
pressure from the 17 bar circuit. Transmission of movement to the
- The secondary ring gear (34) is locked onto the gearbox
housing by means of the front brake.
- The secondary sun gear (61) is locked onto the
housing by the rear brake.
- Consequently:
- the secondary epicyclic gear train is locked;
- the primary sun gear (64) is locked;
- the reduction ratio is only set by the primary epicy-
clic gear train.
- This is standard kinematics, movement comes in via
the ring gear and exits via the planet carrier; the sun
gear does not move.
Fig. 3

GBA10 - Dynashift
Ratio B: 1/1.386 reduction (Fig. 4) Legend

- The front piston (22) is pressurized. Lubrication
- Front brake locks the secondary ring gear (34) onto 17 bar low pressure
the housing.
- Rear piston (37) is not under pressure.
Transmission of movement to the gearbox
- The secondary sun gear (61) rotates with the
secondary shaft (53) (clutch engaged).
- The secondary planet carrier (39) rotates at a low Pilot flow to the primary sun gear (64)
speed, driving the primary sun gear (64).
- The rotational speed of the primary planet carrier (28)
corresponds to the speed difference between the
primary ring gear (31) and the primary sun gear (64).
- The reduction effect is therefore minor.
Fig. 4

GBA10 - Dynashift
Ratio C: 1/1.1704 reduction (Fig. 5) Legend

- The rear piston (37) is pressurized. Lubrication
- The rear brake locks the secondary sun gear (61) 17 bar low pressure
onto the housing.
- The front piston (22) is not under pressure.
- The secondary ring gear (34) rotates with the primary
shaft (7) thereby transmitting a higher speed to the
secondary planet carrier (39). Pilot flow to the primary sun gear (64)
- The primary sun gear (64) is driven by the secondary
planet carrier (39) at a higher speed than in ratio B.
- The reduction is therefore lower.
Fig. 5

GBA10 - Dynashift
Ratio D: Ratio 1/1 (Fig. 6)

- The two pistons are not under pressure. The two
clutches are therefore clamped.
- The secondary ring gear (34) rotates with the primary
shaft (7).
- The secondary sun gear (61) is locked on the
secondary shaft (53) thereby mechanically locking
the entire system.
- Consequently, the ratio is 1:1 (direct drive).
Legend
Lubrication
Mechanical locking
Fig. 6

GBA10 - Dynashift
C . Preliminary operations
the gearbox (see chapter 2).
3. Remove the selector cover (see chapter 5).
4. Take off:
- the cover plate (see chapter 3);
- the hydraulic control unit (see chapter 9);
- the forward clutch from the reverse shuttle (see
chapter 5);
- the input unit (see chapter 5).
5. Position the unit vertically and remove the shuttle
reverse clutch (see chapter 5).

GBA10 - Dynashift
D . Removing and disassembling the

cover, housing, front clutch and
brake
Removal
6. Using two locally made flanges or rings, remove
the shaft (7), cover (13) and housing (21) assembly
(Fig. 7), and recover both the stop (70) and the 13 7
locating pin.
7. Remove the piston (37) from the housing (21).
Discard the O'rings (35) (36).
8. Fit the cover and housing assembly vertically on a
workbench in which a hole
(Ø approximately 65 mm) has been drilled in order
to accommodate the primary shaft (7) of the cover 21
assembly.
9. With the help of an operator, immobilise the trans-
mission shaft (7) using tool ref. 3378004M1 (see
§ M) and a locally made spindle. Remove the
screws (33) and split the secondary ring gear (34)
from the secondary ring gear carrier (1).
10. Remove the circlip (69), pressing on the center of
the primary ring gear (31) in order to compress the
spring washer (77). Remove the primary ring gear
(31) and ball bearing (27). Recover the spring
washer.
11. Hold the primary shaft (7) and remove the screws
(25). Take out the secondary ring gear carrier (1).
12. Remove the housing (21) along with the piston
(22). Remove the piston and discard the O'rings
(24) (26).
13. Remove the discs (3) (15), intermediate plates (2),
clutch plate (17), hub (5), springs (20) and the 7
thrust plate (16).
14. Remove the Belleville washer (4), the unit (14), the
shaft (7) on the internal face of the cover (13) as
shown by the arrow (Fig. 8) and recover the friction
washer (10). 13
21
MA-05-05131A
Fig. 7

GBA10 - Dynashift
3378004M1
37 69 27 34
31
33 35
77
26 36
24 21
16 22
20
25 2 3 10 5 7 4 14 1 17 15 13
MA-05-05132A
Fig. 8

GBA10 - Dynashift
E . Removing and splitting the F . Disassembling the rear clutch

planet carrier unit and brake
Removal (Fig. 9) 22. Remove the clutch plate (38), springs (65) and
discs (41) (the latter should be separated from the
15. Gently compress the planet carrier assembly (28) clutch plate (44)).
(39) using tool ref. 3376920M2 (see § M) (Fig. 9).
23. Remove the reverse clutch unit (59), thrust plate
16. Remove the ring (72). Remove the tab washer (76), (45) and the last disc (41). Remove the friction
planet carrier assembly and the shims (71) washer (51).
mounted along the mating faces of the primary
24. Remove the screws (46). Remove the cover (47)
planet carrier (28).
and the Belleville washers (52). Separate the thrust
17. Remove the secondary sun gear (61) and the plate (45), discs (50) and intermediate plates (48).
locking ring (49) (if necessary).
25. Take off the hub (54).
18. Take off circlip (55). Remove the bearing (57) and
the spacer (56).
Splitting G . Assembling the planet carriers

19. Split the secondary planet carrier (39) from the
primary planet carrier (28). 26. Check and clean all components. Replace any
defective parts.
20. Remove the locking ring (60) and bearing (58).
27. Make sure the lubrication holes on the planet
21. Place the secondary planet carrier in vertical posi- carrier pins are not obstructed.
tion. Remove the needles (63) by hitting the planet
carrier gently against a wooden shim (Fig. 10). Split 28. Check the end play and rotation of each planet gear
the planet carrier from the primary sun gear (64) by hand.
along with the ring (62) and deflector (75). 29. Assemble the primary sun gear (64), complete
with locking ring (62) and deflector (75), on the
secondary planet carrier (39).
30. Into each hole of the primary sun gear, slide a
needle (63) home in the groove of the secondary
planet carrier.
31. Fit the bearing (58), then the locking ring (60).
32. Assemble the secondary planet carrier on the
primary planet carrier (28). Rotate the planet gears
to make their meshing easier.
33. Position the spacer (56), bearing (57) and fit the
circlip (55).
34. Check the primary planet gears backlash by hand.
35. Fit the locking ring (49) (if it was removed) on the
secondary sun gear (61).

GBA10 - Dynashift
28 60 28 76 71 72 58 56
39 57 55
61 39
49
3376920M2
MA-05-05134A
Fig. 9
63
MA-05-05133A
Fig. 10

GBA10 - Dynashift
H . Reassembling the rear clutch and

the brake
defective parts.
37. Turn the planet carriers over in order to access the
38. Fit the secondary sun gear (61), the unit (59) and
the hub (54), with its internal grooves pointing
downwards (Fig. 11).
39. Fit: the discs (50), the intermediate plates (48), the
thrust plate (45) and the Belleville washers (52) as
per Fig. 1, then the cover (47).
40. Centre the reverse clutch unit (59) with tool
3376887M1 (see § M and Fig. 12).
41. Lightly smear the threads of screw (46) with Fig. 11
Loctite 242 and tighten it to a torque of 12 - 16 Nm
(Fig. 12). Remove the tool. Separate the housing
unit from the planet carriers.
42. Check for the presence of washer (78). Smear this
washer with Loctite 648 type or equivalent and fit
it on the cover (40) .
Smear the washer (51) with miscible grease and fit
it on the cover (47).
43. Fit a disc (41).
44. Fit the unit assembly (59) and the washer (51) on
the secondary shaft (53). Assemble the hub (54),
making sure its internal grooves face upwards
(Fig. 13).
clutch plate (44). Refit the springs (65) (Fig. 13).
NOTA: The planet carrier unit is fitted later, after
shimming.
Fig. 12
Fig. 13

GBA10 - Dynashift
I . Refitting the cover, front clutch,

brake and housing 5
46. Check presence of rivets (23) on the cover (13). 14

47. If the bearing (11) needs replacing, proceed as 7
10
follows:
- Fit the new bearing (6) into the new bearing
block, placing the rear face of the ball flush with
the bearing.
- Degrease the mating faces of the washer (12)
and of the bearing (11).
Lightly smear one side of the washer with
Loctite 648 or equivalent.
Stick the washer to the bearing. Leave to dry for 13
a few minutes.
MA-05-05167A
48. Fit the bearing on the front cover (13) making sure Fig. 14
to align the lubricating channels. Lightly smear the
thread of the screws with Loctite 242 and tighten
to a torque of:
- M6 screws (9): 12 - 16 Nm
- M8 screw (42): 20 - 28 Nm.
49. Place the cover on a suitable fixture.
50. Slide the primary shaft (7) through the internal face
of the cover (13) and the unit (14) together with the
washer (10) (Fig. 14).
Fit the Belleville washer (4) as shown in Fig. 1, a
disc (15) and the thrust plate (16).
51. Place the hub (5) on the primary shaft (7) with the
internal grooves facing upwards (Fig. 14). Fit the
discs (3) and the intermediate plates (2).
clutch plate (17).
53. Refit the springs (20).

GBA10 - Dynashift
54. Check presence of the rivets (74) on the housing

(21). Make sure the channels in the pistons (22)
(37) within the housing (21) are not blocked.
55. Lubricate the O'rings (24) (26) and assemble them
on the piston (22) and in the housing (21) respec-
tively.
56. Position the piston in the housing and fit it using a
small plastic mallet to hit progressively round the
edge.
57. Fit the housing (21) on the cover (13). Check that
the housing lubricating channel aligns with that of
the cover.
58. Fit and tighten the screws (18) to a torque of
29 - 37 Nm.
Check piston (22) oil tightness in the following
manner:
- Connect a pressure gauge fitted with a valve and
suitable fixture to the front piston port.
- Feed the circuit with compressed air at 0.3 bar.
- Close the valve and check that pressure does not
drop over a period of approximately 60 seconds.
59. Fit the bearing (27) on the primary ring gear (31).
60. Refit the ring gears (31) (34), secondary ring gear
carrier (1), bearing (27) and spring washer (77).
Carry out the operations 8 to 11 in reverse order.
NOTA: In order to avoid any difficulties during
assembly, refit the primary ring gear (31) before
tightening the screws (25).
Tightening torque:
- screws (25): 31 - 35 Nm, Loctite 242 or equiva-
lent
- screws (33): 13 - 15 Nm, Loctite 242 or equiva-
lent
61. Lubricate and assemble new O'rings (35) (36).
Place the piston (37) in the housing (21) and force
fit it using a small plastic mallet to hit progressively
round the edge.
Check piston (37) tightness in the following
manner:
- Use a suitable fixture to hold the piston.
- Check the tightness of joints according to the
method stated previously for the front piston.

GBA10 - Dynashift

GBA10 - Dynashift
J . Shimming the planet carriers

NOTA: For adjusting clearances J1 and J2, springs (65)
and clutch plate (38) must be removed.
On rear clutch housing (Fig. 17)

62. Use a depth gauge to measure dimensions B and
C at two opposing points. Take the average of the
two measurements.
Calculate dimension: A = B - C
On the planet carrier assembly (Fig. 16)

63. Install the secondary sun gear (61) complete with
locking ring (49) on ball bearing (57). Fig. 15
64. Measure dimension D using a depth gauge.
65. Determine gap E between primary planet carrier
(28) and hub (54) (Fig. 18) according to the formula:
E=A+D 61 49 57
D
66. Fill space E with shims (71) having a value of E +
0.50 min. to + 0.70 max., to obtain a clearance of:
J1 = E + 0.50 to 0.70 mm

67. Place the secondary sun gear (61) on unit (59) and
the planet carrier assembly on the shaft (53). Fit
washer (76) and ring (72).
68. Position a dial gauge feeler pin as per Fig. 19 and
check the clearance by moving the planet carrier
assembly vertically.
69. Depending on the clearance measured , select the
shim (71) thickness to obtain J2 = 0 to 0.20 mm. MA-05-05135A
Fig. 16
70. Remove the planet carrier assembly.
71. Fit springs (65). Position clutch plate (38), ensuring
that the notches align with the tabs of the cover
(40).
72. Ensure presence of shims (71) defined at operation
66.
73. Refit secondary sun gear (61) and planet carrier
assembly and compress using tool ref.
3376920M2 (see Fig. 9 and § M).
74. Fit shims (71) selected at operation 69 against the
primary planet carrier (28). Install washer (76) and
ring (72) (Fig. 19).
75. Check the secondary planet gear backlash by hand.

GBA10 - Dynashift
F
A
A C
Fig. 17
MA-05-05136A
28
72 71
76
28
Fig. 18
MA-05-05137A
Fig. 19

GBA10 - Dynashift
K . Assembling the input unit

76. Screw two guide studs on the housing (21)
(Optional).
Check presence of locating pin (79) and oil splasher
(80) on cover (40).
77. Use a sling (Fig. 7) to refit the primary shaft (7),
cover (13) and housing (21) assembly aligning the
locating pin with its housing on the cover (40).
78. Turn the shaft in order to engage the planet gears
in the ring gears.
79. Remove the guide studs (if used). Install the
screws (30) and tighten to a torque of 29 - 37 Nm,
having lightly smeared the threads with Loctite
242 beforehand.
80. Check shaft rotation.
81. In case the cover (13) has been replaced, position
the ring restrictor (8) having first lightly smeared it
with Loctite 648. Check that the product does not
block the lubricating ports.
L . Final operations
82. Refit the PowerShuttle reverse clutch (see chapter
5).
83. Refit:
- the input unit (see chapter 5);
- forward clutch (see chapter 5).
When replacing the cover (13) and/or or the
spacer housing (21) it is necessary to check and
possibly adjust the forward clutch of the Power-
Shuttle (see chapter 5);
- the reverse shuttle hydraulic unit (see chapter 9);
- the cover plate (see chapter 3).
85. Top up the oil levels in the housings and check the
transparent tube on the rear left-hand side of the
rear axle.
87. Check the oil tightness of the hydraulic unions and
of the selector cover mating face.

GBA10 - Dynashift
M . Service tools
Tools available in AGCO network
• 3376887M1: Centring tool (Fig. 20)
• 3376920M2: Planet carrier compression tool

(Fig. 21)
• 3378004M1: Primary shaft holding tool (Fig. 22)
Fig. 20
Fig. 21
Fig. 22

GBA10 - Dynashift

GBA10 - Selector cover
5B14 - GBA10 - Selector cover
CONTENTS
A . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Identification and functions of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
C . Removing - refitting the cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
D . Replacing Hare / Tortoise piston seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
E . Disassembling - reassembling the selector mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
F . Adjusting the Hare / Tortoise range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
G . Fitting and adjusting the gear cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
H . Service tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22


A . General
The selector cover is located to the right-hand side of
the gearbox and is composed of the following main
parts:
- a toggle (34);
- a neutral position switch (20).
The single lever, fitted on the cover, controls the gear

shifting for ratios 1 to 4. A hydraulic device provides
the Hare / Tortoise function.
The mechanical locking of the 1st - 2nd / 3rd - 4th

selector rails and the Hare / Tortoise range is carried
out by studs placed between the gear selector rails
and the range selector rail located at the rear part of the
Press once on the pulse button located on the

right-hand gear lever handle to shift between Hare and
Tortoise range, when the gear lever is in neutral posi-
tion.
NOTA: A cell C, TR19 connector (Fig. 3) linked to a

buzzer, informs the user when a gear is engaged and
the parking brake is on.

Parts list (Fig. 1)

(1) Return ports
(2) Grounding lug (not used)
(3) Screw
(4) Temperature probe (TR22 connector)
(6) Hydraulic hose flange
(7) Selector cover
(9) Gear shift control finger
(10) Support
(11) Screw
(14) Gear Selector grid
(17) Seal
(18) Guide bush
(19) Screw
(20) Neutral position switch (TR21 connector)
(21) Washer
(22) Circlip
(23) Spring
(24) Ball
(25) Locating ring
(27) Seal
(33) Washer
(34) Toggle
(35) 17 bar port
(36) Hare / Tortoise solenoid valve (TR20 connector)

Overall view
242
B 242
14 25 10 34 33 23 21 22 9
11 11
1.2 3.4 10
7
9 542
19 24 27 20 18 17
B-B B
242 510 648
20
11 3
25 2
1
35
4 36
1 3
542
6
MA-05-05138A
Fig. 1


Parts list (Fig. 2)

Exploded view
(1) Return ports
(2) Grounding lug (not used)
(3) Screw
(4) Temperature probe (TR22 connector)
9 (6) Hydraulic hose flange
(7) Selector cover
11 (9) Gear shift control finger
(10) Support
25 (11) Screw
34 (14) Gear Selector grid
(17) Seal
33
(18) Guide bush
23 (19) Screw
21 (20) Neutral position switch (TR21 connector)
1
22 (21) Washer
(22) Circlip
10
(23) Spring
(24) Ball
17 18 25 (25) Locating ring
(27) Seal
(33) Washer
(34) Toggle
19 (35) 17 bar port
14 (36) Hare / Tortoise solenoid valve (TR20 connector)
24
27
20 2
35
7
1
36
MA-05-05139A
Fig. 2


1 3
2 4
1/2
34
3/4
1 9
A
3
MA-05-05140A
Fig. 3


B . Identification and functions of

components
Toggle (34) 2
The toggle runs free on pin A (Fig. 3) and pivots with it
by means of a flat. It controls the Neutral position of pin
A (gear shift lever) by means of switch (20) (Fig. 1).
3
Switch (20)
Controlled by the toggle, its function is to supply infor-
mation to the electronic system of the tractor when
the gear lever is in the Neutral position.
1
General operation of the gear shift lever MA-05-05141A
NOTA: By moving the gear shift lever (2) to the left of Fig. 4
the neutral zone, the cable (1) (Fig. 4) allows access to
the track 1 -2. By releasing the lever, it automatically
returns to the intermediate position of track 3 -4.
By moving the lever (2) towards the front or back of the
track concerned, the cable (3) engages the requested
gear.
1
Selecting 1st - 2nd gear ratio
The gear shift lever (2) pushes the lever L with the
cable (1) and engages finger (9) in the 1st - 2nd fork
(Fig. 3).
The first gear ratio is obtained by moving the lever L to
the left and the second ratio by moving it to the right
with the cable (3) (Fig. 5). Simultaneously the toggle
(34) pivots with pin A and leaves the Neutral position 3
(Fig. 3).
MA-05-06002B
L
Selecting 3rd - 4th gear ratio
Fig. 5
In this configuration, the finger (9) integral with pin A is
engaged in 3rd - 4th gear fork.
The third gear ratio is obtained by moving the lever
L to the left and the fourth gear ratio by moving it to the
right with the cable (3) (Fig. 5).
As with the previous ratios the toggle is moved by rota-
tion of pin A.
Safety latch (see chapter 5)

A locking system located on the rear face of the
gearbox, at the end of the selector rails, prohibits the
accidental engagement of a non selected gear.

Hare / Tortoise function

Identification of components (Fig. 6)
(2) O’ring
(3) Piston
(4) Bearing
(5) O’rings
(6) Circlip
(7) Selector cover
(36) Solenoid valve flanged on the selector cover
MA-05-05143A
Fig. 6

Selecting the Hare / Tortoise range is carried out in the

Neutral position by pressing the pulse button incorpo-
rated in the gear shift lever handle.
Hare position (Fig. 6)

The solenoid valve (36) mounted on the selector cover
(7) is closed and causes a drop in pressure in chamber
B. The constant pressure (17 bar) in chamber A thrusts
on the annular face of piston (3) which moves forward
and pushes the fork F1 to the Hare position via the
selector S.
The oil contained in chamber B returns to the housing
via the solenoid valve.
Tortoise position (Fig. 6)

A fresh activation of the pulse button (Fig. 3) causes
the opening of the solenoid valve (36) (Fig. 6).
The 17 bar pressure enters chamber B. The pressure
acting on the larger piston diameter is higher than that
on the annular face of the piston and forces it to return,
moving selector S and fork F1 into the Tortoise posi-
tion. The oil contained in chamber A returns to the
17 bar circuit.
Safety latch (see chapter 5)

The Hare / Tortoise selector rail is similarly locked in
each of its positions (Hare or Tortoise) in the 1st to 4th
gear ratios, by the same previously described system.

C . Removing - refitting the cover

1. Immobilise the tractor. Chock the left rear wheel.
Apply the handbrake.
2. Place chocks for safety between the frame and the
front axle.
3. Remove or place the right rear wheel in the wide
track position. Position axle stand(s) as necessary.
4. Remove the surrounding parts which may obstruct
removal of the selector cover.
6. Disconnect the electrical connectors on the cover. 1
7. Unscrew or loosen the pipes and hoses fitted to
the cover.
3
Removal 6
8. Disconnect the gear control mechanism on the
cover (see § G).
9. Perform the following operations:
• Tractors with a creeper unit (Fig. 7)
Disconnect the control cable (1).
Loosen the screws (3).
Remove the flange (6) and support (2).
• Tractors with no creeper unit (Fig. 7)
Loosen the screws (3).
Remove flange (6).
10. Loosen and remove the selector cover.
2
MA-05-05144A
Fig. 7

Refitting
11. Clean the mating faces of the gearbox and the
cover.
12. Install:
- on the cover: the Hare / Tortoise piston in Hare
position;
- on the gearbox: the Hare / Tortoise fork in the
Hare position, the 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th forks in
the neutral position.
13. Lightly smear the housing / gearbox mating face
with Master Loctite 510 or equivalent.
14. Turn the gear shift control linkage on the cover so
that it fits into selectors S (Fig. 8) when positioning
the cover on the gearbox.
15. If necessary, refit the creeper unit cable bracket.
Reconnect and adjust the control (see chapter 5).
16. Fit and tighten the screws (3) to a torque of
34 - 51 Nm.
17. Refit and adjust the gear control cables on the
cover (see § G).
Final operations
18. As necessary, refit those components removed
previously from around the cover.
19. Refit the wheel and tighten the studs or wheel
nuts to the correct torque depending on the
version (see chapter 6).
20. Top up the oil levels in the housings and check the
transparent tube on the rear left-hand side of the
rear axle.
21. Remove the wedges from between the frame and
the front axle (if used). Fig. 8
22. Engine running. Check the gear shifting of all gears
and Hare / Tortoise positions.
23. Stop the engine and where necessary adjust the
gear shift control (see § G).
24. Check that the buzzer of the safety cell vibrates
correctly (ignition on, handbrake on and gear
engaged).

D . Replacing Hare / Tortoise piston

seals
Disassembly (Fig. 9, Fig. 10)
26. Take off the cover (see § C).
27. Take off circlip (6). Extract piston (3) with the
bearing (4) and discard the O'rings (2) (5).
Reassembly
defective parts.
29. Without fitting O'rings on the piston, check that
the piston slides smoothly in the bore of the cover.
30. The above check completed, lubricate and fit new Fig. 9
O'rings. Carry out operation 27 in reverse order.
IMPORTANT: The replacement of piston (3), bearing
(4) or circlip (6) requires the checking and readjust-
ment of selector S of the Hare / Tortoise range (see
§ F).
31. Refit the selector cover (see § C).
E . Disassembling - reassembling
the selector mechanism
Preliminary operation
32. Remove the cover (see § C) and hold it in a vice
with jaw protectors.
Fig. 10

Disassembly 49. Protect the lip of seal (17) by covering the cylin-
drical end of finger (9) with a flexible protection.
33. Remove the parts on the external face of the cover Lightly smear the exterior rim of the seal with
which might obstruct servicing operations. Loctite 542 or equivalent and slide it onto the
34. Take out the screws (11). Separate the bracket (10) protection. Remove the protection. Insert the seal
including the internal gear shift control mecha- into the cover using a suitable fixture.
nism, from the cover. If necessary, extract the 50. Place finger (9) in the Neutral position.
locating rings (25).
51. Slide ball (24) into the depression on the toggle
(34).
On the cover (7) 52. Check the Neutral position switch (20) before
35. Take off the Neutral position switch (20). Recover fitting, in the following manner:
seal (27) and ball (24). - Press manually on the button located at the end
36. If necessary, take off the temperature probe (4) of the switch.
and the unions screwed onto the return ports (1). - Release the button and check that the button
37. Extract and discard seal (17). returns freely to its initial position.
- Repeat the operation several times.
On the bracket (10) - The check must be carried out using a multim-
38. Take off circlip (22), washer (21) and remove spring eter.
(23). 53. Refit the switch complete with its seal and tighten
39. Remove washer (33) and toggle (34), marking its
position and profile. 54. Refit the parts removed from the cover at opera-
tion 33.
40. If necessary, take out screws (19). Take off the
gear selector grid (14) and extract the locating rings 55. Refit the gear control mechanism on the cover
(25). (see § G).
56. In the selector grid (14), move finger (9) from 1st to
4th gear using the control and check that the finger
moves freely into each of its positions.
Reassembly
On the bracket (10)
41. If removed, insert the locating rings (25). Refit the Final operation
gear selector grid (14) and tighten screws (19)
57. Take out the cover from the vice and fit it on the
previously lightly smeared with Loctite 242 or its
gearbox (see § C).
equivalent and tighten to a torque of 29 - 37 Nm.
42. Check that the flat on toggle (34) slides freely over
finger (9) flat.
43. Slide the pin and finger assembly (9) into bracket
(10).
44. Suitably turn toggle (34) and position it on the flat
of finger (9). Fit washer (33).
45. Refit spring (23) and washer (21). Fit the circlip
(22).
On the cover (7)

46. If the guide bush (18) needs to be replaced:
- lightly smear its rim with Loctite 648 or equiva-
lent;
- fit it up against the cover shoulder.
Check the presence of the locating rings (25).
47. Refit the bracket (10) and gear shift control
assembly.
48. Lightly smear the screw threads (11) with Loctite
242 or equivalent and tighten to a torque of
25 - 35 Nm.

F . Adjusting the Hare / Tortoise

range
On the cover (7) (Fig. 11)
58. Place piston (3) in thrust against the bottom of the
chamber (Hare position).
59. Position the arm of tool ref. MF462A, in the groove
of the piston and place it in contact with face F as
shown.
IMPORTANT: Carefully hold piston (3) in the Hare
position with the arm of the tool thrust against face
F before manually tightening thumbscrew V of the
cursor.
On the gearbox (Fig. 12)

60. Place the tool on the gearbox housing.
61. Manually hold the ring of the synchromesh against
the pinion of 3rd P (Hare position) (Fig. 6) and with
the fork pads thrust against the synchromesh ring
(on the side of the 3rd gear pinion).
62. Smear the screws of selector S with Loctite 221 or
equivalent and adjust them so that face F clears
the arm of the tool by a minimum of 0.2 mm. Fig. 11
Tighten the screws to 25 - 35 Nm without
changing the adjustment.
63. Refit the cover temporarily (see § C). Use a
compressed air supply sufficient to move piston (3)
into the Tortoise position.
64. Adjust and maintain the pressure to aproximately
3 bar. Through the opening located beneath the
gearbox, check the clearance between the Hare /
Tortoise fork and the synchromesh ring: max.
clearance 1 mm.
65. After checking the clearance, refit the cover
permanently (see § C).
Fig. 12

G . Fitting and adjusting the gear

cables
The cables are of different diameters depending on
their functions (Fig. 13, Fig. 14):
- Cable (1) to change tracks: Ø 6 mm
- Cable (3) to change gears: Ø 8 mm
Cables on cab side (Fig. 13)

Preparation
66. Screw the pivot balls (2) as tight as possible on the
cables (1) (3). Tighten nuts (4).
Assembly
67. Fit and tighten the cables previously prepared on
the gear lever.
68. Position the feed-through conduit on the cab floor.
2
2
4
4
1
3
Fig. 13
MA-05-05145A

Cables on selector cover side (Fig. 14)

Preparation
69. Screw the pivot balls (2) as tight as possible on the
cables (1) (3). Tighten nuts (4).
Assembly
70. Fit:
- the pivot ball (2) into the lower port of the L
selector;
- The pivot ball (2) onto the transmission mecha-
nism R.
71. Slide the end-point of the cable (3) onto the
support. Using nuts (5), restore if possible an iden-
tical thread length on each side of the bracket.
72. Repeat the previous operation on the cable (1).
73. Tighten nuts (5).
R
5
2
5
1
L
4 3
1
5
MA-05-06004B
Fig. 14

Checking the correct gear engagement

and the position of the gear shift lever in
the console opening. Cable adjustment
74. Start the tractor engine.
75. Temporarily remove the console boot.
76. Engage each gear ratio.
Check that the lever does not interfere with the
edge of the console (Fig. 15, Fig. 16) and that the
cables can move freely.
• When there is no interference with the operation
of the lever by the console, then the adjustment
is correct.
• If the lever interferes with the console, adjust the
cables on the selector cover side, as described
below.
Fig. 15
CAUTION: Adjustments must only take

place when the engine is stopped.
- If there is interference in 1st or 3rd gears
(Fig. 15), unscrew (if necessary) the cable
end-point (3) and tighten nuts (5) without
changing the adjustment (Fig. 14).
- If there is interference in 2st or 4rd gears
(Fig. 15), screw (if necessary) the cable
end-point (3) and tighten nuts (5) without
changing the adjustment (Fig. 14).
- If the lever is moved laterally as shown in
Fig. 16 and there is interference in the console
opening, adjust the cable end-point (1) and
tighten the nuts (5) (Fig. 14).
77. Refit the boot.
Maintenance Fig. 16
Two grease nipples ensure the selector L and trans-

mission mechanism R are properly lubricated (Fig. 14).

H . Service tool
• MF462A: Hare / Tortoise adjustment gauge (Fig. 17).
Fig. 17

GBA10 - Selector rails
5B15 - GBA10 - Selector rails
CONTENTS
A . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Servicing guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8


A . General
The gear selector rails are located to the right of the 2
gearbox and behind the control cover.
The gear selector mechanism comprises the following

selector rails for:
5
- 1st - 2nd gear
- Hare / Tortoise (Hi-Lo)
- 3rd - 4th gear
Each selector rail supports its own fork and respective

selector and moves longitudinally in end-bearings.
4
The front bearing fixed on the rear part of the input unit
is removable and serves as a support for the selector
rails.
The forks are adjustable, thus ensuring a functional

clearance between the pads and the synchromesh 3
sliding coupler.
Safety locking of the gearbox selector

mechanism (Fig. 1) 1
The system comprises two cylindrical locks of
different lengths.
- short locking pin: selector rail 1st - 2nd
- long locking pin: selector rail 3rd - 4th
Their ends are spherical and one of them has an MA-05-02018A
extended pin.
Each selector rail is machined so as to accommodate Fig. 1
and allow the locks to be moved.
Operating principle
Example: Ratio 1 engaged - Hare range
When the selector rail is moved to select 1st gear, it
forces its lock to move out of its lodging place and to
lock the range selector rail in the "Hare" position. At the
same time, this lock pushes another lock that in turn
locks the 3rd - 4th selector rail, thus prohibiting any
undue movement that might block the gearbox.
The same reasoning applies to the Tortoise range and
other gear ratios.

Parts list (Fig. 2)

(1) 3rd - 4th selector rail
(2) 1st - 2nd short locking pin
(3) Hare / Tortoise selector rail
(4) 1st - 2nd selector rail
(5) 3rd - 4th long locking pin
(6) Gearbox housing
(7) 1st – 2nd selector
(10) Locking stud
(11) Spring
(12) Plug
(13) Input unit housings
(15) 1st - 2nd Fork
(16) 3rd - 4th Fork
(17) Hare / Tortoise fork
(18) Long spacer
(19) Short spacer
(20) Screw
(21) Cotter pin
(22) Removable front support
(23) Rear support
(24) O’ring
Legend
S Hare / Tortoise selector

Overall view
23 6 S 7 13
22
C
F1
1
C
24
21 17
16 15
3 4 1 2
10 11 18
4
221
542
2 Y
20
19
3
12
5 1 2
1
Z
542
F F1
CC 3 4
MA-05-02019B
Fig. 2

Parts list (Fig. 3)

(1) 3rd - 4th selector rail
(2) 1st - 2nd short locking pin
(3) Hare / Tortoise selector rail
(4) 1st - 2nd selector rail
(5) 3rd - 4th long locking pin
(7) 1st - 2nd selector
(10) Locking stud
(11) Spring
(12) Plug
(15) 1st - 2nd Fork
(16) 3rd - 4th Fork
(17) Hare / Tortoise fork
(18) Long spacer
(19) Short spacer
(20) Screw
(21) Cotter pin
(22) Removable front support
(23) Rear support
(24) O’ring
Legend
C Selector cover

Exploded view
23 2 10 11 12 18
7
4
15
3
5
21
17
10 11 12 19
20
16
1
C 22
24
MA-05-02020B
Fig. 3

B . Servicing guide
axle (see chapter 2).
1
Disassembly
On tractors fitted with a creeper gearbox, the reducer
unit (1) (Fig. 4) located on the rear face of the gearbox
does not hinder disassembly - reassembly of the
selector mechanism.
3. Remove the screws (20) from the selector (7) and

forks (15) (16).
NOTA: To carry out operations on the 1st - 2nd fork
(15), use a short Allen key due to the limited space
between the fork and the housing.
4. Disassemble the index assemblies (10) (11) (12)
(18).
5. Push selector rail (4) towards the front and remove
lock (2). Proceed in the same way for selector rail
(1) and locking pin (5).
6. Take out selector rails (1) (4) through the rear of the
gearbox (Fig. 5).
7. Using a suitable pin punch, drive out pin (21) from
the Hare / Tortoise fork (17) (Fig. 3).
8. Take out selector rail (3) through the rear of the
housing (Fig. 5).
9. Remove the 3rd - 4th (16) and the Hare / Tortoise
MA-05-02021A
forks.
NOTE: The 1st - 2nd fork (15) cannot be removed Fig. 4
from the housing unless the mainshaft has previ-
ously been removed (see chapter 5).
1
MA-05-02022A
Fig. 5

Reassembly
defective parts.
11. Check for the presence of the O’ring (24) in the
front selector rail support (22) (Fig. 6). This O’ring
absorbs the vibrations generated by the 3rd-4th
gear synchroniser on the selector rail (1).
12. Refit the selector rails, forks and selectors in the
reverse order of disassembly. 24
IMPORTANT: The pin (21) must be replaced on the
Hare / Tortoise fork.
NOTE:
The short locking pin (2) locks the 1st - 2nd selector
rail. 22
The long locking pin (5) locks the 3rd - 4th selector
rail. MA-05-05149A
Fig. 6
The index assembly (10) (11) (12) (18) places the
1st -2nd selector rail.
The index assembly (10) (11) (12) (19) places the
3rd - 4th selector rail.
13. Adjust forks and selector (7) (see below).

Adjustment
Y
Principle 1 4 20
The positioning of forks (15) (16) and selector (7) is
obtained via the difference between the distance
between the centre of threaded holes Y and marks Z
on the selector rails (1) (4) (Fig. 7).
A different forward or rearward movement of the forks
is obtained by acting on the screws (20) as required.
The adjustment of forks is carried out with the gear
engaged.
14. Lightly smear the indexing assembly plug threads

(10) (11) (12) (18) with Loctite 542 or equivalent.
Screw the plugs onto the gearbox housing. 7 15 16
Z
15. Lock fork (15) in 1st gear. MA-05-02023A
Manually maintain the synchromesh sliding Fig. 7
coupler against the 1st gear pinion.
Check that the rear pads of the fork are not in
contact with the synchromesh sliding coupler. For
this, move the selector rail without moving the Final operations
sliding coupler itself. If the pads touch the sliding
coupler, adjust the fork by moving the screws (20), 20. Refit the selector cover (see chapter 5).
the thread of each being lightly smeared with Set the gear lever to neutral position. Ensure that
Loctite 221 or equivalent. the nuts (2) (5) are free in the rear bearing in the
Tighten the screws to 25 - 35 Nm without Hare / Tortoise range.
changing the adjustment. 21. Assemble the tractor between the gearbox and the
16. Lock fork (15) in 2nd gear. rear axle (see chapter 2).
Manually maintain the synchromesh sliding 22. Carry out a road test to check:
coupler against the 2nd gear pinion. - gear shifting (all gears);
Check that the front pads of the fork are not in - correct operation of the Hare / Tortoise range.
contact with the synchromesh sliding coupler by 23. Check for tightness:
proceeding as in operation 15. - of the gearbox / rear axle mating faces;
Tighten the screws to 25 - 35 Nm without - of the selector cover;
changing the adjustment. - of hydraulic unions.
17. Proceed in the same way to adjust the 3rd-4th fork
(16).
18. Adjust the selector (7) such that it aligns with the
3rd-4th fork built-in selector (16). For this, rotate
the screws (20), the thread of each one being
previously smeared with Loctite 221 or equivalent.
Tighten the screws to 25 - 35 Nm without
changing the adjustment.
19. Adjust the S Hare / Tortoise selector (see
chapter 5).

GBA10 - Output shaft
5B16 - GBA10 - Output shaft
CONTENTS
A . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
C . Removing - refitting the selector rails and forks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
D . Removing - refitting and shimming the shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
E . Final operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12


A . General
The output shaft fitted to GBA10 gearboxes with
PowerShuttle, transmits the drive supplied by the
different gears to the drive pinion, via a coupling sleeve
or a coupler (option with the creeper unit).
It is fitted on the lower transmission line at the rear of

the gearbox.
The output shaft is supported by two taper roller bear-

ings; the first is centred in the bore of the mainshaft
and the second in the rear bearing.
The shaft supports:

- the 3rd Hare pinion (35) fitted on two taper roller
bearings and comprising bearing cups and cones (33)
(34) and (36) (37);
- the Hare / Tortoise double cone synchromesh
assembly (69);
- the Tortoise pinion (40) which is free mounted on the
shaft (47).
A seal ring (28) fitted on washer (31) maintains lubri-

cating pressure in the channel. The calibrated port in
washer (31) allows for decompression in the cavity
located behind the bearing cone (23). A channel drilled
in the hub lubricates the double cone of the
syncromesh (69).
The pre-loading of bearings (22) (23), (33) (34), (36) (37)

and (43) (44) is carried out by means of shim(s) (45)
placed behind the bearing cup (44).
Identification of double cone synchromesh

components (69)
See General and operation, chapter 5.

Parts list (Fig. 1)

(22) Bearing cup
(23) Bearing cone
(28) Seal ring
(31) Special washer
(33) Bearing cone
(34) Bearing cup
(35) 3rd driving pinion (Hare)
(36) Bearing cup
(37) Bearing cone
(41) Locating pin
(43) Bearing cone
(44) Bearing cup
(45) Shim(s)
(46) Rear bearing
(47) Shaft
(48) Screw
Legend
A, B, C Details
G Syncromesh flange
P Lubricating channel
R Groove

Overall view
48 46 41 40 35 36 37 34 33
G 3
69
22
47
43 C
23
45
B
A C
44
A
B
31 28
P
35
MA-05-02024A
R
Fig. 1

Parts list (Fig. 2)

(22) Bearing cup
(23) Bearing cone
(28) Seal ring
(31) Special washer
(33) Bearing cone
(34) Bearing cup
(35) 3rd driving pinion (Hare)
(36) Bearing cup
(37) Bearing cone
(41) Locating pin
(43) Bearing cone
(44) Bearing cup
(45) Shim(s)
(46) Rear bearing
(47) Shaft
(48) Screw
(70) Synchromesh ring (option with creeper unit)
Legend
F Rear bearing (option with creeper unit)

Exploded view
F
46
41
45
48 44
43
70
47
40
37
69
36
35
34
33
31
28
23
22
3
MA-05-02025A
Fig. 2

B . Preliminary operations D . Removing - refitting and shim-

ming the shaft
axle (see chapter 2). Disassembly
If the tractor is fitted with the creeper unit option,
remove the reduction unit (see chapter 5).
6. Remove the rear bearing (46). Hold the gear train in

C . Removing - refitting the selector place through the opening in the plate located at
the rear underside of the gearbox. Pull on the shaft
rails and forks and remove it.
7. Through the selector cover opening, remove the
Disassembly synchromesh assembly (69), the 3rd Hare pinion
3. Remove the gearbox selector rails and forks (see (35) with the bearing cones (33) (37), special
chapter 5). washer (31), bearing cone (23) and Tortoise pinion
(40).
Reassembly
Reassembly (Fig. 3)
defective parts. 8. Clean and check all components. Replace any
5. Refit the selector rails and the forks (see chapter defective parts.
5). 9. Check that the channels in shaft (47) and the
decompression port of washer (31) are not
blocked.
10. If necessary, insert:
- bearing cup (22) in the mainshaft;
- bearing cups (34) (36) in pinion (35);
- bearing cone (43) on shaft (47)
11. Fit seal ring (28) in the throat of special washer
(31).
12. Smear the special washer and the bearing cone
(23) with miscible grease. Place cone (23) and
washer (31), the seal turned towards the front in
the bore of the mainshaft (7).
Pre-assembly (detail E)
13. Insert shaft (47) without its pinion in the previously
mentioned washer and cone.
14. Mark a line of paint T on the feed through, the
synchromesh (27) and shaft (47) corresponding to
the flat on washer (31) and that on shaft (47).
15. Remove the shaft while holding in place washer
(31) and cone (23) without turning shaft (7) (Fig. 3).

47
31 23
27
A B C
47 43 37 36 35 34 33 7
31 31
A B C
A-A
R 22 28
28
23
Fig. 3
MA-05-05150A

Assembly
16. In the housing, introduce:
40
- the Tortoise pinion (40);
- pinion (35), with mark R turned to face the
synchromesh (69) (Fig. 1 and Fig. 4) and with
bearing cones (33) (37) moderately smeared with
miscible grease.
17. Fit syncromesh flanges G (Fig. 1) on the Hare /
Tortoise pinions.
18. Lightly smear the cones and synchromesh bushes
19. Fit the synchromesh, the drilled hole P or the paint
mark turned towards the Tortoise pinion (40)
(Fig. 5). P
20. Position and centre the Tortoise pinion by holding
it via the opening in the plate located below and at
the rear of the gearbox or by using two bolts V as
shown in Fig. 3.
21. If necessary, with the help of an operator, engage
the shaft with bearing cone (43) in the pinion
assembly by aligning the paint marks T previously
made on the shaft, synchromesh and feed-through
of the gearbox (Detail E Fig. 3 and Fig. 6).
MA-05-05152A Fig. 5
69 35
MA-05-05151A
T
Fig. 4 MA-05-02029A Fig. 6

Preparing for shimming

22. Determine the thickness of the shim(s) in order to
obtain a provisional pre-loading clearance of 45
approximately 0.10 to 0.15 mm (see later). Place
bearing cup (44) in the bearing using the previously
determined shims (45) and placing the thickest
shim on the bearing cup side. Place the bearing
with the locating pin (41) on the gearbox housing.
Tighten the screws (48) to:
- 57 - 67 Nm (no creeper units Fig. 8)
- 40 - 48 Nm (with creeper units Fig. 9)
23. Proceed with the shimming operation. P = 0,01/0,05 mm
Shimming
MA-05-02030B
24. Put the dial gauge feeler pin against the end of Fig. 7
shaft (47) (Fig. 8 - Fig. 9).
25. Because the shaft is short, push it hard using of a
suitably adapted protected vice jaw, and turn to the
left and right in order to seat the bearing cones in 48
their cups.
26. Set the dial gauge to zero.
28. Depending on the clearance shown, select the
thickness of shim(s) (45) required to obtain a
pre-loading of:
P = 0.01 to 0.05 mm (Fig. 7)
29. Remove the screws (48) and the bearing (46)
(Fig. 8 - Fig. 9).
30. Take off bearing cup (44) and fit the definitive
shims (45) selected during operation 28.
IMPORTANT: Ensure that the thicker shim is always 46
placed against the bearing cup. 47
31. Refit the cup. Refit the bearing block. Tighten the MA-05-05010A
screws (48) to: Fig. 8

- 57 - 67 Nm (no creeper units Fig. 8)
- 40 - 48 Nm (with creeper units Fig. 9)
32. Manually check the rotation of the shaft and its
gear train.
Fig. 9

33. Refit the selector rails and the adjust the forks (see
chapter 5).
34. Adjust the Hare / Tortoise selector and refit the
selector cover (see chapter 5).
36. Check the oil tightness of the mating faces and
hydraulic unions.
37. Carry out a road test of all controls.

GBA10 - Mainshaft
5B17 - GBA10 - Mainshaft
CONTENTS
A . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
C . Disassembling - reassembling the shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
D . Final operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
E . Shimming the shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
F . Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

GBA10 - Mainshaft

GBA10 - Mainshaft
A . General
The mainshaft (7) fitted to GBA10 gearboxes with a
PowerShuttle rotates on two taper roller bearings (9)
(10) and (20) (21) lying in the two lower bearing blocks
of the main gearbox. The drive pinion (1), fitted at the
front, is integral with the shaft via splines. It is held by 22
washer (2) and nut (3).
Between the two lower bearing blocks, the shaft holds
the 2nd (13) and 1st (19) driving pinions that run free,
as well as the 1st-2nd gear synchromesh assembly,
the hub of which is splined to the shaft. At the rear the
shaft holds the 4th gear driving pinion (24) that runs
free and the 3rd-4th gear synchromesh assembly.
MA-05-05153A
The synchromesh gears are all double cone types.
The rear bore receives bearing cup (22) of the output
shaft taper roller bearing (Fig. 1). Fig. 1
The lubrication of the 1st gear pinion and 2nd gear ring
is ensured by a central channel with radial ports.
The pre-loading of bearings is adjusted by means of
shim(s) (11) placed behind bearing cup (10).

GBA10 - Mainshaft
Parts list (Fig. 2)

(1) Drive pinion
(2) Tab washer
(3) Nut
(5) Snap ring
(6) Spring
(7) Mainshaft
(8) Ring
(9) Bearing cone
(10) Bearing cup
(11) Shim(s)
(12) Laminated shim
(13) 2nd driving pinion
(14) 2nd synchromesh cone
(16) 1st - 2nd gear synchromesh
(18) 1st synchromesh cone
(19) 1st driving pinion
(20) Bearing cone
(21) Bearing cup
(22) Bearing cup
(24) 4th driving pinion
(25) 4th synchromesh cone
(27) 3rd - 4th gear synchromesh
(29) Snap ring
(32) 3rd synchromesh cone

GBA10 - Mainshaft
Overall view
11
12 10
21 20 19 13 8 7 1
4 1 2
2
22
270
29
32 27 25 24 18 16 14
MA-05-02033B
Fig. 2

GBA10 - Mainshaft
Parts list (Fig. 3)

(1) Drive pinion
(2) Tab washer
(3) Nut
(5) Snap ring
(6) Spring
(7) Mainshaft
(8) Ring
(9) Bearing cone
(10) Bearing cup
(11) Shim(s)
(12) Laminated shim
(13) 2nd driving pinion
(14) 2nd synchromesh cone
(16) 1st - 2nd gear synchromesh
(18) 1st synchromesh cone
(19) 1st driving pinion
(20) Bearing cone
(21) Bearing cup
(24) 4th driving pinion
(25) 4th synchromesh cone
(27) 3rd - 4th gear synchromesh
(29) Snap ring
(32) 3rd synchromesh cone

GBA10 - Mainshaft
Exploded view
29
27 24
6
5
4
20
32 18 21
1
19
16
2
13
14
25
12
11
10
9
1
MA-05-02034A 2
3
Fig. 3

GBA10 - Mainshaft
complete assembly and mark the position of the

B . Preliminary operations 1st-2nd gear synchronisation parts.
17. Take out bearing cups (10) (21).
To take out the mainshaft, it is necessary to remove
the gearbox. NOTA: Carefully match the cups and cones if they
are to be re-used.
18. Take off:
axle (see chapter 2). - shims (11);
2. Separate the gearbox from the engine (see chapter - the laminated shim (12).
2). 19. If necessary:
3. Remove the selector cover (see chapter 5). - extract bearing cones (9) (20) and bearing cup
4. Place the gearbox on a suitable fixture. (22);
5. Remove the input unit (see chapter 5). - Remove snap ring (5).
6. Remove the selector rails and the forks (see
chapter 5).
7. Remove the output shaft and its pinions (see Reassembly
chapter 5).
defective parts.
21. Ensure that the central and radial lubricating chan-
nels of shaft (7) are not blocked.
22. If removed, using a press and a suitable fixture,
C . Disassembling - reassembling insert the bearing cones (9) (20) on ring (8) and
the shaft shaft (7). On the latter, also position snap ring (5)
and insert cup (22).
Disassembly 23. Lubricate the bearing cups and cones.
8. Remove the circlip (56) (Fig. 4) from the machined 24. Fit the bearing cup (21).
groove of the layshaft (51). Push back the pinion 25. Check for wear on synchromesh parts of 1st-2nd
(57). gear (see chapter 5).
9. Remove snap ring (29). 26. Outside the housing, assemble the 2nd gear pinion
Remove (Fig. 2): (13), new synchromesh parts and 1st-2nd gear
- the 3rd-4th gear synchromesh (27), carefully synchromesh.
marking its position. If the synchromesh is to be NOTA: Any reused synchronisation parts must be
reused, mark the synchronisation parts (rings, refitted at the position marked during disassembly.
cones and bushes) and remove them; 27. Between the two compartments, refit the
- the 4th gear driving pinion (24). complete assembly comprising the correctly posi-
10. Immobilise the shaft with a locally made tool using tioned fork (Fig. 7), the 2nd gear driving pinion (13)
a 4 WD clutch plate, ref. 3617232M1 (Fig. 5 and and the 1st - 2nd gear synchromesh.
§ F). 28. Slide the shaft and 1st gear pinion (19) through the
11. If necessary, remove lubricating pipe (4) and spring rear of the housing (Fig. 6). Simultaneously hold
(6). the complete assembly.
12. Completely unscrew nut (3) (60 mm flat) using 29. Shim the shaft (see § E).
socket, ref. 3378009M1 (see § F). 30. Fit pinion (1).
13. Remove tab washer (2) and the input pinion (1).
14. Take out ring (8) complete with bearing cone (9).
15. Remove the tool.
Take the shaft out of the housing complete with
the 1st gear driving pinion (19) backwards via the
bearing block opening (Fig. 6).
Simultaneously hold the complete assembly
comprising the fork, the 2nd gear driven pinion (13)
and the 1st - 2nd gear synchromesh.
16. Remove the complete assembly through the
selector cover opening (Fig. 7).
If necessary, separate the different parts of the

GBA10 - Mainshaft
57
56 51
19
MA-05-02035A
MA-05-02037A
Fig. 4 Fig. 6
3617232M1
MA-05-02036B
MA-05-02038A
Fig. 5 Fig. 7

GBA10 - Mainshaft
31. Degrease the threaded end of the shaft using

solvent.
Hold the shaft as in operation 10. Clean and lightly
smear the tapped hole of the new nut (3) with
Loctite 270 or equivalent (Fig. 8) then tighten to a
torque of 130 - 170 Nm with the socket used previ- 3
ously.
33. Lock the nut by bending its collar, without breaking 270
it, into the grooves of the shaft using a suitable pin
punch. Manually check the rotation of the shaft.
34. If removed, fit spring (6) and lubricating pipe (4) in
shaft (7).
35. Check for wear on synchromesh parts of 3rd-4th
gear (see chapter 5).
MA-05-02039B
36. Refit the synchronisation parts (new or reusable).
NOTA: Any reused synchronisation parts must be Fig. 8
refitted at the position marked during removal.
Position the driving pinion of 4th gear (24) and the
3rd - 4th gear synchromesh (27) on the shaft (7).
37. Move pinion (57) forward on the layshaft (51). Fit
D . Final operations
circlip (56) in its throat without bending it, and 40. Refit the output shaft (see chapter 5).
ensure that it is correctly positioned (Fig. 4).
41. Refit the input unit (see chapter 5).
42. Reassemble the selector rails.
39. Manually check:
Adjust (see chapter 5):
- the axial clearance of the pinions;
- the 1st-2nd and 3rd-4th gear forks;
- the rotation of the shaft and its pinions.
- the 1st - 2nd and Hare / Tortoise selectors.
43. Refit the selector cover.
Check that:
- gears change correctly ;
- the Hare / Tortoise mechanism functions
correctly.
44. Couple the gearbox and the engine (see chapter 2).
hydraulic unions.
47. Carry out a road test of the PowerShuttle, gears,
Hare / Tortoise range and A, B, C and D ratios of
the Dynashift.

GBA10 - Mainshaft
E . Shimming the shaft

Preparing for shimming
48. Determine the thickness of the shim(s) in order to
obtain a provisional pre-loading clearance of
approximately 0.10 to 0.15 mm (see later).
49. Refit the laminated shim (12), the previously deter-
mined shims (11) and the bearing cup (10) (Fig. 10). 7
IMPORTANT: The laminated shim (12) must be
placed against the gearbox housing in order to
avoid damaging the shims (11) when load is
applied to the mainshaft.
50. Slide ring (8) fitted with cone (9) and pinion (1) onto
shaft (7).
51. Fit washer (2) and nut (3).
MA-05-02040A
Place the locking tool on the shaft (Fig. 5), tighten Fig. 9
the nut to a torque of 130 - 170 Nm and remove
the tool.
10
Shimming
52. Put a dial gauge feeler pin against the end of shaft 11
(7) (Fig. 9).
53. From the front of the housing, pull hard on the
shaft, turning alternately from left to right to
correctly seat the cones in their bearing cups. 12
54. Set the dial gauge to zero.
55. Repeat the operation 53, this time pushing.
56. Depending on the dial gauge clearance reading, P = 0,10/0,20 mm
select a definitive shim (11) thickness to achieve
preload (Fig. 10): P = 0.10 to 0.20 mm
NOTA: Preferably shim to the maximum tolerance.
57. Place the locking tool on the shaft, loosen nut (3)
and take off the pinion (1).
58. Take off ring (8) complete with bearing cone (9)
from shaft (7). Remove bearing cup (10) from the
housing.
59. Place shims (11) selected during operation 56
between laminated shim (12) and bearing cup (10)
(Fig. 10).
60. Slide the ring (8) and cone (9) assembly onto shaft
(7).
61. Proceed with the reassembly phase. Carry out
operations 30 to 39.
MA-05-05155A
Fig. 10

GBA10 - Mainshaft
F . Service tools
• 3378009M1: Socket for nut - Mainshaft (Fig. 11)
Locally made tool

• Locking tool - Mainshaft (Fig. 12)
a 4 WD clutch plate ref. 3617232M1 to be
ordered from your spare parts supplier.
b Flat iron: 40
c: M12 bolts
MA-05-02042A
Fig. 11
MA-05-02043A
Fig. 12

GBA20 - Layshaft
5B18 - GBA20 - Layshaft
CONTENTS
A . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
C . Removing and disassembling the layshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
D . Reassembling and refitting the layshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
E . Final operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
F . Shimming the pinions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
G . Shimming the bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
H . Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

GBA20 - Layshaft

GBA20 - Layshaft
A . General
The layshaft and its pinions form the upper transmis-
sion line of the GBA10 gearbox with PowerShuttle.
Shaft (51) bears, in this order, the driven pinions of 2nd
gear (64), 1st gear (61), 4th gear (59) and 3rd gear (57).
These pinions are splined to the shaft and separated by
spacers (62) (60) and (58). Axial clearance of the gear
train is provided by one or more shims (63). The rear
teeth of the layshaft (51) continuously engage the
Tortoise pinion mounted on the output shaft. The front
of the shaft is supported by a roller bearing fitted to the
rear of the input unit. Its rear end is supported by two
taper roller bearings (49) (50) and (54) (55).
The adjustment of these bearings is of the "Semi Set
Right" type. It is carried out by placing a shim (53)
between the bearing cones (50) (54) in order to obtain
a clearance of a predetermined value between the
cups (49) (55) (see § G).
Shim (53) has several radial ports allowing for lubrica-
tion of bearings (49) (50) and (54) (55).
The friction ring (76) is smeared with Loctite and fitted
into the rear layshaft bore (Fig. 1). It is in contact with
a sleeve in front of the hydraulic pump drive pinion (see
chapter 9).

GBA20 - Layshaft
Parts list (Fig. 1)

(49) Bearing cup
(50) Bearing cone
(51) Layshaft
(52) Nut
(53) Shim
(54) Bearing cone
(55) Bearing cup
(56) Circlip
(58) Spacer
(60) Spacer
(62) Spacer
(63) Shim(s)
(65) Washer
(66) Snap ring
(67) Needle bearing
Legend
B, F Details

GBA20 - Layshaft
Overall view
76 52 51 57 59 61 63 64
3 4 1 2
56 58 60 62 65 66 67
50 54
49 55 B
53
52
76
MA-05-05160A
Fig. 1

GBA20 - Layshaft
Parts list (Fig. 2)

(49) Bearing cup
(50) Bearing cone
(51) Layshaft
(52) Nut
(53) Shim
(54) Bearing cone
(55) Bearing cup
(56) Circlip
(58) Spacer
(60) Spacer
(62) Spacer
(63) Shim(s)
(65) Washer
(66) Snap ring
(67) Needle bearing

GBA20 - Layshaft
Exploded view
52
50
49
53
55
54
51 76
67
56 2
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
MA-05-05161A
Fig. 2

GBA20 - Layshaft
IMPORTANT: To take out the layshaft it is necessary to
remove the gearbox.

2. Separate the gearbox from the engine (see
chapter 2).
4. Place the gearbox on a suitable fixture.
5. Remove the input unit (see chapter 5).
6. Remove the selector rails and the forks (see
chapter 5).
7. Where necessary, immobilise the gear train in the
gearbox. Unlock and slightly loosen nut (52) using Fig. 3
an appropriate chisel in order to overcome the
resistance of the Loctite.
NOTE: This operation facilitates the removal of the
nut with the service tool once the output shaft and
mainshaft have been disassembled.
8. Remove the output shaft (see chapter 5).
9. Remove the mainshaft (see chapter 5).

GBA20 - Layshaft
C . Removing and disassembling the

layshaft
Removal
10. Completely unscrew the nut (52) using socket
MF391 (see § H). Discard the nut.
Remove the cone bearing (50).
IMPORTANT: Pair up the cones and bearing cups in
case of reuse.
11. Take out the shaft (51) and pinion assembly
(Fig. 3).
12. Remove the shim (53) and take off the cone (54).
13. If necessary, drive off the cups (49) (55) (Fig. 5).
65 67
Disassembly
14. On shaft (51) remove the snap ring (66) and
washer (65) and mark the locations. Take off the
66
2nd gear pinion (64), shim(s) (63), spacer (62), 1st
gear pinion (61), spacer (60), 4th gear pinion (59), 64
spacer (58), 3rd gear pinion (57) and circlip (56)
(Fig. 4).
62 63
15. If necessary, drive off needle bearing (67) (Fig. 4).
60
61
58 59
57
51 56
MA-05-05162A
Fig. 4

GBA20 - Layshaft
D . Reassembling and refitting the

layshaft
Reassembly
49
defective parts. 55
17. On the shaft, check that the lubricating ports
leading to the bearing cones (50) (54) are not
blocked.
18. If disassembled, insert the needle bearing (67) to
thrust against the shoulder of shaft (51) with the
aid of a suitable fixture.
IMPORTANT: Check that the needle bearings turn
freely in the cage after insertion.
19. Fit a new circlip (56).
Replace the 3rd gear pinion (57), spacer (58), 4th MA-05-00504B Fig. 5
gear pinion (59), spacer (60), 1st gear pinion (61)
and spacer (62).
Replace 2nd gear pinion (64) without the shims
(63).
20. Shim the pinions (see § F).
Refitting
21. If necessary, shim the bearings (54) (55) and (49)
(50) (see § G).
22. Lubricate the cones (50) (54) and the bearing cups
(49) (55).
23. If they have been removed, fit the cups (49) (55)
home against the housing shoulder (Fig. 5).
24. Slide cone (54) onto shaft with shim (53) (thickness
determined at operation 46).
25. Place the assembled shaft in the housing. Fit cone
(50). Pre-tighten a new nut (52) to the cone (50).
IMPORTANT The nut (52) will be definitively tight-
ened to torque once the input unit has been
refitted, in order to obtain the correct alignment of
the layshaft in the two bearings.

GBA20 - Layshaft
E . Final operations 270 52
26. Refit (see chapter 5):

- mainshaft;
- output shaft;
- the input unit.
27. Tighten the nut (52) in the following manner:
- Pre-tighten the nut to a torque of 50 Nm.
- Rotate the layshaft several times to progres-
sively seat the bearings.
- Unscrew the nut. Lightly smear the sensor
thread with Loctite 270 or equivalent. Tighten
the nut to a final torque of 100 - 150 Nm. Lock
the nut by bending its collar, without breaking it,
into the grooves R of the shaft (Fig. 6) using a R 76
suitable pin punch.
28. Refit and adjust the gear selector mechanism (see
chapter 5).
29. Refit the selector cover (see chapter 5).
30. Check that the gears change correctly and that the
Hare / Tortoise position functions.
31. Couple the gearbox and the engine (see chapter 2).
hydraulic unions.
34. Carry out a road test of the A, B, C and D ratios of
the Dynashift, of the PowerShuttle, gears and Hare 76
/ Tortoise range.
MA-05-05164A
Fig. 6

GBA20 - Layshaft
F . Shimming the pinions

IMPORTANT: The pinions must be stacked with the
shims (63) temporarily removed.
Shimming (Fig. 7)
35. Using a set of laminated shims, measure the
distance between the 2nd gear pinion (64) and
spacer (62).
36. Depending on the measurement, determine the
required thickness of shim(s) (63) in order to obtain 2 66
a clearance of:
J = 0.02 to 0.31 mm.
NOTE: If possible, shim towards the nominal toler-
ance.
37. Remove snap ring (66) and washer (65). Remove
the 2nd gear pinion.
38. Slide the previously selected shim(s) onto the
shaft. Refit the pinion and washer (65), turning the
chamfer to the exterior. Fit a new snap ring (66)
and check that it is correctly positioned.
65
39. Refit the shaft assembled with its pinions into the
gearbox housing (see § D). Carry out the remaining
63
operations (see § E).
64
J= 0,02/0,31 mm
62
MA-05-05165A
Fig. 7

GBA20 - Layshaft
G . Shimming the bearings

IMPORTANT: Bearings must be shimmed before refit- 50 53 54
ting the layshaft. If the removed bearings are reusable,
extract the cups (49) (55) from the gearbox housing
and pair them with their respective cones.
Principle (Fig. 8)
The shimming principle consists in defining the thick-
ness of the shim (53) to be fitted between the bearing
cones (50) (54) under load (500 N) in order to obtain a
distance X of 8.60 to 8.68 mm between cups (49) (55)
49 55
mounted free (outside housing).
MA-05-00507B
Fig. 8

GBA20 - Layshaft
Preparing for shimming (Fig. 9)

40. Fit bearing cones (50) (54) and cups (49) (55)
without shim (53) on service tool,
ref. 3378263M11 (see § H). Tighten the tool in a
vertical position in a vice.
41. Compress the spring until the shoulder of the
special screw is in contact with the top of the tool.
NOTE: The spring characteristics and the length of
the screw shoulder provide the correct load to
apply to the bearings.
42. Turn the tool cylinder C several times, in order to
correctly seat the cones in the bearing cups.
Shimming (Fig. 9)
Measure the distance between the bearing
cones (50) (54)
43. Position the pressure plate of the tool on the face
of the bearing cone (54).
Place the dial gauge feeler pin on the end of the
pressure plate.
44. On the dial gauge:
- set the long pointer to zero;
- note the position of the short pointer.
45. Turn the pressure plate half a turn while main-
taining it on the face of the cone (50).
Immobilise the rod by moderately tightening the
stop screw manually.
46. Depending on the measurement noted on the dial
gauge, select the corresponding shim (53) to be
definitively fitted between the bearing cones (50)
(54).
47. Carry out the remaining operations (see § D and E).
Fig. 9

GBA20 - Layshaft
H . Service tools
Tools available in AGCO network
• MF391: Socket for layshaft nut (Fig. 10)
• 3378263M11: Bearing shimming tool (Fig. 11)
Fig. 10
Fig. 11

GBA20 - Layshaft

GBA10 - Creeper unit
5B19 - GBA10 - Creeper unit
CONTENTS
A . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
C . Removing - refitting the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
D . Disassembling - reassembling and adjusting the selector mechanism (GPA40). . 14
E . Disassembling - reassembling and adjusting the selector mechanism (GPA30). . 18
F . Disassembling - reassembling the epicyclical gear reducer unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
G . Adjusting the control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23


A . General
The creeper unit is made up by two parts:
- a gear reducer unit
- a cable control
Gear reducer unit

The creeper reducer unit (24), optionally fitted to
GBA10 gearboxes, consists of a simple kinematics
epicyclic gear train including a planet gear and ring gear
assembly, housed at the rear of the gearbox (Fig. 1).
Control Fig. 1
The link fitted to the front right-hand side of the inter-
mediate housing operates the control fork of the gear
reducer unit via a cable linked to a lever located in the
tractor cab.
IMPORTANT: The coupler can only be activated when
the tractor is stopped.

B . Operation
The coupler (29) is secured by splines to the drive
pinion (9) (Fig. 2, Fig. 3). When the control lever is
moved to the Snail position the coupler is moved back-
wards and locked to the planet carrier (20) via coupler
ring (22) (Fig. 2, Fig. 3).
The rotational speed of the drive pinion is one quarter

of that of the output shaft of the gearbox.
In normal gears, the coupler is moved forward to link

the gearbox output shaft to the drive pinion, thus
ensuring direct drive.
Lubrication
The epicyclic hub is lubricated by the splashing caused
by its moving parts.

GPA40
Fig. 2
GPA30
20
22 9
29
Fig. 3
MA-05-05156A

Parts list (Fig. 4)

(1) Snap ring
(2) Ring
(9) Drive pinion
(11) Snap ring
(12) Friction washers
(13) Pins
(14) Friction plates
(15) Planet gears
(16) Ring gear
(17) Spacers
(19) Shim(s)
(20) Planet carrier
(21) Snap ring
(22) Coupler ring
(23) Screw
(24) Planet carrier assembly (gear reducer unit)
(26) Special nut
(27) Fork
(28) Selector rail
(29) Coupler
(35) Locking stud
(36) Spring
(37) Plug
(38) Cotter pin
(39) Finger
(40) O’ring
(41) Pin
(42) Swivel arm
(43) Screw
(44) Unit
(45) Centre housing
(46) Splined bearing support
(47) Output shaft
(48) Screw
(49) Control cable support
(50) Dynashift gearbox cover
Legend
A Direct drive
C Creeper gear position (Snail)

GPA40 overall view
Fig. 4

Parts list (Fig. 5)

(1) Nut
(2) Ring
(9) Drive pinion
(11) Snap ring
(13) Pins
(15) Planet gears
(16) Ring gear
(17) Spacers
(19) Shim(s)
(20) Planet carrier
(21) Snap ring
(22) Coupler ring
(23) Screw
(24) Planet carrier assembly (gear reducer unit)
(26) Special nut
(27) Fork
(28) Selector rail
(29) Coupler
(35) Locking stud
(36) Spring
(37) Plug
(38) Cotter pin
(39) Finger
(40) O’ring
(41) Pin
(42) Swivel arm
(43) Screw
(44) Unit
(45) Intermediate housing
(47) Output shaft
(48) Screw
Legend
A Direct drive
C Creeper gear position (Snail)

GPA30 overall view
11 12 13 14 18 15 17 12 16 14 44 20 21 22
19
23
29
A 9
C
F
38 19 45 27
B
37
36
35 39 41 40
19 B
F
47 46 48 24 23 2 26 28 27 43 42
MA-05-05157A
Fig. 5

Parts list (Fig. 6)

(2) Ring
(11) Snap ring
(13) Pins
(15) Planet gears
(16) Ring gear
(17) Spacers
(19) Shim(s)
(20) Planet carrier
(21) Snap ring
(22) Coupler ring
(23) Screw
(26) Special nut
(27) Fork
(28) Selector rail
(29) Coupler
(35) Locking stud
(36) Spring
(37) Plug
(38) Cotter pin
(39) Finger
(40) O’ring
(41) Pin
(42) Swivel arm
(43) Screw
(44) Unit
(47) Output shaft
(48) Screw

Exploded view
Fig. 6


C . Removing - refitting the unit

Preliminary operation
Removal
2. Take off ring (2) and screws (23) fitted respectively
to the output shaft (47) and the unit (44).
3. Remove the gear reducer unit (24).
Note : On gearboxes fitted with a creeper gearbox,
bearing (46) is different from that fitted to the
standard version. Machined splines on its rim hold
it meshed to the ring gear (16).
Refitting
4. Carry out a visual inspection of all components.
5. Lightly smear the gear reducer faces with miscible
grease. Attach a friction washer (12) onto each
gear reducer face, inserting the tabs into the appro-
priate grooves.
6. Reassemble the gear reducer unit on the output
shaft, directing the cut out part of the unit (44)
downwards.
7. Check the correct positioning of the components
and tighten screws (23) smeared with Loctite 221
Manually check for the rotation of the gearbox
output shaft.
Final operation

21. Correctly position the coupler and slide it onto the

D . Disassembling - reassembling drive pinion splines.
and adjusting the selector mecha- 22. Refit the power take-off clutch and its support (see
nism (GPA40) chapter 7).
23. Assemble the fork and the selector rail fitted with
Preliminary operations a new nut.
9. Disconnect the control cable fitted to link (42). 24. Adjust the fork (see later operations).
axle (see chapter 2). Final operations
Disassembly (Fig. 7) 26. Reconnect the control cable. Adjust if necessary
(see § G).
NOTA: To remove the coupler (29), it is necessary to
previously remove the PTO clutch and its support.
11. Remove the plug (37). Recover spring (36) and

locking stud (35).
12. Remove the selector rail (28)/nut (26) assembly. If
necessary, break the seal, unscrew and take off
nut (26).
13. Remove the power take-off clutch and its support
(see chapter 7).
14. Take out the fork and coupler assembly through
the front of the housing.
15. Remove the control link (42) located on the
right-hand side of the centre housing.
16. Drive out pin (38) and remove finger (39). Recover
the shim(s) (19) and remove pin (41) complete with
O'ring (40).
Reassembly (Fig. 7)
17. Lubricate a new O'ring (40) and place it on pin (41).
18. Reinsert the pin in its port via the external face of
the centre housing (45).
19. To limit the pin axial clearance, it is recommended
to adjust shimming with a tolerance of 0.1 to
0.6 mm.
Shimming
NOTA: The adjustment principle consists in
obtaining a minimum clearance between the
combined parts.
- On the pin, insert an approximate thickness of
shim(s) (19). Fit finger (39) and partially fit pin
(38). Reassemble the link (42) and screw (43).
- Manually evaluate the existing clearance.
- If the clearance is outside the maximum allowed
tolerance, determine a new thickness of shim(s).
20. After shimming, check for the correct position of
the finger (39) and the link (42).
Definitively fit the pin (38).
Lightly smear the thread of the Allen screw (43)
with Loctite 221 or equivalent. Tighten this screw.

Fig. 7

Adjustment (Fig. 8)
27. Fit the locking stud (35) and spring (36). Tighten the
plug (37).
28. Place the coupler (29) in the direct drive position
according to F1 (the locking mechanism
(35)(36)(37) in the front slot of selector rail (28)).
29. Hold the fork pads lightly in contact with the
coupler according to F4.
30. Block the special nut (29) to prevent it from turning
(see Fig. 8, detail A). Tighten or loosen the selector
rail (28) in the nut, to obtain a distance of 51.75 mm
between the front face of the coupler and that of
the centre housing (45).
IMPORTANT: During fork adjustment, the special
nut (26) must be held against face B of the centre
housing (45) according to F3.
31. Definitively tighten plug (37) to a torque of
50 - 70 Nm.
32. Check coupler (29) movement in each position
(creeper gears and direct drive), while holding the
special nut (26) against face B of the centre
housing according to F3.
NOTA: When the tractor is assembled between the

gearbox and centre housing, the selector rail (28) is
immobilised by the contact of the special nut (26) with
the F2 face of the gearbox (see Fig. 8, detail A).

26 A 28
F2
B
F3
B
51,75 mm
26 28 35 36 45
37
A
27 F4
1
C
F1
29
MA-05-000521B
Fig. 8


E . Disassembling - reassembling with Loctite 242 or equivalent. Moderately tighten
and adjusting the selector mecha- this screw.
nism (GPA30) 43. Correctly position the coupler (29). Slide it onto the
drive pinion splines.
Preliminary operations 44. Simultaneously refit:
33. Disconnect the control cable fitted to link (42). - The hydraulic pump drive pinion (1) onto the
bearing block (11) and
34. Split the tractor between the gearbox and the inter-
mediate housing (see chapter 2). - The coupler (29) onto the drive pinion.
Lightly smear the thread of the screws (4) with
Loctite 242 or equivalent. Tighten these screws on
the bearing block (11).
Disassembly (Fig. 9) Immobilise the drive pinion (1) using the same tool
35. Remove the plug (37). Recover spring (36) and as in operation 37.
locking stud (35). Tighten screws (4) to a torque of 72 - 96 Nm.
36. Remove the selector rail (28)/nut (26) assembly. If Refit:
necessary, unlock and loosen the selector rail nut. - spring (12);
Discard the nut. - the tab washer (3);
37. Take off: - circlip (2);
- circlip (2); 45. Refit:
- the tab washer (3); - the fork (27);
- spring (12). - the selector rail (28)/special nut (26) assembly.
Immobilise the hydraulic pump drive pinion (1) IMPORTANT: If the special nut (26) of the selector
using a locally adapted tool. rail (28) special had to be removed, use a new
Loosen the screws (4). special nut when refitting.
Extract the pinion (1) from the bearing block (11). Adjust the fork if necessary (see subsequent oper-
Simultaneously remove the pinion (1)/coupler (29) ations).
assembly to the front of the intermediate housing.
Remove the fork (27).
38. If necessary: Final operations
- Remove the control link (42) located on the
right-hand side of the intermediate housing;. 46. Assemble the tractor between the gearbox and the
intermediate housing (see chapter 2).
- drive out the pin (38);
47. Reconnect the control cable. Adjust if necessary
- remove the finger (39);
(see § G).
- Recover the shim(s) (19);
- remove the pin (41) with its O’ring (40).
Reassembly (Fig. 9)
defective parts.
40. If replacement of the control link (42), finger (39) or
pin (41) was necessary, refit these parts in reverse
order of operation 38.
41. Check the end clearance of the pin (41). This end
clearance should be of 0.1 to 0.6 mm If end clear-
ance does not fall within the tolerance values,
define a new shim (19) thickness.
NOTA: If possible, shim so as to obtain minimum
tolerance.
42. After shimming, check for the correct position of
the finger (39) and the control link (42).

3 12 1
11 4
2 29
3 12
27
2
37
36
35
26 28
38 45
39 41 19 40 43 42
MA-05-05158A
Fig. 9

Adjusting the creeper fork (Fig. 10)

48. If the creeper fork requires adjusting, proceed in
the following manner:
- Fit the locking stud (35) and spring (36). Partially
remove the plug (37).
- Place the coupler (29) and fork (27) in the direct
drive position according to F1 (the locking mech-
anism (35)(36)(37) in the front slot of the selector
rail (28)).
- Hold the fork pads lightly in contact with the
coupler according to F4.
- Block the special nut (26) to prevent it from
turning (detail A). Tighten or loosen the selector
rail (28) in the nut, to obtain a distance of
51.75 mm between the front face of the coupler
and that of the intermediate housing (45).
nut (26) must be held against face B of the inter-
mediate housing (45) according to F3.
- Definitively tighten plug (37) to a torque of
50 - 70 Nm.
- Check coupler (29) movement in each position
(creeper gears and direct drive), while holding
the special nut (26) against face B of the interme-
diate housing according to F3.
NOTA: When the tractor is assembled between
the gearbox and intermediate housing, the
selector rail (28) is immobilised in translation by
the contact of the special nut (26) with the F2
rear face of the gearbox (detail A).

45 51,75mm
29
27
37
36
F4
35
A
28
F2
F1
B
F3
26
26 A 28
MA-05-05159A
Fig. 10

Reassembly (Fig. 11)

F . Disassembling - reassembling
the epicyclical gear reducer unit 54. Check and clean the components. Replace any
defective parts.
Disassembly (Fig. 11) 55. Fit each planet gear with two rows of needles
smeared with miscible grease and separated by a
49. Remove the unit (see § C). spacer.
50. Remove snap ring (11). 56. Refit the planet gears and position the friction
51. Remove the friction washers (12). plates centrally (14).
52. Drive out pins (13). 57. Refit pins (13), correctly positioning them correctly
53. Remove the planet gears (15) from the planet to fit snap ring (11).
carrier (20), taking care not to loose the needles 58. Fit the snap ring. Manually check the axial clear-
(18), the spacers (17) and friction plates (14). ance and rotation of each planet gear.
NOTA The coupler ring (22) is inserted into the 59. Lightly smear the gear reducer faces with miscible
planet carrier using a press. Snap ring (21) provides grease. Attach a friction washer (12) onto each
additional locking of the combined parts. gear reducer face, inserting the tabs into the appro-
priate grooves.
60. Refit the unit (see § C).
Fig. 11

G . Adjusting the control

On lever A (Fig. 12)
61. Move control lever A to Snail position.
62. Screw the clevis (1) flush with the threaded end of
the cable (6).
63. Fit the clevis (1) on to lever "A" with clip (7). Tighten
nut (2).
64. Tighten nut (3) of sheath end (5).
support. Tighten nut (4) and check that the cable is
not constrained in any way.
Fig. 12

On link B (Fig. 13)

66. Place link B in the "Creeper" position (coupler (29)
locked by splines to planet carrier (20) (Fig. 2,
Fig. 3) with locked fork.
67. Screw clevis (9) flush with the threaded part of
cable (6).
68. Fit clevis (9) on link B using clip (10). Tighten nut
(11).
69. Adjust stop (12) using nut (13) on support (49)
while checking that link B is still correctly locked.
70. Tighten nut (14) and check that the cable is not
constrained in any way.
71. Check the correct operation and locking of the
control in the "Direct drive" position.
Fig. 13

5C10 - GBA25 - General - Operation
CONTENTS
A . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Construction and description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
C . Kinematics of the GBA25 gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
D . Synchronisers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
E . Main unit robotic control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
F . GBA25 - disassembly steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
G . GBA25 transmission spécifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Massey Ferguson 6400 - Issue 4.a 5C10.1

5C10.2 Massey Ferguson 6400 - Issue 4.a

A . General
The gearbox housing consists of the following main
components, in the following order (Fig. 1):
(1) the speed multiplier module to obtain ratios E and
F for shifting under load
(2) the Dynashift module with ratios A, B, C and D for
shifting under load
(3) the PowerShuttle
(4) the main gearbox comprising four robotically
controlled mechanical ratios
(5) the creeper or super creeper unit (if fitted).
Only the gearbox is described in this section. Each

major component shall be partially discussed in this
section as these components are individually and more
thoroughly described in their own respective sections.
1 2 3 4 5
Ar Av 3 4
Q M
O
1 2
MA-05-03049A
Fig. 1

Reduction gear module Creeper and super creeper unit

The reduction gear module is fitted at the gearbox A unit fitted on the secondary shaft, to the rear of the
input. It allows ratios E and F to be obtained by overin- gearbox, provides very slow travel speeds. This unit
creasing respectively ratios C and D of the Dynashift comprises one or two epicyclic drive units providing a
module. reduction of 4/1 (creeper speeds) or 14/1 (super
The speed multiplier comprises an epicyclic gear train, creeper speeds). These ratios are engaged mechani-
a brake and a multidisc clutch. cally.
The brake is controlled hydraulically by a proportional
solenoid valve with an ON/OFF control, and the multi- Lubrication
disc clutch is controlled mechanically by this brake.
Lubrication is ensured by the tractor hydraulic circuit.
The two ratios provided by this module are 1/1 and
Oil arrives at two points located on the right-hand side
1.423/1.
of the unit housing. Oil flows to the bearings and
clutches to be lubricated via internal channels in the
Dynashift module gearbox shafts.
This module allows four ratios (A, B, C and D) to be
obtained under load, and two more ratios (E and F) to Parts list (Fig. 2)
be obtained in combination with the reduction gear
(A) Dynashift module
module.
(B) PowerShuttle module
The Dynashift module comprises two epicyclic gear
(C) Reverse driving pinion
trains, two brakes and two multidisc clutches.
(D) Mechanical unit module providing four robotically
The brakes are controlled hydraulically by two propor- controlled ranges
tional solenoid valves with an ON/OFF control, and the
(E) Single cone synchroniser
clutches are controlled mechanically, engaged by the
(F) Double cone synchroniser
Belleville washers and disengaged by the brakes
located in the same module. (G) PTO shaft
(H) Gearboc output shaft
(I) Creeper unit
PowerShuttle (Av) Forward clutch
The PowerShuttle is fitted in the centre of the unit. It (Ar) Reverse clutch
links the ratios for shifting under load and the gearbox. (L) Brake
The PowerShuttle comprises two multidisc wet (M) Clutch
clutches controlled by two proportional solenoid valves (N) Brake
with PWM control. (O) Clutch
A mainshaft ensures reverse position. (P) Brake
(Q) Clutch
Robotic gearbox
The gearbox has four ranges. The ratios are selected
by two hydraulically controlled synchronisers.
Gearbox input drive is supplied by the reduction gear
and Dynashift modules.
The four gearbox ranges are automated, so all ratios
can be engaged or disengaged automatically by the
tractor electronic control without intervention by the
driver.

Description of the GBA25 gearbox
Fig. 2

Parts list (Fig. 3) (54) 1st and 2nd double cone synchro
(55) Needle bearing
(1) Unit housing
(2) Compartment
(3) Shims
(4) Primary shaft
(5) Bearing cup
(6) Bearing cone
(7) Double pinion
(8) Circlip
(9) Spacer
(10) Shims
(11) Bearing cone
(12) Bearing cup
(13) Bearing cup
(14) Bearing cone
(15) 3rd and 4th single cone synchroniser
(16) Spacer
(17) Circlip
(18) Circlip
(19) Spacer
(20) Needle bearing
(21) Needle bearing
(22) Spacer
(23) Circlip
(24) Circlip
(25) Bush
(26) Driving pinion (4th)
(27) Bearing cup
(28) Bearing cone
(29) Plug
(30) O’ring
(31) Power take off shaft
(33) Bearing cone
(34) Bearing cup
(36) Spacer
(38) Bearing cup
(39) Bearing cone
(41) Spring
(42) O’ring
(43) Shims
(44) Spacer
(45) Circlip
(46) Washer
(47) Shims
(48) Bearing cup
(49) Bearing cone
(50) Bearing cone
(51) Bearing cup
(52) 2nd gear pinion
(53) 1st Idler pinion

Parts list (Fig. 4) (109)Secondary shaft

(110)Ball bearing
(56) Speed multiplier module housing
(111)Clutch O cover
(57) Spring
(112)PowerShuttle assembly
(58) Brake P discs/intermediate plates assembly
(113)Driven transfer pinion
(59) Clutch Q discs/intermediate plates assembly
(114)Reverse mainshaft
(60) Clutch Q cover
(115)Driving transfer pinion
(61) Ball bearing
(116)Bearing cup
(62) Speed multiplier primary shaft
(117)Bearing cup
(63) Lip seal
(118)Bearing cone
(119)Bearing cone
(120)Cover
(66) Cover
(121) Hub
(67) Clutch Q housing
(122)Ball bearing
(68) Planet carrier
(69) Brake P piston
(70) Ring gear
(71) Ring gear carrier
(72) Sun gear
(73) Bush
(74) Planet gear
(75) Pin
(76) Ball bearing
(77) Ball bearing
(79) Clutch M cover
(80) Dynashift module housing
(81) Brake L discs/intermediate plates assembly
(82) Brake L piston
(83) Clutch M discs/intermediate plates assembly
(85) Spring
(86) Ball bearing
(87) Primary shaft
(89) Ring gear
(90) Planet gear
(92) Pin
(93) Bush
(94) Planet carrier
(95) Sun gear
(96) Ball bearing
(97) Ring gear
(98) Planet gear
(99) Pin
(100)Bush
(101)Planet carrier
(102)Sun gear
(103)Ball bearing
(104)Brake N piston
(105)Spring
(106)Brake N discs/intermediate plates assembly
(107)Clutch O discs/intermediate plates assembly
(108)Belleville washer


GBA25 gearbox overall view
1 3 2 5 6 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 7 15 24 26 25
27
28
29
30
31
18
19
22
23
21
20
33
34
35
MA-05-03950A
38 39 40 42 43 41 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 37 16 17 36 32
Fig. 3

GBA25 gearbox overall view
72 73 74 75 76 84 85 92 93 94 95 96 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 112
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
MA-05-03951A 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 86 87 88 89 90 91 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 120 111 121
Fig. 4

The position of the bearings (11)(12) and (13)(14) is

B . Construction and description adjusted by shims (10).
The GBA25 gearbox allows four basic synchronised
ratios and six ratios for shifting under load to be The 2nd ratio pinion is machined in the primary shaft
obtained. The 24 ratios can be engaged manually or (4), and the 4th ratio pinion (26) turns idle and is
automatically in forward and reverse position, without supported by a lubricated ring (25).
using the clutch pedal.
Secondary shaft (32)
The unit housing consists of two sections: On the secondary shaft, the 2nd ratio pinion (52) turns
- front housing: fitted just behind the engine, it idle. It is supported by two taper roller bearings (48)(49)
supports the shifting under load part of the transmis- and (50)(51) fitted in an X-shape, and a needle bearing
sion (speed multiplier module and Dynashift module) (55).
and the PowerShuttle. The position of the bearings (48)(49) and (50)(51) is
- rear housing: fitted behind the front housing, it adjusted by shims (47).
supports the main gearbox and the robotic control The 2nd gear pinion (52) acts as a rotating pin for the
part of the unit. 1st idler pinion (53), which turns without a bearing. The
friction surface is lubricated by internal channels. The
double cone synchro (54) is fitted on the 2nd gear
Construction of the main unit
pinion and is meshed with the pinion (53) or (37).
The gearbox is completely crossed by the PTO shaft
(31) which links the engine flywheel to the PTO clutch The 3rd (37) and 4th (35) gear pinions are meshed by
in the rear axle. This shaft turns at the centre of a the splines on the secondary shaft (32).
series of shafts forming the upper shaftline.
In the rear housing (1), a vertical compartment (2)

supports the front bearings (5)(6) and (38)(39) of the
primary (4) and secondary (32) units. It also contains
the lubricating channels.
The housings are bolted together and act as an oil tank

for the tractor hydraulic circuit.
The main gearbox comprises four synchronised ratios

with two synchronisers (15) and (54). Four gear trains
are distributed on the two shafts (4) and (32).
Each ratio is obtained by engaging only one synchro-
niser at a time.
The first ratio uses three gear trains, while the three
other ratios each use one gear train (see § C).
The primary shaft (4) is supported by two taper roller

bearings (5)(6) and (27)(28). Adjustment is ensured by
shims (3) fitted under the bearing cup (5).
The secondary shaft (32) is also supported by two
taper roller bearings (38)(39) and (34)(33). Adjustment
is ensured by shims (43) fitted under the bearing cup
(38).
Primary shaft (4)

On the primary shaft (4), the 1st and 3rd ratio pinions
are integral and form a double pinion (7) that turns idle
on the shaft. This assembly is supported by two taper
roller bearings (11)(12) and (13)(14) fitted in an X-shape,
and two needle bearings (20) and (21).

Construction of the Powershift module Reverse position (Fig. 6)

The Powershift section of the GBA25 transmission is The reverse position is ensured by a mainshaft
fitted behind the engine flywheel. comprised of a shaft (114) and two pinions (113) and
Each module is fitted in a cast-iron housing screwed in (115). It transmits drive from the PowerShuttle (112) to
the unit housing. the 2nd gear pinion (52) on the secondary shaft (32) of
The Powershift section is divided into two modules: the main unit.
The pinions (113) and (115) are linked to the shaft by
splines.
Speed multiplier module
The pinion (115) is fitted on bearings (116)(118) and
The speed multiplier module comprises an epicyclic (117)(119) with preload shimming at the bearing cup
gear train, a clutch and a brake. (116).
The primary shaft (62) is linked to the planet carrier
(68). It links the PTO shaft and engine flywheel.
Clutch / brake operation (Fig. 5)
The clutch discs (59) are splined to the primary shaft
(62). The intermediate plates of the clutch (59) are inte- The clutches / brakes that select the Dynashift unit
gral with the clutch cover (60) and sun gear (72). ratios are each controlled by a piston (P). When a brake
The brake discs (58) are integral with the clutch cover is engaged, the related clutch is disengaged, and vice
(60) and sun gear (72). versa.
The ring gear (70) and ring gear carrier (71) of the epicyclic The control pistons (P) act both on the brake (F) discs
gear train drive the primary shaft (87) of the Dynashift and on an intermediate plate (I). When the piston (P) is
module. pressurised, the plate (I) pushes back the Belleville
washer(s) (B) of the clutch (E). When the pressure is
released, the Belleville washer (B) pushes back the
Dynashift module piston (P) via the intermediate plate (I) and tightens the
The Dynashift module comprises two epicyclic gear clutch (E) discs.
trains (primary and secondary), two brakes and two
clutches.
Primary epicyclic gear train

The ring gear (89) of the primary gear train is splined to
the primary shaft (87). It rotates at the multiplier
secondary speed. B
The planet carrier (94), linked to the secondary shaft (109),
supplies output rotational speed to the Dynashift module. E
The sun gear (95) of the first gear train is linked to the
planet carrier (101) of the second gear train. I
Secondary epicyclic gear train F

The ring gear of the second gear train (97) can be
locked in rotation by the brake (81), or locked with the P
primary shaft (87) by the clutch (83).
The sun gear (102) can be locked in rotation by the MA-05-03966A
brake (106), or locked with the secondary shaft (109) Fig. 5
by the clutch (107).
The planet carrier (101) is integral with the sun gear of
the first gear train (95).

112 52 32
120 122 113 114 118 116 115 119 117
MA-05-03953A
Fig. 6

carrier and therefore the sun gear of the primary epicy-

C . Kinematics of the GBA25 clic gear train.
gearbox The secondary epicyclic gear train determines the rota-
tional speed of the primary sun gear.
Parts list (Fig. 7) The reduction is given by the speed of the primary
(Av) Forward clutch planet carrier and the speed of the primary sun gear.
(Ar) Reverse clutch
(L) Ring gear brake, 2nd epicyclic gear train of the Ratio C (1/1.193)
Dynashift module Brake piston N is pressurised. Clutch M is locked by
(M) Ring gear clutch, 2nd epicyclic gear train of the the Belleville washers. The primary shaft drives the
Dynashift module ring gears of the two epicyclic gear trains. On the
(N) Sun gear brake, 2nd epicyclic gear train of the secondary epicyclic gear train, the sun gear is fixed in
Dynashift module relation to the unit housing, and the ring gear drives the
(O) Sun gear clutch, 2nd epicyclic gear train of the secondary planet carrier and the primary sun gear.
Dynashift module The reduction is given by the speed of the primary
(P) Speed multiplier module ring gear brake planet carrier and the speed of the primary sun gear.
(Q) Speed multiplier module ring gear clutch
Ratio D (1/1)
Kinematics of the speed multiplier module The two brake pistons L and N are not pressurised.
(Fig. 7) The two clutches M and O are locked by the Belleville
Ratio 1/1 washers. The primary and secondary ring gears
receive the input speed. The secondary sun gear is
Clutch Q secures the planet carrier and the sun gear of integral with the secondary shaft, thus mechanically
the epicyclic gear train. The gear train assembly is locking the Dynashift module.
locked and turns at engine speed. The ratio obtained
The input and output speeds are identical. The oper-
is 1/1.
ating ratio is 1/1.
Ratio 1.423/1
Kinematics of the PowerShuttle (Fig. 7)
Brake P locks the rotation of the sun gear on the unit
housing. Movement enters via the planet carrier which When the transmission is at neutral, the PowerShuttle
drives the rotation of the ring gear. In this case the ratio clutches are not pressurised.
obtained is 1.423/1. In forward position, the “Av” clutch is engaged, and
directly transmits drive from the Powershift to the
primary shaft of the gearbox.
Kinematics of the Dynashift module
In reverse position, the “Ar” clutch is engaged, and
Drive is always transmitted via the primary epicyclic transmits drive to a mainshaft then to a 2nd gear pinion
gear train, entering via the ring gear and exiting via the on the secondary shaft of the main gearbox.
primary planet carrier. The four ratios are obtained by
modifying the rotational speed of the primary sun gear,
which is set by the secondary epicyclic gear train.
Ratio A (1/1.698)
The two brake pistons L and N are pressurised. The
ring gear and sun gear of the secondary epicyclic gear
train are fixed in relation to the unit housing. As a
result, the planet carrier of this gear train is fixed and
holds the sun gear of the first gear train.
The reduction is provided by the speed of the primary
planet carrier.
Ratio B (1/1.423)
Brake piston L is pressurised. Clutch O is locked by the
Belleville washers. The sun gear of the secondary
epicyclic gear train turns at the same speed as the
secondary shaft, driving the rotation of the planet

Kinematic diagrams of the GBA25 gearbox
4
3
Robotic gearbox
2
1
PowerShuttle
Av
Ar
N
O
Dynashift module
M
Speed multiplier
module
Q
P
MA-05-03946A
Fig. 7

Kinematics of the main unit

(Fig. 7 et Fig. 8)
1 N
Range 1
The reduction is carried out on three gear trains.
The first gear train drives the second train via the 1st
gear synchronisers, then the third train.
Range 2
The reduction is carried out on the first gear train. The
2nd gear synchronisers secure the 2nd gear pinion to
the secondary shaft.
1
Range 3
The reduction is carried out on the third gear train. The
primary shaft is secured to the 3rd gear pinion by the 2 N
3rd gear synchronisers.
Range 4
The reduction is carried out on the fourth gear train.
The primary shaft is secured to the 4th gear pinion by
the 4th gear synchronisers.
3 3
4 4
MA-05-03947A N
Fig. 8

D . Synchronisers
Single cone synchronisers
(Ranges 3 and 4)
3 2 1 4 5 6
Parts list (Fig. 9)
(1) Sliding coupler
(2) Cone (brake)
(3) Coupling flange
(4) Ball
(5) Pressure elements
(6) Spring
Locked position (Fig. 9)

When the sliding coupler (1) moves towards the gear
to be locked, it presses against the cone (2) which in
turn presses against the male cone of the coupling
flange (3) via balls (4) and pressure elements (5).
When the synchronisation is set, the sliding coupler (1)
can mesh and lock noiselessly with the teeth of the
coupling flange (3).
Neutral position (Fig. 9)

Sliding coupler (1) is in the middle position. The balls (4)
are pushed into the V groove of the sliding coupler by
pressure springs (6). In this neutral position, the sliding
coupler is locked by three balls held in place by the
pressure springs.
1 4 5 6 2 3
MA-05-03948A
Fig. 9

Check
If the single cone synchronisers (11), (23) and (31) have
been disassembled, check the wear to the cone (2) as
follows:
1. Stack the coupling flange (3) and cone (2) on the
relevant pinion.
2. Correctly position the cone (2) on the male cone of
the coupling flange, revolving several times and
applying manual pressure.
3. Using a set of laminated shims, measure
dimension X (Fig. 10) at three equidistant points. X
Calculate the average of the three values and
proceed as described below, depending on the
result obtained.
On a new synchroniser, dimension X must be
1.5 mm maximum. MA-05-05052A
After operation, if X is less than or equal to Fig. 10
0.80 mm:
- replace the cone (2),
same process.
If dimension X remains incorrect, also replace
the coupling flange (3) or, if necessary, the
complete synchroniser.

Double cone synchronisers

(Ranges 1 and 2)
Nomenclature (Fig. 11)

1 5 4 2 8 3
(1) Sliding coupler
(2) Cone (brake)
(3) Coupling flange
(4) Ball
(5) Pressure elements 6
(6) Spring
(7) Ring
(8) Cone (brake)
Advantages and operation

The double cone synchroniser has the following advan-
tages: increased reliability and strength to withstand
transmission loads.
The operating principle of the double cone synchro-

niser is similar to that of the single cone synchroniser.
The positions (locked and neutral) are obtained in the
same way.
5 4 6 1 7
MA-05-03949A
2 8 3
Fig. 11

Check
When disassembling the double cone synchroniser of
the mechanical reverse shuttle, check the cones (2)
and (8) for wear as follows:
4. Stack the coupling flange (3), cones (2) and (8) and
ring (7).
5. Correctly position the ring (7) on the cones (2) and
(8), revolving them alternately each several turns
and applying pressure manually.
6. Using a set of laminated shims, measure
dimension X (Fig. 12) at three equidistant points.
result obtained.
1.6 mm minimum.
After operation, if X is less than or equal to
0.60 - 0.80 mm:
- replace the cones (2) and (8);
same process.
ring (7) or, if necessary, the complete synchro-
niser.
Fig. 12

A safety pin (12) prevents the guide rods from being

E . Main unit robotic control engaged simultaneously. When a guide rod is
engaged, the pin locks the other one at the groove
Description (Fig. 13) (13).
The synchronisers are controlled in the standard
manner by forks (1) and (2) and guide rods (3) and (4).
The guide rods are controlled hydraulically. The guide
rods are fitted on double-acting pistons (5) and (6).
On the guide rod (4) that controls the 1st and 2nd gear
synchroniser, the piston (6) is cushioned by a spring (7)
to smoothen shifting between ranges 1 and 2.
The guide rods are adjusted by tightening or loosening
the adjustable stops (8) and (9). Once adjusted, the
stops are held in rotation by screws (10) and (11).
3 1 5
10
12
11
7 6 2 4 13
MA-05-03952A
Fig. 13

F . GBA25 - disassembly steps
Step 1: Removing the PTO shaft
MA-05-03958A
Fig. 14
Step 2: Splitting the mechanical unit
MA-05-03959A
Fig. 15

Step 3: Removing the reverse position spacer and mainshaft
Fig. 16
MA-05-03960A
Step 4: Removing the primary and secondary shafts
MA-05-03961A
Fig. 17

Step 5: Removing the speed multiplier module, Dynashift module and PowerShuttle assembly
MA-05-03963A
Fig. 18
Step 6: Removing the PowerShuttle and planet carriers from the Dynashift module
MA-05-03964A
Fig. 19

Step 7: Splitting the PowerShuttle and planet carriers from the Dynashift module
MA-05-03046A
Fig. 20
Step 8: Removing the Dynashift module ring gears
MA-05-03965A
Fig. 21

Step 8: Removing the Dynashift module housing
MA-05-03962A
Fig. 22
Step 9: Removing the speed multiplier module cover
MA-05-03047A
Fig. 23


G . GBA25 transmission spécifica-

tions
Parts list (Fig. 24 and Fig. 25)
(P) Preload
(J) Clearance
(C) Dimension

GBA25 gearbox specifications
648 33 Nm 33 Nm 33 Nm 29 - 37 Nm 150 - 200 Nm
242 242 242 242
P = 0,05 A 0,1 P = 0,05 A J = 0,05

33 Nm
242
648
C = 16,33
29 - 37 Nm
242
33 Nm 648 16,5 Nm 66 Nm 17 Nm
P = 0,05 A 0,15 P = 0,05 A J = 0,05

242 242 242 242 5206
MA-05-03945A
Fig. 24


GBA25 gearbox specifications
29 - 37 Nm
1-2 3-4
242 X1 20,785 +/- 1 21,830 +/- 0,8
X2 21,255 +/- 1,095 22,300 +/- 0,895
Y 32,215 +/- 1,245 33,213 +/- 1,093
12 - 16 Nm Z1 43,625 +/- 0,9 44,425 +/- 0,8
N
Z2 43,155 +/- 0,995 43,955 +/- 0,895
242 J = 0,1/0,3 Z2-X2 21,9 +/- 1,4 21,655 +/- 1,275
X1 X2
P = 0,05/0,1
57 - 77 Nm
Z1 Z2
MA-05-03954A 242
Fig. 25


5C11 - GBA25 - PowerShuttle
CONTENTS
A . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
C . Removing and refitting the PowerShuttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
D . Removing and refitting the PowerShuttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
E . Final operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
F . Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19


A . General
The PowerShuttle, also called “ISC”, consists of two
electrohydraulically controlled multidisc clutches. It
makes possible to reverse the direction under load. It
is fitted on all tractors with a GBA25 gearbox.
The PowerShuttle is fitted in the centre of the unit. It

links the Powershift section of the gearbox to the
mechanical section of the gearbox.
The PowerShuttle is used as the main clutch of the
transmission.
The PowerShuttle design is simple. It comprises two

multidisc clutches, one for forward travel and one for
reverse travel. The PowerShuttle transmits drive from
the Powershift part of the gearbox to the mechanical
part of the gearbox.
Forward drive is transmitted directly to the mechanical

gearbox primary shaft. For reverse travel, a gear train
and a mainshaft transmit drive to the second ratio
pinion on the secondary shaft of the mechanical
gearbox.
A lever, fitted to the left under the steering wheel,

controls both the PowerShuttle and A, B, C, D gear
shifting of the Powershift ratios.
It is also fitted with a position for manual declutching
of the transmission.
Depending on the position selected by the operator,

the lever controls two proportional solenoid valves via
an Autotronic 5 calculator fitted in the cab floor.
The clutch pedal or manoeuvring pedal also controls
the clutch via sensors and the calculator. It is useful
when carrying out precise manoeuvres or hitching
implements.
The two solenoid valves are fitted on a hydraulic unit

located at the front right of the gearbox. This unit also
comprises the control solenoid valves of the Power-
shift ratios. It is supplied with 20 bar pressure from the
tractor hydraulic circuit.
A speed sensor fitted to the right-hand side of the

gearbox informs the calculator of the rotational output
speed of the PowerShuttle. The measurement is taken
at the second ratio pinion of the secondary shaft.

Parts list (Fig. 1 and Fig. 2) (54) Bearing cone

(55) Bearing cup
(1) PowerShuttle primary shaft
(56) Bearing cone
(2) Snap ring
(57) Bearing
(3) Bearing
(58) Circlip
(4) Rings
(59) Flange
(5) Bearing
(60) Needle bearing
(6) Reverse driving pinion
(61) Circlip
(7) Bearing
(8) Circlip
(9) Snap ring
(10) Bush
(11) Discs
(12) Clutch plates
(13) Washer
(14) PowerShuttle unit
(15) Clutch plates
(16) Discs
(18) Circlip
(19) Snap ring
(20) Forward output hub
(22) Mechanical gearbox primary shaft
(23) PTO shaft
(24) Lubricating oil deflector
(25) Snap ring
(26) Dyna module cover
(27) Snap ring
(29) Circlip
(33) Seal
(34) Seal
(35) Seal
(36) Seal
(37) Washer
(38) Reverse driving pinion
(39) Bearing
(41) O’ring
(42) Sealing ring
(43) Ring
(44) Snap ring
(45) Bush
(46) Gearbox internal compartment
(47) Mechanical gearbox secondary shaft
(48) Second ratio driven pinion
(49) Reverse driving transfer pinion
(50) Bearing
(51) Mainshaft
(52) Shims
(53) Bearing cup

GBA25 PowerShuttle overall view
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
59
2 60
1 A 22
23 41
47
24 42
48
B
25 43
6 55
57 44
49 56
27 45
50 38
28 46
51
29 47
26
31 48
32 33 34 35 36 30 37 39 40
58 61 46 52 53 54
MA-05-03955A
Fig. 1

GBA25 PowerShuttle exploded view

50
49
58 26
51
52
53
2
38
3
56
4
5
6
7
8 29
59 27
54
57 28
55
25
24 11
32
33
1
9
14
10
31 39
12 42
13
35
30
34
37
17
45
44 60
43
41
36
16
20
40
19
18
15
23
MA-05-03967A
Fig. 2

Construction (Fig. 1 and Fig. 2) Operation

The PowerShuttle unit comprises two identical Forward
clutches fitted opposite one another. To engage the forward position, the piston is supplied
by the 20 bar hydraulic circuit of the tractor. Oil flows
The PowerShuttle consists mainly of a unit (14) fitted through the channel (B Fig. 1) provided in the shaft (1)
to the output shaft (1) of the Dyna module. The shaft and moves the piston (30). The discs (16) and clutch
(1) is supported on the Dyna module side by a ball plates (15) are compressed between the piston and
bearing (3) held on the bearing (57) by the flange (59). cover (40).
On the mechanical gearbox side, the shaft (1) is Input drive is transmitted via the unit (14) to the clutch
supported by a ball bearing (39) fitted home on the plates (15) and discs (16). The splined hub (20) directly
primary shaft of the mechanical gearbox (22). drives the gearbox primary shaft (22).
The forward position output hub (20) is splined to the
shaft (22). The reverse driving pinion (6) turns on two Reverse
ball bearings (5) and (7).
Each clutch mechanism comprises a piston (30) and The clutch mechanism is identical to the forward posi-
(32), a series of discs (16) (11) and clutch plates (15) tion. Via the mainshaft (51), the reverse driving pinion
(12). The tightness of the pistons is ensured by seals (6) drives the mechanical gearbox second ratio pinion
with square sections (35) (36) and (33) (34). Each (48), which turns idle on the secondary shaft (47). The
piston is repositioned by a series of Belleville washers direction of travel is reversed by a series of reverse
(17) and (31). driving pinions (6), (49) and (38).
A thrust washer (13) or (37) is positioned between the NOTE: The forward and reverse position ratios are iden-
piston (32) or (30) and the Belleville washers (31) or tical.
(17). The Belleville washers (31) and (17) are held on
the shaft (1) respectively by the bushes (10) and (45)
and snap rings (9) and (44).
The reverse mainshaft (51) is supported at the front by
a ball bearing (50) fitted home in the cover (26) of the
Dyna module. On the mechanical gearbox side, the
pinion (38) splined to the shaft (51) turns on two taper
roller bearings. This part of the mechanism is
described in the “Mechanical gearbox” section.
The pinion (49) is splined to the shaft (51). A circlip (58)
holds the pinion (49) in position on the shaft (51).

Control
Pressure is supplied to the pistons (30) and (32) by
internal channels (A) and (B) located in the shaft (1).
Two solenoid valves located on the gearbox right-hand
cover control the clutches. The internal channels are
located in the bearing (57) and in the shaft (1). Tight-
ness between the bearing (57) and shaft (1) is ensured
by three seals (4). The channels are blocked at the end
of the shaft (1) by plugs.
Lubrication
A flow of oil from the tractor hydraulic circuit is sent to
the bearing (57) on the left-hand side of the gearbox.
The oil flow is channelled to the centre of the upper
shaftline. Radial bores distribute the oil to the various
elements. The channels are blocked at the end of the
shaft (1) by plugs. The sealing ring (42), O’ring (41) and
ring (43) prevent the oil from leaking out where the
shafts (1) and (22) join.
PowerShuttle control
Reversing the direction of travel is controlled electro-
hydraulically by an Autotronic 5 calculator used to
control the transmission. The calculator control two
proportional solenoid valves that control the Power-
Shuttle clutches. To control the gradual reverse
shifting or engagement of a clutch, the calculator
receives information concerning engine rotational
speed, ground speed and PowerShuttle output rota-
tional speed (see chapter 11 Electronics).

1. Drain the transmission oil
gearbox (see chapter 2)
3. Remove:
- either the complete gearbox (if servicing is to be
carried out on the whole transmission assembly)
- or only the Dyna module of the gearbox, leaving
the mechanical gearbox coupled to the rear axle
(if servicing is to be carried out on the Dyna
module or PowerShuttle only).
NOTE: It is possible to carry out work on the
forward clutch by splitting the tractor between the
Dyna module and the mechanical gearbox.
4. Remove (Fig. 3):
- all hydraulic pipes fitted to the unit housing
- the unit control hydraulic unit with its connecting
pipes
- the PTO shaft.
Fig. 3


PowerShuttle
Removal
5. If the whole unit has been removed (operation 3),
split the Dyna module from the mechanical unit.
6. Locally make four legs on which to set the unit
vertically, as shown in Fig. 4. Use an M14 screw or
threaded rod, and weld on a nut to ensure a
minimum distance of 120 mm between the unit
and the work surface.
120mm
M14
MA-05-03968A Fig. 4

7. Take out the two diametrically opposed screws

(A Fig. 5) and replace them with two shackles to
sling the unit.
8. Take out the 8 screws (B Fig. 5).
CAUTION : do not take out the screws (C Fig. 5).
They hold the housing (D Fig. 5) of the multiplier
module in place.
9. Sling the Dyna module of the gearbox using the
two shackles fitted at operation 7.
10. Make a mark (R Fig. 6) on the housings in order to
refit the modules correctly at reassembly.
11. Position the Dyna module on a fixture fitted on the
forward clutch (Fig. 6).
12. Take out the screws holding the cover (26) on the
housing (D).
13. Using a sling, raise and split the front part of the
unit (D) (multiplier module, Dyna module) (Fig. 5).
NOTE: During this operation, the rear brake, rear
clutch and double epicyclic gear train stay on the
PowerShuttle.
Fig. 5
Fig. 6

14. Take off the circlip (E) holding the double planet
carrier in position (F Fig. 7).
15. Extract the double planet carrier (F). Remove the E
spring washer.
16. Take out the brake and clutch assembly (G) and the
friction washer (H). F
17. Remove the attachment screw from the cover (26)
on the bearing (57).
Refitting
18. Fit the PowerShuttle on a fixture positioned on the G
forward clutch (Fig. 6).
19. Fit the cover (26) on the bearing (57). Ensure there
is a snap ring (2) on the shaft (1). H
20. Fit the cover attachment screws (26) smeared with
Loctite 242 or equivalent. Tighten to 29 - 37 Nm.
26
21. Fit the friction washer (H) smeared with oil on the
clutch unit (G).
22. Refit the brake and clutch assembly (G) on the
cover (26 Fig. 7).
2
NOTE: If the brake discs and clutch discs have
been replaced, they must be soaked for approxi-
mately one hour in a transmission oil bath. See the
Dyna module chapter for the procedure to follow. 57
23. Refit the double planet carrier (F Fig. 7).
24. Refit the circlip (E) on the shaft (Fig. 7).
25. Align the lubricating port (arrow) with a tooth on
each planet gear (Fig. 8).
26. Sling the Dyna module as in operation 9.
27. Check for the presence of return springs (S Fig. 8)
in the cover (26).
28. Carry out operation 13 in reverse order, aligning MA-05-03971A
the two parts using the mark (R Fig. 7). Fig. 7

NOTE: Take care when inserting the planet gears
into the piston in the Dyna module.
29. Fit the attachment screws of the cover (26) to the
Dyna module, after smearing them with Loctite
242 or equivalent. Tighten the screws to a torque
of 66 Nm.
Fig. 8

30. Clean the mating faces (Fig. 9) then apply Loctite

510 or equivalent sealing product.
31. Refit the O’ring (J Fig. 9). Smear it lightly with J 510
grease and position it on the Dyna module.
32. Sling the Dyna PowerShuttle and module
assembly. Fit the assembly in the unit housing.
33. Lower the sling by aligning the locating pin (L) with
the port (Fig. 9).
L
34. Refit the attachment screws (B) of the housing (D)
(Fig. 5).
MA-05-03980A
Fig. 9

D . Removing and refitting the

PowerShuttle
3 2
Disassembly
59
Reverse clutch
35. Remove the PowerShuttle assembly (see § C).
57
36. Remove the plate (59). Remove the snap ring (2).
37. Remove the circlip (29) (step 1 Fig. 10).
29
38. Remove the bearing (57), reverse driving pinion (6),
bearings (5) (7) and bearing (3) assembly
(step 2 Fig. 10). 5
39. If it is necessary to replace the bearings (5) (7), take 1
off the circlip (8), oil deflector (24) and snap ring 24
(25).
NOTE: Mark the order of assembly of the oil
deflector (25). 7 2
40. Remove the clutch discs (11) and clutch plates
(12). 6
41. Remove and discard the rings (4 Fig. 10). 4
11
12
MA-05-03972A
Fig. 10

42. Fit the PowerShuttle unit on a press with the

Belleville washers (31 Fig. 11) turned upwards.
Using the tool (ATP3002 see § F), compress the
Belleville washers (31).
43. Take off the snap ring (9) and washer (10) (Fig. 12).
Release the press and take off the Belleville
washers (31) and thrust washer (13).
44. Drive off the piston (32) using compressed air.
Discard the seals with square sections (33) (34).
Forward clutch
45. Turn over the clutch unit (14).
46. Remove circlip (18).
47. Take off the forward clutch cover (40) with the
hub (20) and snap ring (19).
48. Remove the discs (16) and clutch plates (15).
Fig. 11
49. Repeat operations 42 and 43 with the Belleville
washers (17), snap ring (44) and washers (45) and
(37).
50. Drive off the piston (30) using compressed air.
Discard the seals with square sections (35) (36).
51. Take off the sealing ring (42) and the bearing (39).
Discard the O’ring (41) and ring (43) (Fig. 13).
52. If necessary, take off the needle bearing
(60 Fig. 13).
Fig. 12
39 41 42 43
60
MA-05-03974A
Fig. 13

Reassembly
NOTE: O’rings and seals with a square section must 9 10 31 13 33 32
previously be greased to ensure they are positioned
correctly.
NOTE: New discs must always be soaked for approxi-

mately one hour in transmission oil.
53. Check the condition of the parts of the mecha-

nism. Replace any defective parts. Ensure the
clutch lubricating and control ports in the shaft (1)
are clean. 11
Assembling pistons (30) and (32) 12

MA-05-03975A
54. Fit new greased seals with square sections 34 14
(33)(34) and (35)(36) in the grooves of the pistons
Fig. 14
(30) and (32).
NOTE: Ensure the seals are correctly positioned in
the grooves.
55. Grease the piston sleeves in the unit (14 Fig. 14).
56. Fit the pistons (30) and (32) in the unit (14) by
striking the rim of each piston alternately with a
plastic hammer.
Reverse clutch
57. Position the washer (13) then the Belleville
washers (31) on the unit (14). Using a press and
tool (ATP3002 see § F), compress the Belleville
washers (31) as in operation 42.
58. Fit the thrust washer (10). Fit a new snap ring (9).
NOTE: Ensure the washer (10) is positioned
correctly. Its shoulder should be facing the snap
ring.
59. Grease three new rings (4) and fit them on the
grooves of the shaft (1).
60. If the bearings (5) and (7) have been removed
(operation 39), refit them in correct order on the
pinion (6):
- the bearing (7)
- the oil deflector (24)
- a new snap ring (25)
- the bearing (5).
61. Ensure the clutch lubricating and control ports in
the bearing (57) are clean.
62. Assemble the reverse driving pinion (6) with the
bearing (57).

64. Position the bearing (57), reverse driving pinion (6)

and bearings (5) (7) assembly on a fixture with a
central hole to insert the shaft (1), with the hub
turned upwards (Fig. 15).
65. Slide the discs (11) and clutch plates (12) onto the
reverse driving pinion (6).
NOTE: Ensure the discs and clutch plates are
stacked in the correct order (Fig. 15).
66. Align the splines of the clutch plates (12) (Fig. 15).
67. Lower the PowerShuttle unit (14) so its splines
slide onto those of the clutch plates (Fig. 15).
68. Fit the circlip (29) in the groove on the unit (14).
Forward clutch
69. If the needle bearing (60) supporting the PTO shaft
has been removed (operation 51), replace it with a
new one. Fig. 15
70. Grease the O’ring (41) and ring (43). Fit them on
the sealing ring (42).
71. On the shaft (1):
- insert the bearing (39)
- insert the ring (42).
IMPORTANT: Ensure the ring is positioned correctly
(42 Fig. 16). Its shoulder (arrow) should be facing
the bearing (39).
72. Carry out operations 57 and 58 with the forward
clutch. 39
42
73. Fit the hub (20) in the unit (14).
74. Slide on the discs (16) and clutch plates (15).
NOTE: Ensure the discs and clutch plates are
stacked in the correct order (Fig. 15).
75. Fit the closing clutch cover (40) with the snap ring MA-05-03978A
(19).
Fig. 16
77. Refit the PowerShuttle assembly (see § C).

78. Refit the PTO shaft in the transmission upper
shaftline.
79. Refit the hydraulic control covers, and reconnect
the hydraulic pipes and hoses.
80. Assemble the transmission on the engine side and
rear axle side, applying Loctite 5206 or equivalent
sealant to the mating faces (see chapter 2).

F . Service tools
- ATP 3002: Belleville washer compression tool
(Fig. 17)
MA-05-03983A
Fig. 17


GBA25 - Powershift module
5C12 - GBA25 - Powershift module
CONTENTS
A . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
C . Kinematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
D . Preliminary operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
E . Removing and refitting the Powershift module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
F . Disassembling and reassembling the Dynashift module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
G . Disassembling and reassembling the speed multiplier module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
H . Disassembling and reassembling the planet gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
I . Final operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
J . Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34


A . General
The Powershift module is fitted to GBA25 gearboxes.
It is mounted at the gearbox input and is driven directly
by the engine. This module provides the GBA25 trans-
mission with six gear ratios for shifting under load.
These six ratios are supplied by three epicyclic gear
trains that operate with three brakes and three
clutches.
The gear ratios can be controlled with the reverse
shuttle lever (to the left under the steering wheel) or
with the right-hand armrest lever.
During basic operation, gear shifting operates in
“Speedmatching” mode: the most suitable ratio for
shifting under load is automatically selected when
changing range. Depending on the options, gear
shifting can be completely automatic. Fig. 1
The brakes and clutches are controlled by proportional
solenoid valves (N, P, L Fig. 1). They are fitted to a
hydraulic unit to the front right of the gearbox that
operates on the tractor 20 bar circuit (Fig. 1).
B . Operating principle
The Powershift module consists of two modules
comprised mainly of three epicyclic gear trains:
- speed multiplier module: located at the gearbox
input. It comprises an epicyclic gear train with three
planet gears, a brake and a clutch.
- Dynashiftmodule: fitted behind the speed multiplier.
It comprises two epicyclic gear trains with four
planet gears, two brakes and two clutches.
Speed multiplier module

Located in the input unit, the speed multiplier provides
a ratio of 1/1 (gear train locked) or 1.423/1.
Drive enters via the planet carrier and exits via the ring
gear. When the epicyclic gear train ratio is 1/1, the sun
gear is meshed to the planet carrier by a clutch. The
gear train assembly turns at the same speed as the
engine.
When the epicyclic gear train ratio is 1.4232/1, the
brake locks the sun gear on the gearbox housing,
allowing the engine speed to be overincreased (for
ratios E and F).

Dynashift module
This module is located at the speed multiplier output,
and allows four ratios to be obtained when shifting
under load. It comprises two identical epicyclic gear
trains, two clutches and two brakes.
Drive enters and exits via the primary epicyclic gear
train.
The clutches and brakes act on the ring gear and the
sun gear of the secondary epicyclic gear train to vary
the speed of the primary sun gear, thus creating
different ratios.
Lubrication
The Powershift module is lubricated under pressure by
a network of internal channels. Oil enters the upper
transmission shaft of the gearbox, then travels through
radial bores to the elements to lubricate.
The oil flows from the tractor hydraulic circuit (see
chapter 9).

Parts list (Fig. 2 and Fig. 3) (55) O’ring

(56) Spring washer
(1) Multiplier input shaft
(57) Ball bearing
(2) Lip seal
(59) Secondary ring gear cover
(3) Multiplier cover
(4) O’ring
(62) Screw
(5) Multiplier housing
(6) Ball bearing
(64) Circlip
(7) Clutch Q cover
(65) Circlip
(8) Screw
(66) Snap ring
(9) Friction washer
(67) Ball bearing
(11) Intermediate plate
(69) Pin
(12) Clutch Q / brake P junction plate
(70) Needle bearing
(13) Brake P disc
(71) Planet gear
(14) Sun gear (multiplier epicyclic gear train)
(15) Snap ring
(73) Screw
(16) Clutch Q housing
(75) Plug
(19) Plug
(77) Spacer
(78) Ball bearing
(21) Pin
(22) Needle bearing
(80) Pin
(23) Planet gear
(81) Plug
(24) Clutch Q disc
(82) Needle bearing
(25) Clutch Q intermediate plate
(83) Planet gear
(26) Planet carrier
(84) Sun gear
(27) Spring
(85) Screw
(29) Multiplier ring gear
(86) Clutch O housing
(30) Brake P piston
(87) Spring washer
(31) O’ring
(88) Snap ring
(32) O’ring
(89) Brake N piston
(33) PTO shaft
(90) O’ring
(34) Ball bearing
(91) O’ring
(35) Ring
(92) Locating pin
(93) Dynashift module cover
(94) Spring
(38) Ball bearing
(95) Clutch O / brake N junction plate
(39) Dynashift module input shaft
(96) Clutch O cover
(40) Hub
(41) Clutch M cover
(99) Spacer
(43) O’ring
(100)Snap ring
(44) O’ring
(101)Brake N disc
(45) Clutch M / brake L junction plate
(102)Intermediate plate
(46) Brake L disc
(103)Hub
(47) Intermediate plate
(104)Intermediate plate
(48) Screw
(105)Clutch O disc
(106)Dynashift module output shaft
(50) Clutch M disc
(107)Ball bearing
(51) Clutch M intermediate plate
(108)Bearing
(52) Spring
(109)Washer
(53) O’ring
(110)Screw
(54) Brake L piston
(111)O’ring

(112)O’ring
(113)O’ring
(114)O’ring

Overall view
5 19 20 21 22 23 36 37 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 60 89 92 93 94 95 110
4
96
3
97
11
98
12
99
13
100 63 59 75 62 60 79
8
9
68 80
10
69 81
2
70 82
1 106
71 83
6 107
72 84
14 108
73 85
15
74 86
16
87
17
64 65 66 67 76 77 78 88
18
103
24
104
25
105
26
86
27
29
30
31 32 33 34 35 38 39 40 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 63 59 90 91 109 101 102
Fig. 2

Exploded view
93
29
107
5
110
43
86
90
99 91
100
38 24
108 94 52
27
104
53 111 30
31
102 89
25
95 92 16
8 2
105 56
23
57
22
65 4
21
71 54 32
101 70 1 10
55 20 9
69
68 49 15
97 17
72
59 14 18
96 77
83 48 26
98 3
82 63 36 34 13
80 41 35
79 64
74 42 7
85
73 6
66 45
67
47
12
60 37
62 11
50
76
103 109
40
78
88 46
84
87
51
MA-05-03986A 39
Fig. 3

Clutch / brake operation (Fig. 4)

C . Kinematics
The brakes and clutches operate as a 1 brake / 1 clutch
Parts list (Fig. 5) set. The brakes (F) mesh an element to the housing
(fixed), and the clutches (E) mesh two elements in
(Fwd)Forward clutch rotation.
(Rev)Reverse clutch The clutches / brakes are controlled by a single piston
(L) Ring gear brake, 2nd epicyclic gear train of the (P). A junction plate (L) allows the clutch to be released
Dynashift module when the brake is engaged, and vice versa.
(M) Ring gear clutch, 2nd epicyclic gear train of the When there is no pressure on the piston (position A),
Dynashift module the Belleville washer (R) engages the clutch (E). When
(N) Sun gear brake, 2nd epicyclic gear train of the the piston (P) is supplied (position B), it engages the
Dynashift module brake (F) and pushes back the Belleville washer (R) via
(O) Sun gear clutch, 2nd epicyclic gear train of the the plate (L).
Dynashift module
(P) Reduction gear module sun gear brake
(Q) Reduction gear module sun gear clutch
Logic of the ratios (see table) Piston (P)
The six ratios are obtained by linking the four Dynashift
module ratios with the two multiplier module ratios.
Brake (F)
For ratios A, B, C and D the speed multiplier is not P
engaged, and its ratio is 1/1. A B
For ratios E and F, ratios C and D of the Dynashift Junction plate (L)
module are used, linked with the multiplier module, F L
which provides a ratio of 1.423/1.
Clutch (E)
Drive is always transmitted via the primary epicyclic E
gear train, entering via the primary ring gear and exiting Belleville washer (R) R
via the primary planet carrier. The four ratios are
obtained by modifying the rotational speed of the
primary sun gear, which is set by the secondary epicy-
clic gear train.
MA-05-03984A
Fig. 4

Kinematic diagram
Speed multiplier module Dynashift module
Q M
O
MA-05-03985A
Fig. 5
Speed multiplier Dynashift Solenoid valve Clutches / Brakes (X = engaged)

Powershift ratio
Status Ratio Status Ratio L N P L M N O P Q
A Direct drive 1/1 A 1/1.698 12V 12V X X X
B Direct drive 1/1 B 1/1.423 12V X X X
C Direct drive 1/1 C 1/1.193 12V X X X
D Direct drive 1/1 D 1/1 X X X
Epicyclic gear
E 1.423/1 C 1/1.193 12V 12V X X X
train engaged
Epicyclic gear
F 1.423/1 D 1/1 12V X X X
train engaged

Fig. 6
Ratio A (1/1.698) (Fig. 6)

The multiplier epicyclic gear train is locked in rotation
by clutch Q. It operates at a ratio of 1/1.
The two brake pistons L and N are pressurised. The

ring gear and sun gear of the secondary epicyclic gear
train are fixed in relation to the unit housing. As a
result, the planet carrier of this gear train is fixed and
holds the sun gear of the first gear train.
planet carrier.

Fig. 7
Ratio B (1/1.423) (Fig. 7)


Belleville washer. The sun gear of the secondary epicy-
clic gear train rotates at the same speed as the
secondary shaft, driving the rotation of the planet
carrier and therefore the sun gear of the primary epicy-
clic gear train.
The secondary epicyclic gear train determines the rota-
The reduction is given by the speed of the primary
planet carrier and the speed of the primary sun gear.

Fig. 8
Ratio C (1/1.193) (Fig. 8)

Brake piston N is pressurised. Clutch M is locked by

the Belleville washer. The primary shaft drives the ring
gears of the two epicyclic gear trains. On the
secondary epicyclic gear train, the sun gear is fixed in
relation to the unit housing, and the ring gear drives the
secondary planet carrier and the primary sun gear.

Fig. 9
Ratio D (1/1) (Fig. 9)

The two brake pistons L and N are not pressurised.

The two clutches M and O are locked by the Belleville
washers. The primary and secondary ring gears
receive the input speed. The secondary sun gear is
integral with the secondary shaft, thus mechanically
locking the Dynashift module.
The input and output speeds are identical. The oper-
ating ratio is 1/1.

Fig. 10
Ratio E (1.423/1.193) (Fig. 10)

Brake P is locked, locking the multiplier sun gear to the
unit housing. The multiplier epicyclic gear train can
therefore turn.
It increases the input speed with a ratio of 1.423/1.
The position of the other clutches/brakes is identical to

ratio C.

Fig. 11
Ratio F (1.423/1) (Fig. 11)

Brake P is locked, locking the multiplier sun gear to the
unit housing. The multiplier epicyclic gear train can
therefore turn.
It increases the input speed with a ratio of 1.423/1.
The position of the other clutches/brakes is identical to

ratio D.

D . Preliminary operations
gearbox (see chapter 2)
3. Remove:
- either the complete gearbox (if servicing is to be
carried out on the whole transmission assembly)
- or only the Powershift module from the unit by
leaving the mechanical unit coupled to the rear
axle (if servicing is to be carried out on the
Powershift module or reverse shuttle only)
4. Remove (Fig. 12):
- the unit control hydraulic unit with its connecting
pipes
- the PTO shaft.
Fig. 12

E . Removing and refitting the

Powershift module
Removal
5. If the whole unit has been removed (operation 3),
split the Powershift module from the mechanical
unit.
vertically, as shown in Fig. 13. Use an M14 screw
or threaded rod, and weld on a nut to ensure a
120mm
M14
MA-05-03968A Fig. 13

7. Take out the two diametrically opposed screws

(A Fig. 14) and replace them with two shackles to
sling the unit.
8. Take out the 8 screws (B Fig. 14).
CAUTION : do not take out the screws (C Fig. 14).
They hold the housing (D Fig. 14) of the multiplier
module in place.
9. Sling the Powershift module of the gearbox using
the two shackles fitted at operation 7.
10. Make a mark (R Fig. 15) on the housings in order to
refit the modules correctly at reassembly.
11. Fit the Powershift module on a fixture positioned
on the forward clutch (Fig. 15).
12. Take out the screws (E Fig. 15) holding the cover
(93) on the housing (49).
13. Using a sling, raise and split the front part of the
unit (D) (multiplier module, Dynashift module)
(Fig. 14).
NOTE : During this operation, the rear brake, rear
clutch and front and rear planet carriers stay on the
PowerShuttle.
Fig. 14
Fig. 15

Refitting
14. Align the lubricating port (arrow) with a tooth on
each planet gear (Fig. 16).
15. Sling the Dynashift module as in operation 9.
16. Check for the presence of return springs (94) in the
cover (93) (Fig. 16).
17. Carry out operation 13 in reverse order, aligning
the two parts using the mark (R Fig. 15).
NOTE : Take care when inserting the planet gears
into the Dynashift module.
18. Fit the attachment screws of the cover (93) to the
Dynashift module, after smearing them with
Loctite 242 or equivalent. Tighten the screws to a
torque of 66 Nm.
19. Clean the mating faces (Fig. 17) then apply Loctite
510 or equivalent sealing product.
Fig. 16
20. Refit the O’ring (J Fig. 17). Smear it with grease
and fit it on the Powershift module.
21. Sling the reverse shuttle and Powershift module
assembly. Fit the assembly in the unit housing.
22. Lower the sling by aligning the locating pin (L) with J 510
the port (Fig. 17).
23. Refit the attachment screws (B) of the housing (D)
(Fig. 14).
MA-05-03980A
Fig. 17

F . Disassembling and reassembling

the Dynashift module
Disassembling the Dynashift module
24. Install the section with the reverse shuttle on a
suitable fixture, with the cover (93) and planet
carriers turned upwards (Fig. 18).
25. Remove the springs (94).
26. Take off the circlip (65) and remove the planet
carrier (74) fitted with the two planet gear assem-
blies.
27. Remove the snap ring (88) (Fig. 19).
28. Remove the bearing (78) and the spacer (77)
(Fig. 19).
29. Split the two planet carriers (74) and (76) (Fig. 19).
30. Take out screws (73) (Fig. 19). Fig. 18
31. Take off the bearing (67) and the sun gear pinion
(72).
32. If necessary, extract the snap ring (66).
Fig. 19

33. Remove clutch/brake O/N (Fig. 20).

34. Take off the hub (103) and spring washer (87).
35. Remove the screws (85), and take off the sun gear
pinion (84).
36. Take out the screws (110), and remove the cover
(86) of clutch O.
37. Mark the order of assembly, then remove:
- the brake discs (101)
- the intermediate plate (102)
- the clutch discs (105)
- the intermediate plates (104)
- the junction plate (95)
- the Belleville washer (97).
38. Remove the friction washer (98).
Fig. 20

39. Position the front housing of the Powershift

module on a suitable fixture, with the ring gears
turned upwards.
40. Extract the piston (89) fitted with its O’rings (90)
and (91).
41. Fit a pin drift or screwdriver into one of the holes in
the cover (59) to lock it in rotation, and loosen the
42. Remove the secondary ring gear (60).
43. Using tool 3376920M2 and two locally made
shims, compress the ring gear (63) (Fig. 22).
NOTA: Do not force the screws when tightening.
The tool must allow the spring washer (56) under
the bearing (57) to be compressed. The clearance
created allows the circlip (64) to be removed freely.
44. Extract the ring gear (63). If required, extract the
bearing (57) using a suitable extractor. Fig. 21
Fig. 22

45. Remove the spring washer (56) (Fig. 23).

46. Take out the shaft (39) and hub (40) (Fig. 23).
47. Fit a pin drift or screwdriver into one of the holes in
the cover (59) to lock it in rotation, and loosen the
48. Take off the cover (59).
49. Extract the three O’rings (112, 113 and 114) from
the housing ports (49) (Fig. 23).
50. Remove the attachment screws from the housing
(49). Remove the housing, pulling it off the top.
51. Extract the brake piston (54) fitted with its O’rings
(53) and (55).
52. Mark the order of assembly, then remove (Fig. 24):
Fig. 23
- the Belleville washer (42).
53. Remove and discard the O'rings (43) and (111)
(Fig. 24).
54. Remove the spring assembly (52).
55. Take off the washer (37) and the cover (41) from
clutch M (Fig. 25).
Fig. 24
Fig. 25

Reassembling the Dynashift module

56. Fit a washer (37) smeared with grease on the
housing (5).
57. On the housing (5), fit a brake disc (46), then
assemble clutch M/L in the following
order (Fig. 26):
- clutch cover (41)
- Belleville washer (42)
- junction plate (45)
- assembled hub (40) and pin (39)
- clutch discs (50) and intermediate plates (51)
NOTE: Ensure the Belleville washer is fitted the
correct way.
mately one hour in a transmission oil bath. Fig. 26
58. Fit the two other brake discs (46) with the interme-
diate plate (47) positioned in the middle.
59. Fit the springs (52) in the housings.
60. Fit two new oiled O’rings (53) and (55) in the
grooves of the piston (54). Fit the piston (54) in the
housing (49) using a plastic mallet (Fig. 27).
61. Place a new oiled O’ring (43) in the groove of the 54
housing (49) (Fig. 28).
62. Fit the O’rings (111), (112), (113) and (114) in the
clutch pilot ports (Fig. 28). 49
MA-05-03024A Fig. 27
Fig. 28

63. Fit the housing (49) to the housing (5), with the
piston (54) turned towards clutch / brake M/L.
Check for the presence and correct positioning of
the O’ring (111) for the pilot port (Fig. 29).
64. Fit the cover of the secondary ring gear (59) on
clutch / brake M/L (Fig. 30).
Fit the attachment screws (48) smeared with
Loctite 242 or equivalent. Tighten the screws to a
torque of 33 Nm.
65. Fit the spring washer (56) ( Fig. 30). if the bearing
(57) has been removed, fit a bearing on the ring
gear (63), then fir the assembly on top of the spring
washer (56).
66. Using tool 3376920M2 and two locally made
shims, repeat operation 43 to refit the circlip (64)
(Fig. 31).
Fig. 29
Fig. 30
Fig. 31

67. Refit the ring gear (60) on the cover (59). Fit the
attachment screws (62) smeared with Loctite 242
or equivalent (Fig. 32).
Tighten the screws to a torque of 16.5 Nm.
68. Fit the washer (98) smeared with grease on the
cover (93) (Fig. 33).
69. On the cover (93), fit a brake disc (101), then
assemble clutch O/N in the following
order (Fig. 33):
- clutch cover (96)
- Belleville washer (97)
- junction plate (95)
- hub (103)
- clutch discs (105) and intermediate plates (104)
NOTE: Ensure the Belleville washer is fitted the
correct way.
NOTE: If the brake discs and clutch discs have Fig. 32
mately one hour in a transmission oil bath.
70. Fit the clutch cover (86) and screws (110) smeared
with Loctite 242 or equivalent. Tighten the screws
to a torque of 33 Nm (Fig. 33 and Fig. 34). 85
71. Fit the sun gear (84) and screws (85) smeared with 103
Loctite 242 or equivalent. Tighten the screws to a 84
torque of 33 Nm (Fig. 33 and Fig. 34).
95
72. Fit the spring washer (87) on the sun gear (Fig. 34). 86
96
110
98
97
93
MA-05-03030A
Fig. 33
Fig. 34

73. Ensure the lubricating ports of the planet carriers

(74) and (76) are clean.
74. Fit the bearing (67) in the planet carrier (76), then
refit the sun gear pinion (72) fitted with the snap
ring (66) (Fig. 35).
75. Fit the screws (73) smeared with Loctite 242 or
equivalent. Tighten to a torque of 33 Nm (Fig. 35).
NOTE: To hold the planet carrier during tightening,
fit a long screwdriver into the planet carrier.
76. Assemble the two planet carriers (74) and (76).
Turn the planet gears (71) to insert the sun gear
(72) (Fig. 35).
77. Remove the spacer (77) then the bearing (78)
(Fig. 35).
79. On the shaft (106) refit the assembled double
planet carrier (74) (Fig. 36). Fig. 35
80. Refit the circlip (65).
NOTE: The spring washer (87) must be
compressed by pressing on the planet carrier (74)
to refit the circlip (65).
81. Assemble the Powershift module and the reverse
shuttle and refit the assembly in the housing
(see § E).
Fig. 36

G . Disassembling and reassembling

the speed multiplier module
Disassembling the speed multiplier
module
82. Disassemble the Dynashift module (see § F).
83. Using a sling and a suitable lifting tool, position the
speed multiplier module with the cover (3) turned
upwards (Fig. 37).
84. Fit protective service tool 3378012M2 on the input
shaft (1) to protect the lip seal (2) (Fig. 37).
85. Remove the attachment screws (A) from the cover
(3) (Fig. 37).
86. Remove the cover (3). Recover the springs (27).
87. If required, take off the lip seal (2).
Fig. 37
88. Remove clutch/brake assembly Q/P from the
housing (Fig. 38).
89. Remove the friction washer (9) (Fig. 38).
90. Remove the screws (8) and the cover (16) (Fig. 38).
91. Mark the order of assembly, then remove:
- the Belleville washers (17) and (18).
92. Remove the input shaft (1) with the bearing (6). If
necessary, remove the bearing (6).
93. Extract the piston (30) fitted with its seals (31) and
(32).
94. Remove the planet carrier assembly (26) and
planet gears (23) (Fig. 39).
95. Take off the ring gear (29 Fig. 39) with the bearings Fig. 38
(34) and (38) and the bronze ring (35). If necessary,
remove the bearing (38) from the ring gear.
Fig. 39

Reassembling the speed multiplier

module
96. Ensure all parts are in good condition. Ensure the
clutch pilot ports and lubricating ports are clean.
97. Fit an O’ring (4) smeared with grease on the cover
(3) of the speed multiplier module (Fig. 40).
98. In the cover (3) fit a new lip seal (2) greased on the
inside and oiled on the outside (Fig. 40).
99. Fit the springs (27) in the housings. Fit a disc (13)
on the cover (3) (Fig. 40).
100.Assemble clutch/brake assembly Q/P. Fit parts in
the following order (Fig. 41):
- the previously greased washer (9) Fig. 40
- the bearing (6)
- the Belleville washers (17) and (18)
- a disc (13) 11 8
- a second disc (13) 13 16
- the input shaft (1)
- the stacked discs (24)/intermediate plates (25) 14
12
- the clutch cover (16) with the sun gear pinion
(14). 18 25
NOTE: Ensure the Belleville washers are fitted the
correct way.
6 17 24
101.Fit the screws (8) smeared with Loctite 242 or
equivalent. Tighten to a torque of 33 Nm.
7
102.Fit clutch/brake Q/P in the cover (3). 1
103.Fit the planet carrier (26) on the sun gear (14). Fit
9
the bearing (34) and ring (35) (Fig. 42).
104.Mark the cover (3) to record the position of a planet MA-05-03020A Fig. 41
gear. The mark will be used at reassembly in oper-
ation 108.
Fig. 42

105.In the housing (5), fit the ring gear (29) with the
bearing (38) (Fig. 43).
106.Fit two new oiled O’rings (31) and (32) in the
grooves of the piston (30). Fit the piston (30) in the
housing (5) using a plastic mallet.
107.Visible mark the housing level with a notch in the
piston (Fig. 43).
108.Fit the housing (5) with the ring gear and brake
piston on top of the cover (3), clutch/brake Q/P,
planet carrier (26) assembly assembled at opera-
tion 103 (Fig. 43).
NOTE: Lower the housing carefully (5) to engage
the planet gears (23) in the notches provided on
the brake piston. For this puspose, align the marks
made at operations 104 and 107.
109.Fit and tighten the attachment screws of the cover
(3) smeared with Loctite 242 or equivalent.
Tighten to a torque of 29 - 37 Nm.
110.Reassemble the Dynashift module (see § F).
Fig. 43

H . Disassembling and reassembling

the planet gears
REMINDER: The planet gear pins are fitted already tight-
ened in the thickest part of the planet carriers.
The pins comprise lubricating ports that must be posi-
tioned facing the corresponding ports on the planet
carrier (Fig. 44).
Disassembly
NOTE: The disassembly principle is the same for all
planet carriers. The following example applies to planet
gears in the primary epicyclic gear train of the
Dynashift module.
111.Place the planet carier (74) into a vice equipped
with protective jaws. MA-05-03033A
Fig. 44
112.Using a drift and a mallet, drive out the pins (69)
from the planet carrier (74) by striking the thicker
side of the planet carrier.
113.Take out the planet gear and recover the friction 75
washers (68) and bearing needles (70).
74
69
Reassembly 70
114.Clean all the parts, check their condition and
replace any that are defective.
68
115.Ensure the lubricating ports of the planet carriers
and pins are clean.
NOTE: The pins of the planet gears (69) are blocked 71
by plugs (75). Check the plugs are present. Fit new
ones if any are missing.
116.Prepare the planet gears. Fit the bearing needles in
the planet gears with miscible grease. MA-05-03031A
117.Place the planet carrier on a suitable fixture. Fit a Fig. 45

planet gear (71) with the needle bearing (70), and
the two friction bearings (68).
118.Insert the pin (69), then fit it home with a mallet
and a bronze drift. Insert the pin until it is flush with
the planet carrier surface.
NOTE: This operation can be carried out with a
hydraulic press.
119.Check the planet gears rotate freely.

I . Final operations
120.Refit the PTO shaft (33)
121.Clean and check the condition of the gearbox
hydraulic control (Fig. 46).
122.Check for the presence of O’rings in the hydraulic
unit ports (Fig. 47).
NOTE: If the O’rings have been replaced, oil them
slightly.
123.Apply Loctite 510 or an equivalent sealing product
to the mating face of the unit (Fig. 47).
124.Refit the connecting pipes, then the hydraulic
control unit.
125.Fit the attachment screws (Fig. 47).
126.Assemble the gearbox and the engine and rear
Fig. 46
Fig. 47

J . Service tools
- 3376920M2 - Ring gear compression tool
(Fig. 48)
- 3378012M2 - Input shaft lip seal protector tool
(Fig. 49)
Fig. 48
Fig. 49

GBA25 - Robotic mechanical gearbox
5C13 - GBA25 - Robotic mechanical gearbox
CONTENTS
A . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
C . Description and kinematics of ratios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
D . Preliminary operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
E . Removing and refitting the primary and secondary shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
F . Disassembling and reassembling the primary and secondary shafts . . . . . . . . . . 20
G . Shimming the primary and secondary shafts in the housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
H . Adjusting the selector rails and forks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
I . Adjusting the safety finger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
J . Assembling the intermediate speed sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
K . Final operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
L . Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Massey Ferguson 6400 - Issue 4.b 5C13.1

5C13.2 Massey Ferguson 6400 - Issue 4.b

A . General
The GBA25 gearbox is fitted to tractors with Dyna 6
transmission. This transmission is entirely automatic.
It allows shifting between all the ratios without
declutching.
The gearbox is divided into two parts:
- the Powershift module, with six ratios for shifting
under load (see relevant section)
- the robotically-controlled mechanical gearbox with
four ratios.
The transmission assembly is controlled electronically

by an Auto 5 calculator (see chapter 11).
Fig. 1
B . Operating principle
Lubrication
The GBA25 gearbox has 24 ratios. These are provided
by 6 Powershift module ratios for shifting under load, The lubricating oil coming from the 5 bar valve of the
and 4 mechanical gearbox ratios. tractor is sent to the gearbox lower shaftline and upper
shaftline.
The mechanical gearbox ratios are controlled like a
ratio for shifting under load. A network of internal channels directs the oil to the
elements requiring lubrication.
The ratios can be controlled manually or automatically
using Autodrive mode.
Two levers control the ratios in manual mode:
- Powercontrol lever located under the steering wheel
(1 Fig. 1)
- gear shift lever located on the armrest (2 Fig. 1).
The mechanical gearbox is located between the

Powershift unit and rear axle. It comprises two shafts
(upper and lower shaftlines) on which four gear trains
of pinions with helical teeth rotate.
Input drive arrives from the PowerShuttle and is trans-
mitted to the upper shaftline.
Output drive is transmitted via the lower shaftline to a
creeper unit or directly to the bevel gear drive pinion.

Selecting ratios
Ratios are selected using two synchronisers, one
single cone and one double cone. Each synchroniser is
engaged individually.
The synchronisers are controlled by two selector rails
and two forks. Each selector rail has a double-acting
piston, allowing ratio shifting.
The selector rail pistons are controlled hydraulically via
the tractor 20 bar circuit (arrow Fig. 2).
Four solenoid valves (L52, L53, L54, L55, see Fig. 2)

located on the right-hand side of the gearbox control
selector rail movement.
Four switches (L56, L57, L58, L59, see Fig. 2) inform
the calculator of the selector rail positions.
NOTE: The switches are pressed in by pins (130 Fig. 5).
Fig. 2
Each ratio has a corresponding solenoid valve and

switch (see table).
Solenoid valves Switches

L52 L53 L54 L55 L56 L57 L58 L59
Neutral 0 V or 12 V 12 V
Range 1 12 V 0V 0V 0V 0V 12 V 12 V 12 V
Range 2 0V 12 V 0V 0V 12 V 0V 12 V 12 V
Range 3 0V 0V 12 V 0V 12 V 12 V 0V 12 V
Range 4 0V 0V 0V 12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V 0V

Parts list (54) Sliding coupler

(55) Ball
(1) Primary shaft
(56) Pressure element
(2) Bearing cone
(57) Nut lock
(3) Bearing cup
(58) Spring
(4) Shims
(59) Flange
(5) Gearbox housing
(60) Hub
(6) Cover
(61) Ball
(7) Shims
(8) Bearing cup
(63) Ring
(9) Bearing cone
(64) Spring
(10) O’ring
(65) Nut lock
(11) Spring
(66) Cone
(67) Flange
(68) Snap ring
(14) Spacer
(69) Hub
(15) Circlip
(70) Sliding coupler
(16) Washer
(71) PTO shaft
(17) Shims
(72) Fork
(18) Circlip
(73) Selector rail
(19) Washer
(74) O’ring
(20) Shims
(75) O’ring
(21) Bearing cup
(76) Circlip
(22) Bearing cone
(77) Sleeve
(23) Bearing cone
(78) O’ring
(24) Bearing cup
(79) O’ring
(25) Pinion
(80) Plug
(26) Double pinion
(81) O’ring
(27) Bearing cup
(82) Circlip
(28) Bearing cone
(83) O’ring
(29) Bearing cone
(84) Circlip
(30) Bearing cup
(85) Plug
(31) Pinion
(86) O’ring
(32) Needle bearing
(87) Circlip
(33) Washer
(88) Sleeve
(34) Circlip
(89) O’ring
(35) Circlip
(90) O’ring
(36) Spacer
(91) Snap ring
(37) Needle bearing
(92) Piston
(38) Needle bearing
(93) Spring
(39) Spacer
(94) O’ring
(40) Circlip
(95) O’ring
(41) Shims
(96) Fork
(42) Circlip
(97) Cotter pin
(43) Pinion
(98) Selector rail
(44) Spacer
(99) Castellated nut
(45) Pinion
(100)Screw
(46) Bearing cone
(101)Castellated nut
(47) Bearing cup
(102)Plate
(48) Pinion
(103)Screw
(49) Bush
(104)Rod
(50) Bearing cone
(105)Locknut
(51) Bearing cup
(106)Rod
(52) Deflector
(107)Screw
(53) Ring

(110)Screw
(111)Plate
(112)Circlip
(113)Shims
(114)Bearing cup
(115)Bearing cone
(116)Pinion
(117)Bearing cone
(118)Bearing cup
(119)Pinion
(120)Circlip
(121)Shaft
(122)Bearing
(123)Powershift module cover
(124)Reverse pinion-hub
(125)Cotter pin
(126)Plug
(127)Plug
(128)O’ring
(129)O’ring
(130)Pin
(131)Reverse pitch nut

Primary and secondary shafts - overall view
5 6 18 19 20 26 27 28 29 30 33 34 35 36 37 38 48 49 50 51 52 53
54
55
56
57
4 58
2 59
1 48
60
71
70
42 61
7
41 62
8
39 63
9
40 64
10
65
11
66
12
67
13
43
14 68
69
15
16
17
MA-05-03038A
21 22 23 24 25 31 32 43 44 45 46 47
Fig. 3

Reverse mainshaft and synchroniser control - overall view
72 125 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83
99
100
101
102 13
103
124
104 25
123
105
122
87 131
121
86 106
120
85 107
119
128 108
84 109
5 6 112 113 114 115 116 117 118

91 88 89 90 92 129 93 94 95 96 97 98 6 110 111
MA-05-03039A
Fig. 4

Robotic mechanical gearbox - exploded view

6 99 101 102 100
113 103
114 107
115
116 4
110
117 3
118 2 111
1 108
18 109
19 104
123 20 130 105
27
106
28
122 30 131
119 33
120 34
26 12
121 35 10
36 29 11
37 8
112
38 9
39 15 7
40 82 17
54 83 14
56 81 22
55 80 23
60 78 24
42 77 16 62
57
59 79 61
31 21
49 76 69
32
48 73 70
13 25 63
75 65
74 66
72 125
67
68
43
5 44
98
50 45
96
51 46
97
52 47 95
53 94
87
93
89
88 92
129
85 91
128 90
126 84 86
MA-05-03040A
127 Fig. 5


C . Description and kinematics of

ratios 1 N
The robotic gearbox allows four ratios to be obtained

with only four gear trains, two shafts and two synchro-
nisers.
Kinematics (Fig. 6)
Range 1
1
gear synchronisers, then the third train.
Range 2
The reduction is carried out on the first gear train. The 2 N
2nd gear synchronisers secure the 2nd gear pinion to
the secondary shaft.
Range 3
The reduction is carried out on the third gear train. The
primary shaft is secured to the 3rd gear pinion by the
3rd gear synchronisers.
Range 4
2
The primary shaft is secured to the 4th gear pinion by
the 4th gear synchronisers.
3 3
NOTE: In forward position, input drive comes directly
from the PowerShuttle to the primary shaft (1).
In reverse position, drive comes from the Power-
Shuttle via the pinions (124), (119) and (116) and the
shaft (121). It enters via the second driven pinion (25)
which is constantly meshed to the primary shaft (1)
(see Fig. 4).
4 4
MA-05-03947A N
Fig. 6

Primary shaft (Fig. 3, Fig. 4 and Fig. 5) Synchronisers

The primary shaft (1) is splined to the PowerShuttle The single cone synchroniser located on the primary
forward hub. It is supported by two taper roller bear- shaft (1) allows shifting between the third and fourth
ings (3) (4) and (50) (51) It is supported with shims (4). gears. Its hub (60) is splined to the shaft (1). It is held
The PTO shaft (71) is inserted through the centre of in position by a circlip (42) on one side and by the
the primary shaft (1). This cavity in the shaft (1) also bearing cone (50) fitted tight on the shaft (1).
serves as a channel for lubricating oil. By moving the slider (54), the shaft (1) is locked either:
- with the double pinion (26) (3rd)
The first and second driving pinion is cut into the - with the pinion (48) (4th).
primary shaft (1).
The double pinion (26) turns idle on the shaft (1) and is The double cone synchroniser located on the
supported by two taper roller bearings (27) (28) and secondary shaft (13) allows shifting between the first
(29) (30) and two needle bearings (37) (38). This pinion and second gears. Its hub (69) is integral with the
is supported on the shaft by shims (20). pinion (25). It is held in positio by the snap ring (68).
The fourth driving pinion turns idle on the shaft (1). It is By moving the slider (70), the shaft (13) is locked
supported by a lubricated bush (49). either:
- with the idle pinion (31) (1st)
Secondary shaft - or with the pinion (43) (2nd).
The secondary shaft (13) turns on two taper roller bear-
ings (8)(9) and (46)(47). Bores in the centre of the shaft Selecting ratios (Fig. 4)
(13) ensure proper lubrication. It is supported with
The synchronisers are controlled conventionally by
shims (7).
forks (72) and (96) and selector rails (73) and (98).
The pinion (25) turns idle on the shaft (13) and is
The selector rails are controlled hydraulically. The
supported by two taper roller bearings (21) (22) and
selector rails are controlled by double-acting pistons.
(23) (24) and a needle bearings (32).
On the selector rail (98) that controls the 1st and 2nd
The pinion (25) acts as a bearing to the idler pinion (31).
gear synchroniser, the piston (92) is damped by a
This pinion (31) is in direct contact with the pinion (25).
spring (93) to smoothen shifting between ranges 1
A layer of oil ensures the mating faces are lubricated.
and 2.
The pinions (43) and (45) are splined to the shaft (13).
The selector rails are adjusted by tightening or loos-
They are separated by a spacer (44).
ening the castellated nuts (99)(101) and (108)(109).
Once adjusted, the stops are held in rotation by screws
(100) and (107).
A safety fool-proof device comprising two rods
(104)(106) and a locknut (105) prevents the selector
rails from being engaged simultaneously. When a
selector rail is engaged, the fool-proof device locks the
other one in a groove.

D . Preliminary operations
2. Split the tractor in order to remove only the robotic
gearbox (if servicing only concerns the robotic
gearbox) or the complete Dyna 6 unit (then split
the two housings) (see chapter 2):
3. Remove (Fig. 7):
- the PTO shaft.
Fig. 7

E . Removing and refitting the

primary and secondary shafts
Removing the primary and secondary
shafts
vertically, as shown in Fig. 8. Use an M14 screw or
threaded rod, and weld on a nut to ensure a
5. Position the unit on legs, with the cover (6) on top.
6. Take off the cover plates (102) and (111). Unscrew
the castellated nuts (99)(101) and (108)(109)
(Fig. 9).
7. Retighten the safety finger rod (106) to its
maximum (Fig. 9).
120mm
M14
MA-05-03043A
Fig. 8
Fig. 9

8. Remove the two plugs (126) and (127) (Fig. 10).

9. Drive out the two cotter pins (97) and (125) holding
the forks on the selector rails (Fig. 10).
IMPORTANT: The cotter pins fall into the gearbox.
They must be recovered when the gearbox is
disassembled.
10. Remove the circlip to the rear of the gearbox
(84 Fig. 11).
11. Using a plastic hammer, remove the selector rail
(98) towards the rear of the gearbox (Fig. 11).
NOTE: The rail control piston assembly is fitted to
the rail and is removed with it. Part of the sleeve
remains in the cylinder. If it must be removed, take
off the circlip (87) and extract the sleeve.
12. Remove the attachment screws (A) from the cover
(6) (Fig. 12).
13. Fit two screws (B Fig. 12) in the threaded holes in Fig. 10
order to lift off the cover (6).
14. Take off cover (6).
15. Recover the bearing cups (3), (8) and (114) and the
shims (4), (7) and (113).
Fig. 11
Fig. 12

16. Recover the lubricating pipe (12), the seal (10) and
the spring (11) (Fig. 13).
17. Remove circlip (82) (Fig. 14).
18. Using a plastic hammer, remove the selector rail
(73) towards the front of the gearbox (Fig. 14).
NOTE: The rail control piston assembly is fitted to
the rail and is removed with it. Part of the sleeve
remains in the cylinder. If it must be removed, take
off the circlip (76) and extract the sleeve.
Disassembling and reassembling the selector

rail (98) (ranges 1 and 2)
19. Clamp the rail (98) in a vice equipped with protec-
tive jaws (Fig. 15).
20. Tighten the two pistons (92) in the vice to
compress the spring.
21. Remove a snap ring (91). Fig. 13
22. Remove the pistons (92) and the spring (93).
23. Replace the seals (129) on the rail (98).
24. Carry out operations 19 to 23 in reverse order to
assemble the selector rail.
Fig. 14
Fig. 15

25. Turn the forks (72) and (96) inwards in the gearbox
to allows them to enter the housing (Fig. 17).
26. Fit service tool ref. 3378804M1 in the primary and
secondary shafts as in Fig. 16.
27. Sling the tool using a hoist or a suitable lifting
system. Extract the two shafts (1) and (13) from 3378804M1
the gearbox housing.
NOTE: Take care when the 1st/2nd gear synchro-
niser is passing beside the reverse shaft support.
NOTE: The total weight of the two shafts is approx-
imately 44 kg (lower shaftline = 27 kg, upper shaft-
line = 17 kg).
28. Remove the assembly from a workbench. Remove
the service tool and split the two shafts.
29. If required, extract the bearing cups (47), (51) and
(118) in the gearbox housing.
30. If necessary, remove deflector (52).
1
13
MA-05-03052A
Fig. 16
Fig. 17

Refitting the primary and secondary shafts

31. Ensure all parts are clean and in good condition.
Check the ratio lubricating and control ports are
clean.
32. Replace all the O’rings, greasing them lightly
before assembly.
NOTE: Do not forget to replace the O’rings (74),
(75), (78), (90), (94) and (95) in the selector rail
bores inside the housing.
33. Check the presence of the bearing cups (47), (51)
and (118) in the housing (5).
34. Assemble the shafts (1) and (13); Fit service tool
ref. 3378804M1 as in operation 26 (Fig. 18).
35. Fit the forks (72) and (96) on the synchroniser
sliders. The offset side of the fork must be turned
towards the front of the tractor (Fig. 18).
NOTE: The two forks are identical. They have the Fig. 18
same reference.
36. Fit the two shafts in the housing. At the same time,
fit the reverse transfer pinion (116) fitted with the
two bearing cones (115) and (117) (Fig. 18).
NOTE: Ensure the pinion (116) is positioned
correctly. The marks on the teeth should be turned
towards the bottom of the housing (Fig. 19).
37. Refit the lubricating pipe (12) fitted with a new
O’ring (10) and the spring (11) (Fig. 13).
38. If the sleeve (77) and circlip (76) have been
removed, grease the sleeve, insert it into the
cylinder, then fit the circlip (76).
39. Thread the selector rail (73) with the lightly greased
piston assembly into its housing (Fig. 20).
NOTE: To help insert the selector rail into the fork,
use a pin drift to hold the fork in place.
40. Fit the plug (80) fitted with two new O’rings (81)
(83). Fit the circlip (82) (Fig. 20). Fig. 19
Fig. 20

41. If the sleeve (88) and circlip (87) have been

removed, grease the sleeve, insert it into the
cylinder, then fit the circlip (87).
42. Thread the selector rail (98) with the lightly greased
piston assembly into its housing (Fig. 21).
NOTE: To help insert the selector rail into the fork,
use a pin drift to hold the fork in place.
43. Fit the plug (85) fitted with two new O’rings (86)
(128). Fit the circlip (84) (Fig. 21).
44. Align the holes in the forks (72) and (96) with those
of the corresponding selector rails (Fig. 22).
45. Insert new cotter pins to attach the forks to the
selector rails. Refit the plugs (126) and (127)
(Fig. 22).
46. Check the safety finger is in position and retighten
the rods (104) and (106) to their maximum tight-
ness (Fig. 23) Fig. 21
47. Fit the four switch thrust pins (130) with a bit of
grease to hold them in position (Fig. 23).
48. In the cover (6) fit the bearing cones (3), (8) and
(114) smeared with grease to hold them in posi-
tion. Also fit:
- the original thickness of shims if the roller bear-
ings have not been replaced
- the calculated thickness of shims if the roller
bearings have been replaced (see § G).
49. Refit the cover (6).
50. Fit the attachment screws (A Fig. 12) on the
cover (6) smeared with Loctite 242. Tighten to
57-77 Nm.
51. Refit the bush (52 Fig. 21) with the lubricating hole
turned towards the top of the gearbox. Fix it in
position with four punchmarks.
52. Adjust the selector rails and forks (see § H).
53. Adjust the safety finger (see § I).
Fig. 22
Fig. 23


the primary and secondary shafts
54. Remove the primary and secondary shafts
(see § E).
Disassembling the primary shaft

NOTE: The bearing cones (2) and (50) are fitted tight on
the shaft.
55. Position the shaft on a work surface with a suitable
fixture to hold the shaft in a vertical position.
56. Take off the ring (53) at the end of the shaft (rear
axle end) (Fig. 24).
57. Fit a shouldered washer (arrow Fig. 25) at the end Fig. 24
of the shaft (1) in order to fit an extractor.
58. Using the extractor, pull the pinion (48) and remove
the bearing (50) and pinion (48) (Fig. 25).
59. Recover the lubricating bush (49).
60. Remove the synchroniser assembly (60 Fig. 25).
Remove the circlip (42).
61. Take off the circlip (18) to remove the double
pinion (26) (Fig. 26).
NOTE: The bearings (37) and (38) stay in the double
pinion (26).
The bearing cones (28) and (29) stay on the shaft
(1)
62. Recover the washer (19) and shims (20) (Fig. 26).
63. Remove the bearing cup (30) from the pinion (26).
Check whether or not there is a shim behind the
cup (Fig. 26).
Fig. 25
38
37
30
26
29
28
18
19
1
20
MA-05-03063A Fig. 26

64. Remove snap ring (40). Take off the needle bear-
ings (38) and (37) with the spacers (36) and (39).
Remove snap ring (35) if required (Fig. 27).
65. Remove the circlip (34), washer (33) and bearing
cones (28) and (29).
66. If necessary, remove the bearing cone (2).
Reassembling the primary shaft

67. Pair up the cones (28)(29) and cups (27)(30).
68. Fit the bearing cones (28) and (29) on the shaft (1).
Next install the washer (33) and circlip (34)
(Fig. 28).
NOTE: They are mounted diametrically opposed.
The cones should be positioned back to back.
69. Fit the cup (30) in the double pinion (26) (Fig. 28).
70. Check the presence of the snap ring (35) in the Fig. 27
double pinion (Fig. 27).
71. Fit the spacer (36), greased needle bearings (37)
and (38), and spacer (39) in the pinion (26) (Fig. 27).
72. Fit snap ring (40) (Fig. 27). 1
73. Slide the shaft (1) into the pinion (26).
28
74. Fit the washer (19) and circlip (18) (Fig. 29).
29
NOTE: Do not insert shims to measure the clear-
33
ance during this operation.
Shimming the pinion (26)

75. In order to position the bearings correctly, push
and pull the pinion (26) while turning it.
76. Place a dial gauge feeler pin on the surface of the
34 30
pinion (26).
77. Measure the clearance A (Fig. 29) at three points.
Calculate the average of the three readings. 26
78. Remove the circlip (18) and the washer (19)
(Fig. 29). MA-05-03065A
Fig. 28
79. Between the cup (27) and washer (19) insert the
thickness of shims required to obtain clearance
A (Fig. 29) :
A = -0.05 to 0.05 mm
Shim to the maximum tolerance (low preload). 27 26
18
19
MA-05-03091A
Fig. 29

Shimming the synchroniser overlap

80. Fit the thickness of shims set at operation 79.
81. Fit the circlip (42) holding the synchroniser in posi-
tion (60) (Fig. 30).
82. Using a depth gauge, measure distance B
between the mating face of the synchroniser (60)
on the circlip (42) and the mating face of the pinion
(26) (Fig. 30).
83. Ensure distance B does not exceed 16.33 mm:
- If B<16.33: the distance is correct.
- If B>16.33: Take out one 0.40 mm shim (20)
used to shim the pinion (26), and place it
between the pinion (26) and the cup (30)
(Fig. 31).
NOTE: There are no intermediate shim sizes; use
either the 0.40 mm shim or no shim.
Fig. 30
84. Once the shimming is complete, refit the synchro-
niser (60).
NOTE: Make a paint mark to correctly align the
lubricating ports on the synchroniser hub and the
shaft (1). 20
85. Refit the bush (49) and pinion (48) (Fig. 32). 0,40
86. Using a locally made tool fit home the bearing
cones (2) and (50) on the shaft (1) (Fig. 32).
30 26
MA-05-03092A
Fig. 31
Fig. 32

Disassembling the secondary shaft

NOTE: take care not to pull the pinion (25) or the
synchroniser will come apart. The bearing cone (9) is
idle-mounted on shaft (1)
87. Remove the bearing cone (9) and the spacer (14)
(Fig. 33).
88. Fit the shaft vertically on the pinion (25). Pull the
shaft (13) upwards with the pinions (43) and (45),
taking care not to disassemble the synchroniser
(69) (Fig. 33).
89. Recover the needle bearing (32) (Fig. 33).
90. Remove snap ring (68). Remove the synchroniser
(69) and pinion (31) (Fig. 34).
91. Turn over the pinion (25). Take off the circlip (15),
washer (16) and shims (17) (Fig. 35).
92. Remove and pair up the bearings (21)(22) and
(23)(24) (Fig. 35). Fig. 33
Fig. 34
Fig. 35

93. Using an extractor, pull the pinion (45) and remove

the bearing (46) (Fig. 36).
94. Remove the spacer (44) and pinion (43) (Fig. 36).
Reassembling the secondary shaft

95. On the shaft (13) fit (Fig. 36):
- pinion (43)
- spacer (44)
- pinion (45).
96. Fit home the bearing cone (46) using a locally made
tool.
97. In the pinion (25) fit the roller bearings (21)(22) and
(23)(24) (Fig. 37).
98. Fit the washer (16) then the circlip (15). Do not fit
shims (17) (Fig. 37).
99. Using a set of shims, measure the clearance C Fig. 36
between the circlip (15) and the washer (16)
(Fig. 37).
100.Between the bearing (21) and washer (16) insert
the thickness of shims (17) required to obtain clear-
ance C (Fig. 38):
C = -0.05 to 0.05 mm
Shim to the maximum tolerance (low preload).
Fig. 37
15
16
21
25
MA-05-03093A
Fig. 38

101.On the pinion (25), refit the pinion (31), its inner
surface lightly greased (Fig. 39).
102.Reassemble the synchroniser (69) on the splines
of the pinion (25) (Fig. 39).
NOTE: Make a paint mark to correctly align the
lubricating ports on the synchroniser hub and the
pinion (25).
103.Fit snap ring (68).
104.Fit the previously greased bearing (32) (Fig. 39).
105.Position the pinion (25) on a support, with the
synchroniser turned upwards (Fig. 40).
106.Thread on the shaft (13) assembled at operations
95 and 96, paying special attention when inserting
it through the needle bearing (32).
107.Fit the spacer (14) and bearing cone (9) on the shaft
(13) (Fig. 41).
NOTE: Ensure the spacer shoulder is turned the Fig. 39
right way (Fig. 41).
13
43
67
32
25
MA-05-03073A
Fig. 40
14 13
9
MA-05-03074A
Fig. 41

G . Shimming the primary and

secondary shafts in the housing
Shimming the primary shaft and reverse
transfer pinion
108.Check the presence of the bearing cups (47), (51)
and (118) in the gearbox housing (5) (Fig. 42).
109.In the gearbox housing (5) position the primary
shaft (1) assembled at operations 67 to 86. At the
same time fit the reverse transfer pinion (116).
110.In the cover (6) fit the bearing cups (3) and (114)
(assembled without shims) with grease to keep
them in the cover.
111.Refit the cover (6) on the housing (5). Fit and
tighten the cover attachment screws (A Fig. 43).
112.Place a dial gauge feeler pin at the end of the Fig. 42
primary shaft (1). In order to correctly seat the
bearings, pull and push hard on the shaft while
turning it (Fig. 43).
NOTE: To pull the shaft, use a lever positioned
under the gearbox.
113.Measure the clearance with the dial gauge. Calcu-
late the thickness of shims required to obtain
preload P1:
P1 = 0.05 to 0.10 mm
If possible, shim to the maximum tolerance.
Example if the clearance measured is 0.73:

0,73 + 0,05 = 0,78
0,73 + 0,10 = 0,83
The required thickness of shims is between 0.78
and 0.83, and should be as close as possible to
0.83.
Fig. 43
114.Place the dial gauge feeler pin on the reverse
transfer pinion (Fig. 44).
115.Using a locally made bent rod (see Fig. 44), pull the
pinion to correctly seat the bearings.
116.Measure the clearance with the dial gauge. Calcu-
preload P2:
P2 = 0.05 to 0.10 mm
117.Remove the screws (A) and the cover (6) (Fig. 44).
118.Take out the primary shaft and reverse transfer
pinion.
Fig. 44

Shimming the secondary shaft

119.Check the presence of the bearing cup (47) in the
gearbox housing (5) (Fig. 42).
120.In the gearbox housing (5) position the secondary
shaft (13) assembled at operations 95 to 107.
121.In the cover (6) fit the bearing cups (8) (assembled
without shims) with grease to keep them in the
cover (6).
122.Refit the cover (6) on the housing (5). Fit and
tighten the cover attachment screws (A Fig. 45).
123.Place a dial gauge feeler pin at the end of the
secondary shaft (13). In order to correctly seat the
bearings, pull and push hard on the shaft while
turning it (Fig. 43).
NOTE: To pull the shaft, use a lever positioned
under the gearbox.
124.Measure the clearance with the dial gauge. Calcu- Fig. 45
preload P3:
P3 = 0.05 to 0.15 mm
125.Refit the shafts in the housing and fit the cover

with the calculated shim thicknesses (see § E).

H . Adjusting the selector rails and

forks
To carry out this adjustment, the primary and
secondary shafts must be correctly supported and
shimmed in the housing.
Parts list (Fig. 46)

(L52) Range 1 control solenoid valve
(L56) Range 1 switch
(L58) Range 3 switch Fig. 46
126.Fit solenoid valves L52, L53, L54 et L55 (Fig. 46).
127.Locally make a union to supply the control circuit
with compressed air at a 4 bar maximum pressure
(arrow Fig. 47).
128.Connect solenoid valve control service tool
ref. 3378805M1 (Fig. 47).
Fig. 47

Checking the selector rails before their

adjustment
Before adjusting the travel of the selector rails, it is
necessary to check that their movement remains
within the allowed tolerances.
129.Using a depth gauge and a suitable fixture, check

the following dimensions (see the table) (Fig. 48):
- X1: distance between face F of the housing and
the end of selector rail with the range 1 or 3
engaged,
- Y: distance between face F of the housing and
the end of the selector rail in neutral position,
- Z1: distance between face F of the housing and
engaged. X1
Ranges 1 and 2 Ranges 3 and 4

X1 20.785 ± 1 21.830 ± 0.8
Y 32.215 ± 1.245 33.213 ± 1.093
Z1 43.625 ± 0.9 44.425 ± 0.8
If the measured dimensions are out-of-tolerances,

manually turn the gears with the reverse driving pinion
(see Fig. 50), then repeat the measurements. If the
dimensions are still incorrect, check that the selector
rails and synchronisers have been fitted correctly. N
Z1
MA-05-03103A
Fig. 48

Adjusting the selector rails

Adjusting the selector rail (98) (ranges 1 and
2)
130.Set the rail (98) to neutral.
NOTE: To set a selector rail to neutral, the two sole-
noid valves that control it must be powered.
131.Fit the castellated nut without tightening (109).
132.Engage range 2. (Supply L53) (Fig. 49).
133.Tighten the nut (109) up against the cover (6)
(Fig. 49).
134.Reposition the selector rail to neutral. Tighten the
nut (109) by 1.5 or 2 extra notches.
135.With paint, mark the position of the nut (109) in
relation to the cover (6).
Fig. 49
NOTE: The synchroniser may not fully engage when
the gearbox is not running.
If this is the case, position the shaft (121) and reverse
transfer pinion (119) and slowly run the gearbox while
engaging the range (Fig. 50).
Fig. 50

136.Fit the castellated nut (108). Screw it on until it is

almost touching the nut (109) (Fig. 51).
NOTE: Ensure the nut (109) stays in its set position
and that the paint marks are not removed.
137.Install the plate (111). Fit the screws (107)
smeared with Loctite 242 or equivalent (Fig. 51).
Tighten to a torque of 29 - 37 Nm.
138.Engage range 1. (Supply L52) (Fig. 52).
139.Unscrew the nut (108) fitted home against the
cover (111).
140.Reposition the selector rail to neutral. Unscrew the
nut (108) by 1.5 or 2 extra notches.
141.With paint, mark the nut (108) aligned with the
mark on the cover (6) as in operation 135.
142.Insert the screw (107) to lock the nuts (108) and
(109), aligning the marks made at operations 135
and 141 (Fig. 53). Fig. 51
143.Check for correct operation. The nuts should effec-
tively act as a stop (Fig. 53).
144.Definitely fit the screw (107) lightly smeared with
Loctite 242 or equivalent. Tighten to a torque of 12
- 16 Nm.
Adjusting the selector rail (73) (ranges 3 and

4)
145.Repeat operations 130to 144 with the selector rail
(73) and nuts (99) and (101).
Fig. 52
Fig. 53

Checking the selector rails after their

adjustment
After adjusting the travel of the selector rails, it is
necessary to check that their movement remains
within the allowed tolerances.
146.Using a depth gauge and a suitable fixture, check

the following dimensions (see the table) (Fig. 54):
- X2: distance between face F of the housing and
engaged,
- Z2: distance between face F of the housing and
engaged.
X2
147.Check the full travel of the forks; for this purpose,
calculate Z2-X2 (see the table).

X2 21.255 ± 1.095 22.300 ± 0.895
Z2 43.155 ± 0.995 43.955 ± 0.895
Z2 - X2 21.9 ± 1.4 21.655 ± 1.275
If the measured dimensions are out-of-tolerances,

manually turn the gears with the reverse driving pinion
(see Fig. 50), then repeat the measurements. If the
dimensions are still incorrect, check that the selector
rails and synchronisers have been fitted correctly.
Checking the switches for correct operation Z2

148.Check for the presence of the pins (130). Fit limit MA-05-03104A Fig. 54
switches L56, L57, L58 and L59. Tighten the
switches to a maximum of 50 Nm (Fig. 55).
149.Using solenoid valve control service tool ref.
3378805M1, check the shifting of each range,
return to neutral and switches for correct opera-
tion.
Fig. 55

I . Adjusting the safety finger

NOTE: This adjustment must be carried out after
setting the selector rails (see § H).
150.Screw home the rod (106) in the reverse pitch nut

(131) (Fig. 56).
151.Using solenoid valve control service tool
ref. 3378805M1, engage a range on a selector rail
and leave the other selector rail in neutral.
152.Unscrew the rod (104) until the lock reaches
maximum axial clearance as shown in (Fig. 57):
J = 0.1 to 0.3 mm
153.Tighten the locknut (105).
Check Fig. 56
154.Using solenoid valve control service tool
ref. 3378805M1 engage a range on a selector rail.
155.Try to shift ranges on the othe selector rail. It
should not engage.
156.Repeat the procedure with all the ranges.
104
105
131
106
MA-05-03087A
Fig. 57

J . Assembling the intermediate

speed sensor
157.Fit the sensor (C Fig. 58) lightly smeared with
158.Screw the sensor home on the pinion (25) without
forcing it, then unscrew by 3/4 of a turn.
159.Tighten the locknut to a torque of 5 - 7 Nm.
K . Final operations
160.Attach the gearbox on the rear axle and engine.
161.Reconnect the harnesses and hydraulic pipes that
were removed.
Fig. 58
162.Top up the transmission oil.
163.Carry out a gearbox calibration (see chapter 11)
and check the transmission for correct operation.

L . Service tools
- 3378804M1: Gearbox shaft slinging tool (Fig. 59)
- 3378805M1: Solenoid valve electrical control tool
(Fig. 60)
MA-05-03095A
Fig. 59
MA-05-03097A
Fig. 60


5C14 - GBA25 - Creeper unit
CONTENTS
A . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
C . Removing the creeper unit and the ring gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
D . Removing the planet carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
E . Reassembling the planet carrier, refitting the ring gear and the unit . . . . . . . . . . . 7
F . Final operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
G . Adjusting the control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9


A . General
The creeper gear reduction unit consists of an epicyclic
gear train with a planet carrier and ring gear assembly
mounted to the rear of the main gearbox. This unit is
controlled by a lever located on the cab console and
linked by a cable to an guide rod link mounted to the
front right-hand side of the centre housing. This link
moves the coupler control fork.
B . Operation
The coupler (8) is splined to the link shaft (21). Move-
ment of lever "A" to Snail position (Fig. 4) moves the
coupler (8) backwards and firmly joins it to the planet
carrier (1) via its external teeth. The speed of the
shaft (21) is 1/4 in relation to the output shaft.
When using normal gears, the gearbox output shaft is
firmly joined to the link shaft (21) when the coupler (8)
is moved forward, thus ensuring direct drive.
The creeper speeds can only be used with ranges 1
and 2 of the Dyna-6 unit. It allows 36 forward and
reverse ratios to be obtained.
The electrical signal corresponding to selection of the
creeper range is sent via switch "C" fitted on the
control unit (Fig. 4).


(1) Planet carrier
(2) Friction washer
(3) Closing plate
(4) Grower washer
(5) Screw
(6) Snap ring
(7) Coupler ring
(8) Sleeve
(9) Planet gears
(11) Spacer
(12) Pin
(13) Plate
(14) Plate
(15) Stop plate
(16) Circlip
(17) Planet carrier assembly
(19) Ring gear
(20) Locating pin
(21) Link shaft

Overall view
Fig. 1

Exploded view
Fig. 2

18. Position the stop plate (15) and the ring gear (19)
C . Removing the creeper unit and on the housing (Fig. 3).
the ring gear 19. Position the friction washers (2) (18) coated with
miscible grease on the planet carrier (4).
1. Remove the right-hand hydraulic cover 20. Slide the planet carrier on the output shaft.
(see chapter 9).
21. Position the closing plate (3). Tighten screws (5) to
2. Disassemble the PTO assembly. a torque of 34 - 52 Nm.
2-speed PTO
- Remove the PTO top cover located at the rear of
the centre housing, the driving pinion and
layshaft (see chapter 7).
4-speed LSPTO
- Remove the PTO top cover located at the rear of
the centre housing, the driving pinion and
layshaft (see chapter 7).
- Remove the PTO clutch (see chapter 7).
3. Remove the sleeve / link shaft / coupler assembly
and the fork (see chapter 5).
Removing the creeper unit and the reducer

ring gear
4. Take off the screws (5) and washers (4).
5. Remove the closing plate (3).
6. Pull out the planet carrier (17) and the friction Fig. 3
washers (2) (18).
7. Remove ring gear (19).
NOTA: The locating pins (20) remain in the ring
gear.
8. Remove the stop plate (15) without pulling the
output shaft.
D . Removing the planet carrier

10. Drive out pins (12).
11. Remove the plates (13) (14).
12. Remove planet gears (9).
NOTA: Replace the planet carrier (1) if the dog
ring (7) is damaged.
E . Reassembling the planet carrier,

refitting the ring gear and the unit
defective parts.
14. Install the planet gears (9). Use miscible grease in
oil to fit the needles (10).
15. Assemble the plates (13) (14).
16. Assemble the pins (12), directing them as required
for assembling the circlip (16).
17. Fit the circlip (16). Manually check the axial clear-
ance and rotation of each planet gear.

22. Reassemble the fork and the sleeve / link shaft /
coupler assembly (see chapter 5).
23. Reassemble the PTO assembly.
2-speed PTO
- Refit the power take-off clutch (see chapter 7).
- Reassemble the layshaft, the driving pinion and
the PTO top cover (see chapter7).
4-speed PTO
- Refit the power take-off clutch (see chapter 7).
- Reassemble the layshaft, the driving pinion and
the PTO top cover (see chapter7).
24. Refit the right-hand hydraulic cover (see chapter 9).
25. Carry out a road test of the creeper unit.
26. Check PTO and PTO brake operation.

G . Adjusting the control 1 2
(Fig. 4 - Fig. 5)
27. Place control lever "A" in the "Snail" position (Fig. 4). A
28. Screw the clevis (1) flush with the threaded end of
the cable (6) (Fig. 4).
29. Assemble the clevis (1) on lever A using the clip (7),
and tighten the nut (2) (Fig. 4).
7 6 4
30. Lock the nut (3) on the sheath end (5).
support. Tighten nut (4). 5 3
NOTA: Check that the cable is not pinched.
32. Position guide rod link "B" on "creeper unit" position
(Fig. 5) (reducer dog (8) engaged towards the rear C
(Fig. 2)), fork locked.
33. Screw the clevis (9) flush with the threaded end of MA-05-03098A
Fig. 4
the cable (6) (Fig. 5).
34. Assemble the clevis (9) on guide rod link B using
the clip (10), and tighten the nut (11) (Fig. 5).
35. Adjust the stop (12) with the nut (13), making sure
that guide rod link "B" is still effectively locked.
NOTA: After tightening, check that there is no
tension on the cable.
37. Check that the "direct drive" position is locked.
Fig. 5


5C15 - GBA25 - Super Creeper unit
CONTENTS
A . General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Kinematics and operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
C . Removing-refitting and disassembling-reassembling the epicyclic gear trains. . . . 12
D . Disassembling-reassembling the planet carriers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
E . Final steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
F . Adjusting the control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18


A . General
The super creeper reducing unit (1) is located at the
rear of the main gearbox (Fig. 1). It is fitted as an
option.
It comprises:
- an input epicyclic gear train fitted with three
planetary gears
- an output epicyclic gear train fitted with five
planetary gears.
Each epicyclic gear train (input and output) consists of
a sun gear/planet carrier/ring gear assembly.
Each ring gear (19) is machined in a single block
(Fig. 2).
MA-05-03100A
Fig. 1
19
19
MA-05-05092A
Fig. 2


(2) Friction washer
(3) Cover
(5) Bolts
(6) M8 screws
(7) Circlip
(8) Coupler
(12) Pins
(14) Sun gear
(15) Stop plate
(20) Dowels
(21) Link shaft
(44) GBA25 gearbox output shaft

20
15 13 9 10 12 1 19 11 10
22
12
4 8 7
44
2
21
14
16
17
18 F
5
3 5
19
6
6
5 5
MA-03-05030A
F
Fig. 3

Blown-up view
9 20
10
13
12 1
22
11
10
12
15
8
18
16
19
14
2
4
17
3
5 6
MA-05-05094A
Fig. 4

Page intentionally left blank

B . Kinematics and operation

Kinematics
Kinematics of the input epicyclic gear train
(16) (Fig. 5)
- Drive input via output shaft (44) of the GBA25
gearbox.
- Drive output via planet carrier (1).
Kinematics of the output epicyclic gear train

(17) (Fig. 5)
- Drive continuity ensured by sun gear (14).
- Drive output to rear axle via planet carrier (4).
NOTE: Sun gear (14) is secured by the splines on the
planet carrier (1).

19 1
44
16
1 19 4
14
17
MA-05-03106A Fig. 5

Operation (Fig. 6)
Coupler (8) is secured by the splines on link shaft (21). 4 8 21
Movement of lever A to the Snail position moves
coupler (8) forwards and engages it with planet carrier
(4) via its external teeth. The link shaft speed (21) is
1/14 that of the gearbox output shaft (44).
When coupler (8) is engaged in output planet carrier
(4), the needle roller bearing (1) allows link shaft (21) to
turn at a different speed to that of output shaft (44) 44
(Fig. 6).
When the super creeper range is selected, the Snail

indicator light on the instrument panel comes on. The
electrical signal corresponding to selection of the
super creeper range is transmitted via switch C, which 1
is fitted on the control unit (Fig. 7).
In normal gears, the gearbox output shaft (44) is

engaged with the link shaft (21) when coupler (8) is
moved backwards, thus ensuring direct drive (Fig. 8).
MA-05-03105A Fig. 6
MA-05-03107A
Fig. 7

44 21
MA-05-03108A
Fig. 8

C . Removing-refitting and
disassembling-reassembling the 8
epicyclic gear trains
Preliminary steps
1. Uncouple the tractor between the gearbox and the
2. Remove (Fig. 9):
- the locknut (26)
Removal
28 26 27
3. Remove screws (5).
MA-05-03109A Fig. 9
4. Separate the super creeper unit from the gearbox.
Place it on a workbench.
Disassembly
5. Remove the M8 screws (6).
6. Remove:
- the cover (3)
- the sun gear (14)
7. Retain the folded friction washer (18).
8. Separate the stop plate (15) from the ring gear
block (19).
NOTE: Dowels (20) are force fitted onto the ring
gear block (19).

Reassembly
9. Check and clean all components. Replace those 18
that are defective.
10. Check that all dowels (20) are present on the ring
gear block (19).
11. Assemble stop plate (15) on the ring gear block.
12. Lightly smear the folded friction washer (18) with
miscible grease.
Position the folds of the friction washer
face-to-face with the slots (Fig. 10).
Insert the friction washer facing the input planet
carrier (1).
13. Refit:
- the sun gear (14)
- the output planet carrier (4) MA-05-05100A Fig. 10
- the cover (3)
14. Fit and tighten the M8 screws (6) to a torque of
25–35 Nm.
Refitting
15. Assemble the super creeper unit on the gearbox.
16. Fit and tighten bolts (5) to a torque of
33.8–51.5 Nm.

D . Disassembling-reassembling the
planet carriers
Disassembling the input planet carrier
17. Position the input planet carrier (1) under a press
of pins (12).
(Fig. 11).
19. Remove the planetary gears (9) and plates (13)
from the planet carrier. E
MA-05-05101A
20. Repeat steps 18 and 19 to disassemble the two Fig. 11
other planetary gears.
Reassembling the input planet carrier 10

that are defective.
Preparing a planetary gear (Fig. 12)

24. Repeat steps 22 and 23 to prepare the two other
planetary gears.
9
MA-05-05102A
Fig. 12


25. Place the input planet carrier (1) on a press.
1
26. Slide a planetary gear (9) fitted with its needle
bearings (10) and plates (13) into the planet carrier.
planet carrier pin hole (12). 9
pin are not blocked. 10
in Fig. 13. 13
30. Slide the pin partly into (Fig. 13):
- the planetary gear (9)
- the plates (13)
Fig. 13.
31. Fit the pin (12) so that its blunt end is almost level 12
with surface F of the planet carrier (Fig. 14).
33. Repeat steps 26 to 32 to fit the other two pins.
1
R
13
9
MA-05-05103A Fig. 13
12
MA-05-05104A
Fig. 14

Disassembling the output planet carrier

34. Position the output planet carrier (4) under a press
of pins (12).
(Fig. 15).
36. Remove planetary gear (11) and plates (22) from
the planet carrier.
37. Repeat steps 35 and 36 to disassemble the other E
four planetary gears.
MA-05-05105A
Fig. 15
Reassembling the output planet carrier
that are defective.
Preparing a planetary gear (Fig. 16) 10

41. Repeat steps 39 and 40 to prepare the other four
planetary gears.
11
MA-05-05106A
Fig. 16


42. Place output planet carrier (4) under a press.
43. Fit friction washer (2) into the base of the planet
carrier (4).
44. Slide a planetary gear (11), fitted with its needle
bearings (10) and plates (22), into the planet carrier.
planet carrier pin hole (12).
2
pin are not blocked.
in Fig. 17.
48. Slide the pin partly into (Fig. 17): 4
- planetary gear (11)
- plates (22)
11
Fig. 17. 10
49. Fit the pin (12) so that its blunt end is almost level
with surface F of the planet carrier (Fig. 18). 22
51. Repeat steps 44 to 50 to fit the other four pins.
12
4
R
22
11
MA-05-05107A Fig. 17
12
MA-05-05108A Fig. 18

E . Final steps
52. Refit (Fig. 9): 8
- the locknut (26)
53. Adjust the fork locking mechanism (27) (see
Fig. 9).
54. Couple the tractor between the gearbox and the
F . Adjusting the control

(Fig. 20–Fig. 21) 28 26 27
MA-05-03109A Fig. 19
55. Place control lever A in the Snail position (Fig. 20).
56. Screw clevis (1) level with the end of the threaded
part of cable (6) (Fig. 20). 1 2
57. Fit clevis (1) on lever A using clip (7) and tighten nut
(2) (Fig. 20).
58. Lock nut (3) on the sheath end (5). A
support. Tighten nut (4).
NOTE: Check that the cable is not pinched.
60. Place connecting rod B in the "creeper unit"
position (Fig. 21) (reducer dog (8) engaged towards 7 6 4
the rear [Fig. 4]), fork locked.
61. Screw clevis (9) level with the threaded end of 5 3
cable (6) (Fig. 21).
62. Fit clevis (9) on connecting rod B using clip (10) and
tighten nut (11) (Fig. 21). C
63. Adjust stop (12) with nut (13), making sure that
connecting rod B is still firmly locked. MA-05-03098A
Fig. 20
NOTE: After tightening, check that the cable is not
pinched.
65. Check that the control is locked in the "direct drive"
position.
Fig. 21

5D10 - GBA15 - General - Operation
CONTENTS
A . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Powershift module and PowerShuttle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
C . Main gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
D . Synchronisers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
E . GBA15 gearbox dismantling steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
F . Transmission specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Massey Ferguson 6400 - Issue 4.b 5D10.1

5D10.2 Massey Ferguson 6400 - Issue 4.b

A . General
The GBA15 gearbox provides four basic synchronised
ratios and six ratios for shifting under load. The
24 ratios can be engaged manually or automatically in
forward and reverse position, without using the clutch
pedal.
The gearbox is divided into two sections (Fig. 1):

• front housing
Fitted behind the engine, the front housing supports:
- the multiplier module (1) to obtain ratios E and F for
shifting under load;
- the Dynashift (2) module with ratios A, B, C and D
for shifting under load;
- the PowerShuttle (3).
NOTE: The multiplier module and the Dynashift
module make up the Powershift module.
• rear housing
Fitted behind the front housing, the rear housing
supports:
- the main gearbox (4) with its four roboti-
cally-controlled mechanical ratios;
- the creeper gearbox (5).
In this section, description is mainly limited to the

gearbox. Only a partial description is given of the major
components, since a specific and more detailed
description can be found in each component's relevant
section.
1 2 3 4 5
Ar Av 3 4
Q M
O
1 2
MA-05-03049A
Fig. 1

Multiplier module PowerShuttle

The multiplier module is fitted at the GBA15 gearbox The PowerShuttle is located in the centre of the
input. It allows ratios E and F to be obtained by overin- gearbox. It connects the Dynashift module to the main
creasing respectively ratios C and D of the Dynashift gearbox.
module.
The PowerShuttle includes:
The multiplier module includes: - two multidisc clutches (front and rear) located back
- an epicyclic gear train; to back and controlled by two proportional solenoid
- a brake; valves with PWM control;
- a multidisc clutch. - a mainshaft providing the reversing function.
The brake piston, supplied by a proportional solenoid

valve (with ON/OFF control), locks the brake discs. The Main gearbox
thrust plate moves forwards at the same time,
compressing the two Belleville washers to release the The main gearbox has four ranges selected by
multidisc clutch. two robotically-controlled double cone synchronisers
(electrohydraulic).
The two multiplier module ratios are 1/1 and 1.423/1.
The main gearbox input drive is supplied by the multi-
plier, Dynashift and PowerShuttle modules.
The four main gearbox ranges are automated. All ratios
Dynashift module may be engaged or disengaged automatically by the
This Dynashiftmodule provides four ratios (A, B, C and tractor electronic control without intervention by the
D) for shifting under load plus ratios (E and F) in combi- driver.
nation with the multiplier module.
The Dynashift module includes two epicyclic gear Creeper gearbox

trains:
A unit mounted on the main gearbox output shaft is
- the primary epicyclic gear train, the main module used to obtain slow forward speeds. This mechani-
component; cally-controlled unit encloses a traditional final drive
- the secondary epicyclic gear train, used to control giving a reduction of 4/1.
the speed of the primary sun gear. This gear train is
controlled hydraulically by the brakes via two propor-
tional solenoid valves (with ON/OFF control) and two
multidisc clutches under pressure from the Belleville Lubrication
washers. The lubricating oil is directed by the tractor hydraulic
circuit. It penetrates the two ports located to the left of
the main gearbox and PowerShuttle housings respec-
tively. It lubricates the bearings, pinions and synchro-
niser hubs via axial channels and ports.


Parts lists
View of the gearbox assembly (Fig. 2)
A Dynashift module with multiplier module A1
Ar Reverse multidisc clutch
Av Forward multidisc clutch
B PowerShuttle
C Reverse driving gear
D Main gearbox with four robotic ranges
E Double cone synchroniser for 3rd/4th
F Double cone synchroniser for 1st/2nd
G Power take-off shaft
H Main gearbox output shaft
I Creeper gearbox (if fitted)
L Brake
M Multidisc clutch
N Brake
O Multidisc clutch
P Brake
Q Multidisc clutch

View of GBA15 gearbox assembly
P L N Ar Av E G
A1 Q M A O C B D F H I
MA-05-06027A
Fig. 2

Multiplier module (Fig. 3)

(1) Clutch Q disc/intermediate plate assembly
(2) Brake P disc/intermediate plate assembly
(3) Spring
(4) Multiplier module housing
(5) Ring gear
(6) Planetary gear
(7) Needle bearing
(8) Pin
(9) Sun gear
(10) Ball bearing
(11) Ball bearing
(12) Ring-gear carrier
(13) Planet carrier
(14) Brake piston
(15) Clutch cover
(17) Cover
(18) Input shaft
(19) Lip seal
(20) Ball bearing
(21) Clutch bell housing

View of multiplier module assembly
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13 12 11
MA-05-06028A
Fig. 3

Dynashift module (Fig. 4)

(23) Thrust plate
(26) Brake piston
(27) Ball bearing
(28) Needle bearing
(30) Brake piston
(31) Pin
(32) Spring
(33) Needle bearing
(34) Brake N disc/intermediate plate assembly
(39) Clutch O disc/intermediate plate assembly
(40) Rear cover
(41) Ball bearing
(43) Pin
(44) Planetary gear
(46) Secondary ring-gear carrier
(47) Ball bearing
(49) Planetary gear
(51) Primary ring-gear carrier
(54) Spring emplacement
(55) Brake L disc/intermediate plate assembly
(56) Clutch M disc/intermediate plate assembly
(58) Primary shaft

View of Dynashift module assembly
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 37
58
57
56
55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38
MA-05-06029A
Fig. 4

PowerShuttle (Fig. 5)
(59) Thrust plate
(60) Ball bearing
(61) Support/bearing
(62) Shaft/bell housings
(63) Ball bearing
(66) Discs (reverse clutch)
(67) Intermediate plates (reverse clutch)
(68) Reverse clutch
(72) Discs (forward clutch)
(73) Intermediate plates (forward clutch)
(74) Forward clutch
(75) Ball bearing
(76) Hydraulic ring
(78) Forward clutch hub
(79) Bearing cup
(80) Bearing cone
(81) Reverse transfer pinion
(82) Bearing cup
(83) Bearing cone
(84) Reverse mainshaft
(85) Reverse driven pinion
(86) Ball bearing
(87) Reverse driving gear
(88) Cylindrical roller bearing

View of PowerShuttle assembly
59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78
88 87 85 82 83 79 80
86 84 81
Fig. 5
MA-05-06030A

Main gearbox (Fig. 6)

(90) Shim(s)
(91) Compartment
(92) Bearing cup
(93) Bearing cone
(94) Primary shaft
(95) Circlip
(96) Thrust washer
(97) Shim(s)
(98) 1st/3rd double pinion
(99) Bearing cup
(100) Bearing cone
(101) Bearing cone
(102) Bearing cup
(103) Spacer
(104) Circlip
(105) Circlip
(106) Thrust washer
(107) Needle bearing
(108) Thrust washer
(109) Circlip
(110) Special circlip
(111) 3rd/4th double cone synchroniser
(112) 4th driving gear
(113) Ring
(114) Bearing cup
(115) Bearing cone
(116) Power take-off shaft
(117) Bearing cone
(118) Bearing cup
(119) Output shaft
(120) Needle bearing
(122) Spacer
(124) 1st/2nd double cone synchroniser
(125) 1st driving gear
(126) Bearing cone
(127) Bearing cup
(128) 2nd gear pinion
(129) Bearing cup
(130) Bearing cone
(131) Circlip
(132) Thrust washer
(133) Shim(s)
(134) Special spacer
(135) Bearing cup
(136) Bearing cone
(137) Shim(s)
(138) Spring
(139) "O" ring
(140) Lubrication pipe

View of main gearbox assembly
95
92 96 99 101 103 105 108 114
89 90 91 93 94 97 98 100 102 104 106 107 109 110 111 112 113 115
116
117 118
119
120
121
122
123
124
140 139 138 137 135 134 131 129 128 126 125
136 132 130 127
133 Fig. 6
MA-05-06031A


Clutch/brake operation (Fig. 7)

B . Powershift module and Power- The clutches/brakes that select the Dynashift module
Shuttle ratios are each controlled by a piston P. When a brake
is engaged, the related clutch is disengaged, and vice
Construction versa.
The GBA15 transmission Powershift module is fitted The control pistons P act both on the brake F discs and
behind the engine flywheel. on an intermediate plate I. When the piston P is pres-
The Powershift module comprises: surised, the plate I pushes back the Belleville washers
B of the clutch E. When the pressure is released, the
- the multiplier module; Belleville washers B push the piston P back via the
- the Dynashift module. intermediate plate I and tighten the clutch E discs.
Each module is fitted in a cast-iron housing screwed
into the front gearbox housing. PowerShuttle: reverse (Fig. 5)
Reverse is provided by a mainshaft comprising a shaft
Multiplier module
(84) and two pinions (81) and (85). It transmits drive
The multiplier module comprises an epicyclic gear from the PowerShuttle to the 2nd gear pinion (128) on
train, a clutch and a brake. the main unit output shaft.
The input shaft (18) is linked to the planet carrier (13). The pinions (81) and (85) are splined to the shaft.
It drives the power take-off shaft via the vibration The pinion (81) is mounted on different size taper roller
damper located in the engine flywheel. bearings (79)(80) and (82)(83), shimmed with preload
The clutch discs (1) are splined to the input shaft (18). under the bearing cup (82).
The intermediate plates of the clutch (1) are integral
with the clutch bell housing (21) and sun gear (9).
The brake discs (2) are connected to the clutch bell
housing (21) and sun gear (9).
The ring gear (5) and ring gear carrier (12) of the epicy-
clic gear train drive the primary shaft of the Dynashift
module.
Dynashift module
The Dynashift module comprises two epicyclic gear
trains (primary and secondary), two brakes and two
clutches.
Primary epicyclic gear train
The ring gear (50) of the primary gear train is splined to
the primary shaft (58). It rotates at the multiplier
secondary speed.
The planet-carrier (52), linked to the shaft/Power-
Shuttle bell housings, supplies output rotational speed
to the Dynashift module.
The sun gear (48) on the primary epicyclic gear train is
connected to the planet-carrier (29) on the secondary
epicyclic gear train. B
The secondary gear train (45) ring gear can be locked E
in rotation by the brake (55) or fixed to the primary
shaft (58) by the multidisc clutch (56). I
The secondary sun gear (42) can be locked in rotation
F
by the brake (34) or fixed to the shaft/PowerShuttle
bell housings by the multidisc clutch (39). P
The secondary planet-carrier (29) is fixed to the sun
gear (48) on the primary epicyclic gear train.
MA-05-06032A
Fig. 7

Kinematics
Parts list (Fig. 8)
(1) Multiplier module
(2) Dynashift(3)PowerShuttle
(4) Robotic gearbox
(5) Creeper gearbox
(Ar) Reverse clutch
(Av) Forward clutch
L Ring gear brake, secondary epicyclic gear train
of the Dynashift module
M Ring gear clutch, secondary epicyclic gear train
N Sun gear brake, secondary epicyclic gear train
O Sun gear clutch, secondary epicyclic gear train
P Multiplier module ring gear brake
Q Multiplier module ring gear clutch
1 2 3 4 5
Ar Av 3 4
Q M
O
1 2
MA-05-03049A
Fig. 8

Kinematics of the multiplier module (Fig. 8) The input and output speeds are identical. The oper-
ating ratio is 1/1.
Ratio 1/1
Clutch Q secures the planet-carrier and the sun gear
of the epicyclic gear train. The gear train assembly Kinematics of the PowerShuttle (Fig. 8)
is locked and turns at engine speed. The ratio obtained When the transmission is at neutral, the PowerShuttle
is 1/1. clutches are not pressurised.
Ratio 1.423/1 The forward clutch is locked in forward travel. It trans-
mits drive directly from the Powershift to the gearbox
Brake P locks the rotation of the sun gear on the
primary shaft.
gearbox housing. Movement enters via the planet
carrier which drives the rotation of the ring gear. In this The reverse clutch is locked in reverse. It transmits
case the ratio obtained is 1.423/1. drive to a mainshaft then to the 2nd gear pinion on the
main gearbox output shaft.
Dynashiftmodule kinematics (Fig. 8)
Creeper gearbox kinematics (Fig. 8)
Drive is always transmitted via the primary epicyclic
gear train, entering via the ring gear and exiting via the The coupler is splined to the drive pinion (crownwheel
primary planet carrier. The four ratios are obtained by and pinion).
modifying the rotational speed of the primary sun gear, In creeper gears, the coupler is driven backwards and
which is set by the secondary epicyclic gear train. becomes attached to the planet-carrier via its external
teeth.
Ratio A (1/1.698)
In normal gears, when the coupler is moved forwards,
The two brake pistons L and N are pressurised. The the gearbox output shaft is attached to the drive
ring gear and sun gear of the secondary epicyclic gear pinion, thus ensuring direct drive.
train are fixed in relation to the gearbox housing.
Consequently, the secondary planet-carrier is fixed and
holds the primary sun gear.
planet carrier.
Ratio B (1/1.423)
Belleville washers. The sun gear on the secondary
epicyclic gear train turns at the same speed as the
secondary shaft, driving the secondary planet-carrier
rotation and therefore the sun gear on the primary
epicyclic gear train.
Ratio C (1/1.193)
Brake piston N is pressurised. Clutch M is locked by
the Belleville washers. The primary shaft drives the
ring gears of the two epicyclic gear trains. On the
secondary epicyclic gear train, the sun gear is fixed in
relation to the unit housing and the ring gear drives the
secondary planet carrier and the primary sun gear.
Ratio D (1/1)
The two brakes L and N are not pressurised. The two
clutches M and O are locked by the Belleville washers.
The primary and secondary ring gears receive the input
speed. The secondary sun gear is fixed to the
secondary shaft, thus locking the Dynashiftmodule
mechanically.

The taper roller bearings (126)(127) and (129)(130) are

C . Main gearbox shimmed with a slight clearance or a slight preload
using the shims (133).
Construction The 2nd gear driven pinion (128) acts as a rotating axis
The main gearbox is crossed entirely by the power for the 1st driving gear (125), which turns without a
take-off shaft (116) which links the engine flywheel to bearing thanks to a consequential, specific heat treat-
the power take-off clutch at the front of the rear axle. ment. The friction surface is lubricated through radial
This shaft turns at the centre of a series of shafts ports.
forming the upper shaftline. The 1st/2nd gear double cone synchroniser (124) is
A vertical compartment (91) in front of the main gearbox splined to the 2nd gear driven pinion (128). It attaches
housing (89) supports the front bearings (92)(93) and this to the pinions (125) or (123) according to the range
(135)(136) on the primary (94) and output (119) shafts. engaged.
It is also fitted with the lubricating channels. The 3rd (123) and 4th (121) gear driven pinions are
The main gearbox front and rear housings are bolted splined to the output shaft (119).
together and act as an oil tank for the tractor hydraulic
circuit.
The main gearbox has four synchronised ratios with
two double cone synchronisers (111)(124) (see § D).
Four gear trains are divided between two shafts (94)
(119).
Each range is engaged via a synchroniser. A safety
finger on the selection mechanism prevents two
ranges being engaged simultaneously.
The first ratio uses three gear trains. The last three
ratios each use one gear train (see kinematics).
Primary shaft (94)

bearings (92)(93) and (114)(115). It is preloaded under
the bearing cup (92) using the shims (90).
On the primary shaft (94), the double 1st/3rd gear
pinion (98) forms a single unit supported by:
- two taper roller bearings (99)(100) and (101)(102)
fitted in an X shape;
- a needle bearing (107).
The position of the double pinion should be checked
(98) in relation to the special circlip (110), so that the
3rd/4th gear double cone synchroniser (111) synchro-
nises range 3 correctly.
The taper roller bearings (99)(100) and (101)(102) are
shimmed with a slight clearance or a slight preload
using the shims (97).
The machined teeth on the primary shaft (94) mesh
constantly with the 2nd driven pinion (128) on the
output shaft (119). The 4th gear pinion (112) turns
freely on a ring (113) fitted with a lubricating port.
Output shaft (119)

bearings (117)(118) and (135)(136). It is preloaded
under the bearing cup (135) using the shims (137).
The 2nd gear driven pinion (128) turns freely on the
output shaft (119). It is supported by:
- two taper roller bearings (126)(127) and (129)(130)
fitted in an X shape;
- a needle bearing (120).

Kinematics (Fig. 8 and Fig. 9)

1 Range 1 1 N

gear synchroniser, then the third train.
2 Range 2
The reduction is carried out on the first gear train. The
2nd gear synchroniser attaches the 2nd gear pinion to
the output shaft. 1
3 Range 3
The reduction is carried out on the third gear train. The 2 N
primary shaft is attached to the 3rd gear pinion by the
3rd gear synchroniser.
4 Range 4
The primary shaft is attached to the 4th gear pinion by
the 4th gear synchroniser.
3 3
4 4
MA-05-03947A N
Fig. 9

D . Synchronisers
The GBA15 gearbox is fitted with two double cone
synchronisers for shifting between ranges 1 to 4. 1 5 4 2 8 3

(1) Sliding coupler
(2) Cone (brake)
(3) Coupling flange 6
(4) Ball bearing
(5) Pressure connectors
(6) Spring
(7) Ring
(8) Cone (brake)
Advantages
The double cone synchroniser has the following advan-
tages: improved reliability and increased resistance to
transmission loads.
Robotic control (Fig. 11)

The synchronisers are controlled conventionally by
forks (1) and (2) and selector rails (3) and (4).
The selector rails are controlled hydraulically. The
selector rails are fitted on double-acting pistons (5) (6).
On the selector rail (4) that controls the 1st/2nd gear
synchroniser, the piston (6) is damped by a spring (7)
to allow gradual movement of the fork in ranges 1 7
and 2.
The selector rails are adjusted by tightening or loosening
the adjustable stops (8) (9). Once adjusted, the stops are 5 4 6 1 7
held in rotation by screws (10) (11).
Two security fingers joined by an adjustable sleeve
(12) preventing the selector rails from being engaged
simultaneously. When a selector rail is engaged, the
fingers lock the other one at the groove (13).
2 8 3
MA-05-06033A
Fig. 10

3 1 5 13
10
12
11
6 7 6 2 4 13
MA-05-06034A Fig. 11

Check
If the double cone synchronisers are disassembled,
check the cones (2) and (8) for wear as follows:
1. Stack the coupling flange (3), cones (2) and (8) and
ring (7).
2. Correctly position the ring (7) on the cones (2) and
(8), revolving them alternately each several turns
and applying pressure manually.
3. Using a set of thickness shims, measure
dimension X (Fig. 12) at three equidistant points.
result obtained.
1.6 mm minimum.
After operation, if X is less than or equal to
0.60–0.80 mm:
- replace the cones (2) and (8);
same process.
ring (7) or, if necessary, the complete synchro-
niser.
Fig. 12

E . GBA15 gearbox dismantling steps

Step 1: Removal of the power take-off and 4 WD shafts
MA-05-06035A
Fig. 13

Step 2: Separation of the main gearbox and removal of Step 3: Removal of main gearbox front compartment
the reverse mainshaft and reverse transfer pinion
MA-05-06037A
MA-05-06036A
Fig. 14 Fig. 15

Step 4: Removal of main gearbox meshed block and Step 5: Removal of Powershift module and Power-
separation of gear trains Shuttle
MA-05-06039A
MA-05-06038A Fig. 16 Fig. 17

Step 6: Separation of Powershift module Step 7: Removal of PowerShuttle
MA-05-06041A
MA-05-06040A Fig. 18 Fig. 19

Step 8: Removal of the Dynashift
MA-05-06042A
Fig. 20
Step 9: Removal of the Dynashift Step 10: Separation of multiplier module
MA-05-06043A Fig. 21 MA-05-06044A Fig. 22

F . Transmission specifications
C Double 1st/3rd gear pinion positioning dimension
in relation to the 3rd/4th gear synchroniser on the
main shaft
J Clearance
P Preload

37 Nm 16 Nm 37 Nm M6 - 16 Nm M8 - 37 Nm P = 0,05/0,15 P = 0,05 / J = 0,05
242 242 242 242 242
C = 17,53 +/- 0,03

648
M10 - 77 Nm
M8 - 37 Nm
37 Nm 37 Nm 16 Nm 77 Nm 5206 200 Nm 77 Nm P = 0,05/0,15 P = 0,05 / J = 0,05
242 242 242

Fig. 23
MA-05-06045B


J Clearance
N Neutral
P Preload

1-2 3-4
X1 60,385 +/- 1 61,61 +/- 0,86
X2 60,855 +/- 1,095 62,08 +/- 0,955
Y 71,815 +/- 1,245 73,240 +/- 1,105
Z1 83,225 +/- 0,9 84,150 +/- 0,8
Z2 82,755 +/- 0,995 83,680 +/- 0,895
Z2-X2 21,9 +/- 1,4 21,625 +/- 1,405
P = 0,05/0,15
X1 X2
J = 0,1/0,3
37 Nm
242
16 Nm
242
Z1 Z2
MA-05-06046B
Fig. 24


GBA15 - Power Shuttle
5D11 - GBA15 - Power Shuttle
CONTENTS
A . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Removing and refitting the front support and the Power Shuttle multidisc clutches
11
C . Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Massey Ferguson 6400 - Issue 5.a 5D11.1

5D11.2 Massey Ferguson 6400 - Issue 5.a

The Power Shuttle multidisc clutches are fitted back to

A . General back.
Their clutch bell housing is driven by a common shaft.
The Power Shuttle, also called "ISC" (Fig. 1), is fitted to
all 6400 series tractors equipped with a GBA15 robotic The multidisc clutches are supported:
mechanical gearbox. - at the front by a support fixed to the rear of the
It is located between front housing C1 of the Power- Dynashift module;
shift module and housing C of the robotic gearbox - at the rear by the robotic gearbox primary shaft.
(Fig. 1).
It acts as the main clutch for the Dyna-6 transmission.
The Power Shuttle comprises two electrohydraulically

controlled multidisc clutches:
• the front multidisc clutch for forward travel (Fig. 1)
This comprises:
- a bell housing;
- a hydraulic piston fitted with Quadring seals;
- a set of ten Belleville washers;
- a hub splined to the primary shaft of the robotic
gearbox;
- a set of nine discs and nine intermediate plates;
- a cover plate.
• the rear multidisc clutch for reverse travel (Fig. 1)
It comprises the same hydraulic and mechanical
components as the front clutch with the exception
that, for the rear clutch, the hub forms a unit with the
reverse driving gear (12).
C1 ISC C
12 AR AV
MA-05-05319A
Fig. 1

Kinematics NOTE: Permissible loss of oil from the Power Shuttle

lubrication system is minimised by:
In forward travel, the movement from the engine is
- a ball bearing (1) with a sealed face, which is located
directly transmitted to the robotic gearbox primary
at the front end of the support/bearing assembly;
shaft via the clutch concerned.
- a seal holder (31) equipped with a seal ring (24) and
In reverse travel, the movement from the engine is
an "O" ring (32) forming the seal between the Power
transmitted to the robotic gearbox primary shaft via the
Shuttle and the primary shaft of the robotic gearbox.
clutch concerned and a main line (36) comprising two
gears (35) (37).
NOTE: The forward and reverse position ratios are iden-
tical.
Electrohydraulic control
A lever situated on the left underneath the steering
wheel is used to reverse the tractor's direction of
travel via an alternate hydraulic supply. When the
forward multidisc clutch is under load, the hydraulic
pressure of the reverse multidisc clutch is suspended
and vice-versa.
This lever is equipped with a position for manual
declutching. It also controls the shifting of ratios A, B, C,
D, E and F for the Powershift module (see chapter 5).
Pressure to the Power Shuttle pistons (14) (18) is
provided via the tractor's 21-bar low-pressure hydraulic
system. This pressure travels through the bell housing
shaft channels (3). It is controlled by two
PWM-controlled solenoid valves via an Autotronic 5
unit. The solenoid valves are fitted on a hydraulic unit
located at the front right of the gearbox. This hydraulic
unit also supports the solenoid valves for the Power-
shift module.
The clutch pedal, also called the manoeuvring pedal,
also controls the Power Shuttle via sensors and the
controller. It is useful for manoeuvring and/or accu-
rately hitching certain implements.
The Power Shuttle output speed is transmitted to the
tractor's electronic system via:
- the rotational speed of the 2nd gear of the gearbox
output shaft (see chapter 5);
- the sensor located on the right of the gearbox;
- the controller.
21-bar low pressure

The 21-bar Power Shuttle circuit is sealed by a set of
three rings (41) fitted in its front support.
Lubrication
The Power Shuttle front support acts as a manifold to
direct the lubrication oil from the tractor's hydraulic
system to the upper shaftline of the robotic gearbox.


Parts list (Fig. 2, Fig. 3) Legend

(1) Ball bearing sealed on one face 1 Forward clutch
(2) Bearing carrier
(3) Shaft/bell housings 2 Reverse clutch
(4) Circlip 3 Reverse kinematics
(5) Thrust washer
(6) Ball bearing
(7) Cover plate (reverse clutch)
(8) Circlip
(10) Discs (reverse clutch)
(11) Intermediate plates (reverse clutch)
(12) Hub/reverse driving gear unit
(13) Thrust washer
(14) Piston (reverse clutch)
(15) Quadring seal
(16) Quadring seal
(17) Quadring seal
(18) Piston (forward clutch)
(19) Quadring seal
(21) Discs (forward clutch)
(22) Intermediate plates (forward clutch)
(23) Ball bearing
(24) Seal ring
(25) Circlip
(26) Cover plate (forward clutch)
(27) Snap ring
(28) Hub (forward clutch)
(29) Countersunk thrust washer
(30) Snap ring
(31) Seal holder
(32) "O" ring
(33) Rivets
(34) Ball bearing
(35) Reverse driven gear
(36) Reverse layshaft
(37) Reverse layshaft gear
(38) Snap ring
(39) Circlip
(40) Cylindrical roller bearing
(41) Seal rings
(42) Snap ring
(43) Countersunk thrust washer
(44) Needle roller bearing
(45) Thrust washer
(49) 2nd gear (robotic mechanical gearbox)
(101) M6 screw
(102) Thrust plate
(103) M8 screw
(104) Snap ring

2ème
5 11
1 2 3 12 4 6 7 8 9 10 3 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 3
34 35 36 37
F
104
103
42 43 44 45 33 32 31
30
29
101 102
28
F
27
41 40 39 38 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
MA-05-05320A
Fig. 2


Blown-up view
30
29
20
2 45
103
104 18
102
101 17
19
2
13 3
26
1 9
42
39 38 21
6 12
5 14
4 16
40 15
1
31
43 24
23
10 41 22
44
7 32 28
8 27
3 25
49
11
37
36
12 35
MA-05-05338A
Fig. 3


B . Removing and refitting the front

support and the Power Shuttle
multidisc clutches
Preliminary steps
103
1. Case 1
If the operation is limited solely to the removal of
one or more of the following parts of the forward 52
clutch:
- discs (21);
- intermediate plates (22);
- hub (28);
- seal holder (31);
- ball bearing (23),
simply disassemble the tractor between housing C
of the robotic gearbox and housing C1 of the Power-
shift module (see chapter 2).
Case 2
If it is necessary to completely remove the Power
Shuttle (Fig. 4), proceed as follows: 103
- Disconnect the tractor between housing C of the
ISC
robotic gearbox and housing C1 of the Power-
shift module (see chapter 2).
- Separate housing C1 from the engine (see
chapter 2).
- Remove the Powershift module (see chapter 5).
- Open the Powershift module between the
housing (111) and the rear cover plate (52) of the
Dynashift module (see chapter 5). S
- Remove clutch O/brake N from the Dynashift MA-05-05321A
module (see chapter 5).
- Place the Power Shuttle in a vertical position on Fig. 4
a suitable support S (Fig. 4).
- Unscrew the M8 screws (103). Separate the
Power Shuttle from the rear cover plate (52) of the
Dynashift module (Fig. 4).

Removing front support S1

2. Remove (Fig. 5):
- the M6 screws (101);
- the thrust plate (102);
- the snap ring (104).
3. Remove (Fig. 6):
- the ball bearing (1) while making a note of the S1
positioning of its sealed face F;
- the circlip (8). 101 102 104
4. Separate front support S1 from the Power Shuttle
(Fig. 6).
NOTE 1: Front support S1 mainly comprises the
bearing carrier (2), the thrust washer (5) (oil
deflector), the bearings (6) (40) and the unit (12). S
The unit (12) is an assembly composed of the MA-05-05322A
clutch hub and the reverse driving gear (Fig. 7). Fig. 5
NOTE 2: The cover plate (7) is clipped onto the unit
(12) using the snap ring (38).
5. Remove the circlip (39).
6. Separate the bearing carrier (2) from the unit (12) 1 2
(Fig. 7).
If necessary, extract the cylindrical roller bearing
(40) from the bearing carrier (2). 8 F
7. On the unit (12), remove (Fig. 7):
- the circlip (4);
- the thrust washer (5);
- the ball bearing (6). S1
MA-05-05323A
Fig. 6

Refitting front support S1

8. Clean and check all components. Replace those 40
that are defective.
9. Inside the unit (12), refit (Fig. 7):
2 12
- the ball bearing (6);
- the thrust washer (5)
NOTE: Its profile P (Fig. 8) must be facing the ball
bearing (6);
- the circlip (4).
10. If removed, fit the cylindrical roller bearing (40) to
the bearing carrier (2) (Fig. 7). Check that the cylin- 4
drical roller bearings rotate freely.
5
6
MA-05-05324A
Fig. 7
P
MA-05-05325A
Fig. 8

11. Fit the bearing carrier (2) to the unit (12) (Fig. 9).
Refit the circlip (39).
F
5 F
6 2 40
41
S1
7
38
12
MA-05-05326A
Fig. 9

12. Refit front support S1 to the Power Shuttle (Fig. 10). NOTE 2: For method M1, it is advisable to locally
The junction between front support S1 and the manufacture a disc (10) centring tool. To do this,
Power Shuttle can be made (Fig. 10): use a clutch hub as a production base. This hub is
- either by using method M, which consists of available from the spare parts catalogue under the
placing front support S1 on a suitable support S reference 3799222M2.
drilled with a central hole to allow the bell
housing shaft (3) to descend towards the discs
(10) and the intermediate plates (11);
- or by using method M1 which consists of
placing the Power Shuttle on a suitable support
S to allow front support S1 to descend towards
the discs (10) and the intermediate plates (11).
NOTE 1: If necessary, refer to operation 40 for the
layout of the discs (10) and the intermediate plates
(11). Irrespective of whether method M or M1 is
used, it will be necessary to align the disc splines
or intermediate plates beforehand.
101 102 1 104 2

S1
14 7
3
10
S1 11 14
2 7
S S
MA-05-05327A
M M1
Fig. 10

13. Refit (Fig. 11):

- the ball bearing (1), positioning its sealed face F 1 104 102
downwards;
- the snap ring (104);
- the thrust plate (102);
- the M6 screws (101):
Lightly smear their threads with Loctite 242 or
equivalent beforehand. Tighten to a torque of
16 Nm; F
- the rear cover plate (52) of the Dynashift module: 101 52
Lightly smear the M8 screw (103) threads with
Loctite 242 or equivalent beforehand. Tighten to
a torque of 37 Nm.
103
Removing the reverse multidisc clutch MA-05-05328A

Fig. 11
14. Place the Power Shuttle in a vertical position on a
suitable support S. Repeat step 1.
15. Remove:
- the thrust plate (102), the snap ring (104), the ball
bearing (1) and the circlip (8), repeating steps 2
and 3;
- front support S1 (Fig. 12);
- the discs (10) and intermediate plates (11) (Fig. 12); 2
- the seal rings (41) and then discard them (Fig. 12).
S1
8
41
10
11
MA-05-05329A
Fig. 12

16. Place the bell housing shaft (3) on a table press

with its splines facing upwards (Fig. 13).
ATP3002
17. Using a hydraulic press and service tool ref. ATP3002
(see § C), compress the ten Belleville washers (9)
(Fig. 13).
- the countersunk thrust washer (43).
19. De-compress the hydraulic press ram.
Remove the tool. 9 13 3
20. Make a note of the layout of the Belleville washers
(Fig. 13). Remove them from their clutch bell
housing with the thrust washer (13).
21. Gently drive out the piston (14) using compressed
air. Remove and discard the Quadring seals (15)
(16).
Disassembling the forward multidisc

clutch
22. Turn over the Power Shuttle. Place it on a table
press with the bell housing shaft (3) facing down-
wards.
NOTE: The principle for removing the discs, inter-
mediate plates and Belleville washers for the 42
forward clutch is similar to the principle for
removing the reverse clutch.
23. Remove:
- the circlip (25);
- the cover plate (26) fitted with the snap ring (27)
and the hub (28);
- the discs (21) and intermediate plates (22). 43
24. Compress the Belleville washers (20) using a MA-05-05330A Fig. 13
hydraulic press and the service tool used for the
reverse clutch.
25. Remove:
- the countersunk thrust washer (29).
26. De-compress the hydraulic press ram. Remove the
tool.
27. Make a note of the layout of the Belleville washers.
Remove them from their clutch bell housing with
the thrust washer (45).

28. Gently drive out the piston (18) using compressed

air. Remove and discard the Quadring seals (17) P
(19).
29. Remove:
- the seal holder (31). Discard the "O" ring (32) and
the seal ring (24);
ATP3002
- the ball bearing (23).
30. If necessary, drive out the needle roller bearing
(44).
42
Reassembling the reverse multidisc clutch
43
that are defective.
On the bell housing shaft (3), clean mainly:
- the hydraulic channels of the reverse (14) and
forward (18) pistons;
- the radial lubricating holes.
32. Lubricate the new Quadring seals (15) (16) and the
bore of the clutch bell housing concerned.
NOTE: The Quadring seals are square seals.
33. Fit the seals into the grooves of the piston (14) 9
without twisting them.
34. Position the piston in its clutch bell housing. Grad-
ually fit it in place, tapping alternately on its rim
13
using a plastic fitting drift.
35. On the bell housing shaft (3), slide and position
(Fig. 14);
- the thrust washer (13); 3
- the ten Belleville washers (9) according to the
layout noted in step 20.
36. Using the hydraulic press and service tool ref. MA-05-05331A
ATP3002, compress the Belleville washers Fig. 14
(Fig. 14).
37. On the bell housing shaft (3), position (Fig. 14):
- the countersunk thrust washer (43) against the
set of Belleville washers;
- the snap ring (42) in the recess of the counter-
sunk thrust washer.
NOTE: The thrust washer recess must be fitted
facing the snap ring.
38. De-compress the hydraulic press ram. Remove
tools.

39. On the bell housing shaft (3), lightly smear grooves

G of the seal rings (41) with miscible grease
(Fig. 15).
Fix a new seal ring inside the base of each groove,
ensuring that it does not exceed the circumference
of the bell housing shaft.
40. IMPORTANT: If the discs (10) are to be replaced,
soak the new discs in clean transmission oil for 41
approximately one hour. Check that they are well
impregnated with oil before fitting them.
3
Depending on whether method M or M1 is used,
fit the discs (10) (new or re-used, depending on the
situation) and the intermediate plates (11) to the G
front support S1 or into the reverse clutch bell
housing (see step 12) in accordance with the
following instructions:
MA-05-05332A
- Using method M,
Fig. 15
start assembly by fitting a disc against the cover
plate (7) and alternate until the new intermediate
plates and the new discs are fitted. Assembly
should end with an intermediate plate against
the piston (14).
- Using method M1,
start assembly by fitting an intermediate plate
against the piston (14) and alternate in the same
manner as for method M. Assembly should end
with a disc against the cover plate (7).
IMPORTANT: Ensure that the layout of the discs and
intermediate plates is correct.
41. Depending on which method is used, lower the
bell housing shaft (3) or front support S1 towards
the discs (10) and the intermediate plates (11)
(Fig. 10).
42. Fit (Fig. 10):
- the circlip (8);
- the thrust plate (102).
Lightly smear the thread of the M6 screws (101)
with Loctite 242 or equivalent. Tighten to a torque
of 16 Nm.
43. Check that the unit (12) rotates freely (hub/reverse
driving gear).

Refitting the forward multidisc clutch

that are defective. 33 44
45. Check that the rivets (33) are present on the rear
end of the bell housing shaft (3) (Fig. 16).
46. If removed, fit a new needle roller bearing (44)
inside the bell housing shaft (3) (Fig. 16) using a
suitable fitting drift. Check that the needles rotate
freely.
47. Lubricate the Quadring seals (17) (19) and the bore
of the clutch bell housing concerned.
NOTE: The Quadring seals are square seals.
48. Fit the seals into the grooves of the piston (18)
without twisting them.
3
49. Position the piston in its clutch bell housing. Grad-
MA-05-05333A
ually fit it in place, tapping alternately on its rim
using a plastic fitting drift. Fig. 16
50. On the bell housing shaft (3), slide and position
(Fig. 17):
- the ten Belleville washers (20) according to the
layout noted in step 27.
51. Using a hydraulic press and service tool
ref. ATP3002, compress the Belleville washers
(Fig. 17).
52. On the bell housing shaft (3), position (Fig. 17):
- the countersunk thrust washer (29) against the
set of Belleville washers;
- the snap ring (30) in the recess of the thrust
washer.
NOTE: The thrust washer recess must be fitted
facing the snap ring.
53. De-compress the hydraulic press ram. Remove
tools.

30
P
ATP3002
29
20
3
45
S S
MA-05-05334A
Fig. 17

54. Smear the "O" ring (32) and the seal ring (24) with
miscible grease (Fig. 18). Position them in their
respective groove on the seal holder (31) (Fig. 18).
IMPORTANT: The shoulder marked with an arrow 23
(Fig. 18) must be fitted facing the ball bearing (23)
when refitting the seal holder (31).
55. Slide the complete ball bearing (23) and seal holder
(31) into the bore of the bell housing shaft (3)
(Fig. 18).
31
23 32
31
24
23
3
MA-05-05335A
Fig. 18

56. IMPORTANT: If the discs (21) are to be replaced,

soak the new discs in clean transmission oil for
approximately one hour. Check that they are well
impregnated with oil before fitting them.
Start assembly by fitting an intermediate plate
against the piston (18) and alternate until the new
intermediate plates (22) and new discs (21) (new or
re-used depending on the situation) are fitted
(Fig. 19). The fitting should end with a disc (new or
re-used, depending on the situation) against the
cover plate (26).
IMPORTANT: Ensure that the layout of the discs and
intermediate plates is correct. 18
22
21
MA-05-05336A
Fig. 19
57. Fit (Fig. 20):

- the cover plate (26) fitted with the snap ring (27);
- the circlip (25). 26
58. Check that the clutch hub (28) rotates freely.
27
25
MA-05-05337A
Fig. 20

Final steps
59. Place the Power Shuttle in a vertical position on a
suitable support S (Fig. 21).
Fit the rear cover plate (52) of the Dynashift
module to the Power Shuttle. Lightly smear the
thread of the M8 screws (103) with Loctite 242 or 103
equivalent. Tighten to a torque of 37 Nm.
60. Refit clutch O/brake N of the Dynashift module
(see chapter 5). 52
61. Close the Powershift module between the housing
(111) and the rear cover plate (52) of the Dynashift
62. Refit the Powershift module (see chapter 5).
63. Fit housing C1 to the engine (see chapter 2).
64. Reconnect the tractor between housing C of the
robotic gearbox and housing C1 of the Powershift
65. Calibrate the Power Shuttle (see chapter 11).
66. Carry out a road test on the Power Shuttle.
103
ISC
MA-05-05321A
Fig. 21

C . Service tools
• ATP3002: Belleville washer compression tool (Fig. 22)
MA-05-03983A
Fig. 22


5D12 - GBA15 - Powershift module
CONTENTS
A . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Operating principle of the Powershift module and its control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
C . Kinematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
D . Removing and refitting the Powershift module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
E . Disassembling and reassembling the Dynashift module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
F . Disassembling and reassembling the multiplier module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
G . Removing and refitting the planet gears of the Dynashift module . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
H . Removing and refitting the multiplier module planet gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
I . Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54


A . General
The GBA15 transmission Powershift module is housed
inside a housing located between the engine and the
gearbox. It provides six ratios at the gearbox input for
shifting under load.
N P L
B . Operating principle of the Power-

shift module and its control
The Powershift module comprises:
- the multiplier module
- the Dynashift module. MA-05-05236A
Fig. 1
The multiplier module

The multiplier module is controlled by proportional
solenoids valves N and P (Fig. 1).
It comprises:
- a standard epicyclic gear train;
- a clutch;
- a brake.
Direct drive (ratio 1/1)

The sun gear is attached to the planet carrier via the
clutch. Drive enters via the planet carrier and exits via
the ring gear.
Overdrive transmission (ratio 1.423/1)

The sun gear is immobilised on the gearbox housing by
the brake. It allows the engine speed to go into over-
drive when ratios E and F are engaged.

The Dynashift module

The Dynashift module provides four ratios for shifting
under load - A, B, C and D - controlled by proportional
solenoid valves L and N (Fig. 1).
It comprises: B
- two standard epicyclic gear trains (primary and secondary);
- two brakes; E
- two clutches.
I
Drive enters and exits via the primary epicyclic gear
F
train.
The clutches/brakes operate on the secondary epicy- P
clic gear train ring gear and sun gear at an opportune
moment in order to modify the rotational speed of the
primary sun gear, thus creating ratios A, B, C and D of MA-05-05237A
the Dynashift module.

Fig. 2
The clutches/brakes that select the multiplier module
ratios (Fig. 2) and the Dynashift module ratios (Fig. 3)
are each controlled by a piston P. When a brake is
engaged, the related clutch is disengaged, and vice
versa.
Control pistons P operate act both on brake discs F and
on junction plate I. When piston P is under pressure, B
plate I pushes back Belleville washers B of clutch E.
When the pressure is released, Belleville washers B E
push piston P back via junction plate I and tightens
clutch discs E. I
MA-05-06032A
Fig. 3
Powershift module control
The Powershift module ratio can be changed via
(Fig. 4):
- the multifunctional Power Control lever (1) located
on the left underneath the steering wheel;
- the lever (2) fitted to the right-hand armrest.
In basic operating mode, ratios are shifted in Speed-
matching mode. The most suitable ratio under load is
then selected automatically when shifting range.
Depending on the option, ratio shifting can be
completely automatic.
Fig. 4

Lubrication
The Powershift module is lubricated under pressure by
a network of internal channels. Oil from the tractor's
hydraulic system is supplied via the upper shaftline of
the gearbox and travels through the radial holes to the
elements to be lubricated.

Parts lists
Multiplier module (Fig. 5, Fig. 6)
(1) Cover plate
(2) Screw
(3) Screw
(4) Screw
(5) Planet carrier
(7) Ring gear
(8) Planet gear
(9) Planet gear pin
(10) Input shaft
(11) Ball bearing
(12) Clutch Q bell housing
(14) Clutch Q/brake P junction plate
(15) Clutch Q discs
(16) Clutch Q intermediate plates
(17) Brake P discs
(18) Brake P intermediate plates
(19) Screw
(20) Clutch Q cover plate
(21) Snap ring
(22) Sun gear
(23) Dynashiftmodule input shaft
(24) Ball bearing
(25) Planet gear needle rollers
(26) "O" ring
(27) Brake P piston
(28) Washer
(29) Lip seal
(30) "O" ring
(31) Spring
(32) Multiplier module housing
(33) "O" ring
(34) "O" ring
(35) Ball bearing
(36) Splined washer (bronze)
(37) Waved washer (spring)
(38) Wear plate
(39) Wear plate


30 31
1 40 37
29
3 4 5 38 6 7 8 39 9 28
27
26
25
24 23 32 33 34 35
10
11
12 36
13
22
14
15 16 Q P 17 18 19 20 21
MA-05-05238A
Fig. 5


Blown-up view
17
18
17
18
17
14
17
37
11
13
12
31
30 8
1 38 36
2 9
39
25
40
28 19
24
5
15
22
29
21
10
4
20
16
33
34
26
32
27
3
35
6 7
MA-05-05339A
Fig. 6

Dynashift module (Fig. 7, Fig. 8) (89) Secondary planet gear needle rollers
(40) Friction washer (90) Secondary planet gear
(41) Thrust washer (91) Planet gear pin
(42) Screw (92) Secondary ring gear
(43) Location of springs (93) Secondary ring gear carrier
(44) "O" ring (94) Screw
(45) Brake L piston (95) Screw
(46) "O" ring (96) Secondary ring gear/bell housing
(47) "O" ring (97) Screw
(48) "O" ring (98) Brake L disc
(49) Brake N piston (99) Brake L intermediate plates
(50) Screw (100) Waved washer (spring)
(51) Spring (101) Screw
(52) Rear cover plate of Dynashift (102) Thrust plate
(53) Dowel (103) Screw
(54) Waved washer (spring) (104) Snap ring
(55) Ball bearing (105) Primary bell housing
(56) Clutch M hub (106) Bearing with sealed face
(57) Circlip (107) Friction washer
(58) Snap ring (108) Bush
(59) Clutch M bell housing (109) Clutch M discs
(60) Belleville washers (110) Clutch M intermediate plates
(61) Clutch M/brake L junction plate (111) Dynashift module housing
(62) Snap ring (112) "O" ring
(64) Planet gear pin
(65) Wear plates
(67) Primary planet gear needle rollers
(68) Primary planet gear
(69) Wear plates
(71) Screw
(72) Clutch O cover plate
(73) Clutch O bell housing
(74) Clutch O/brake N junction plate
(76) Clutch O discs
(77) Clutch O intermediate plates
(78) Snap ring
(79) Clutch O hub
(80) Shaft/bell housings
(81) Spacer
(82) Ball bearing
(83) Ball bearing
(84) Screw
(87) Brake N discs
(88) Brake N intermediate plates


50 54 112 111 53 52
108
107
F
61 62 63 64 65 66 67 65 68 69 70 71 72 73 106
60
74
75
59 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 49 48 51 50
76 77
23 O
100
58
78
57 79
56 80
55 82 81
84
110 109
85
M
86 101
104
L N
103 102
99 98 97 83 105 96 95 94 89 93 92 91 90 87 88
MA-05-05239A Fig. 7


Blown-up view
49
111
48
47
98 77
99
98 79
59 99 72
40 71
98
42
61
41
98
111
112
56 76 50
62
67 70
68 65 53
109
65 51
64
60
57
66
110 105 74
54
97 88
96 52
46
44
95 107
45 100
63
78
58 73
82
55 75
94
89 85
90 69
91 87
93 92
84
43 62
83
86
81
MA-05-05340A Fig. 8


C . Kinematics
Parts list (Fig. 9)
(1) Multiplier module
(2) Dynashift module
L Ring gear brake, secondary epicyclic gear train
M Ring gear clutch, secondary epicyclic gear train
N Sun gear brake, secondary epicyclic gear train of
O Sun gear clutch, secondary epicyclic gear train
P Ring gear brake of the multiplier module
Q Ring gear clutch of the multiplier module
1 L 2
P
Q M
O
MA-05-05240A Fig. 9

Explanation of the ratios

The six ratios are obtained by combining the four
Dynashift module ratios with the two multiplier
module ratios.
For ratios A, B, C and D, the multiplier is not engaged:
its ratio is 1/1.
For ratios E and F, ratios C and D of the Dynashift
module are used in combination with the multiplier
module, which provides a ratio of 1.423/1.
Drive is always transmitted via the primary epicyclic

gear train, entering via the primary ring gear and exiting
via the primary planet carrier. The four ratios are
obtained by modifying the rotational speed of the
primary sun gear, which is set by the secondary epicy-
clic gear train.
Powershift Multiplier Dynashift Solenoid valve Clutches/Brakes

ratio (X = engaged)
Status Ratio Status Ratio L N P L M N O P Q
A Direct drive 1/1 A 1/1.698 12 V 12 V X X X
B Direct drive 1/1 B 1/1.423 12 V X X X
C Direct drive 1/1 C 1/1.193 12 V X X X
D Direct drive 1/1 D 1/1 X X X
E Epicyclic gear 1.423/1 C 1/1.193 12 V 12 V X X X
train engaged
F Epicyclic gear 1.423/1 D 1/1 12 V X X X
train engaged
Ratios and reaction of the Powershift module clutches/brakes

Ratio A (1/1.698) (Fig. 10) Legend

The epicyclic gear train of the multiplier is locked in Multiplier epicyclic gear train lock
rotation by clutch Q. Its ratio is 1/1.
Primary sun gear control
The two pistons of brakes L and N of the Dynashift
module are pressurised. The ring gear and sun gear of Transmission of movement to Power Shuttle
the secondary epicyclic gear train are fixed in relation and gearbox
to the gearbox housing. As a result, the planet carrier
of this gear train is fixed and holds the primary sun gear
of the first epicyclic gear train.
Reduction is provided by the speed of the primary
planet carrier.
Q L N
MA-05-05241A
Fig. 10

Ratio B (1/1.423) (Fig. 11) Legend

The piston of brake L of the Dynashift module is pres-
surised. Clutch O is locked by the Belleville washers. Transmission of movement to Power Shuttle
The sun gear on the secondary epicyclic gear train and gearbox
turns at the same speed as the secondary shaft,
driving the secondary planet carrier rotation and there-
fore the sun gear on the primary epicyclic gear train.
Q L O
MA-05-05242A
Fig. 11

Ratio C (1/1.193) (Fig. 12) Legend

The piston of brake N of the Dynashift module is pres-
surised. Clutch M is locked by the Belleville washers. Transmission of movement to Power Shuttle
The primary shaft drives the ring gears of the two and gearbox
epicyclic gear trains. On the secondary epicyclic gear
train, the sun gear is fixed in relation to the gearbox
housing and the ring gear drives the secondary planet
carrier and the primary sun gear.
Q M N
MA-05-05243A
Fig. 12

Ratio D (1/1) (Fig. 13) Legend

The two pistons of brakes L and N of the Dynashift
module are not pressurised. The two clutches M and Transmission of movement to Power Shuttle
O are locked by the Belleville washers. The primary and gearbox
and secondary ring gears receive the input speed. The
secondary sun gear is attached to the secondary shaft,
thus mechanically locking the Dynashift module.
The input and output speeds are identical. The ratio is
1/1.
Q M L N O
MA-05-05244A
Fig. 13

Ratio E (1.423/1.193) (Fig. 14) Legend

Brake P is engaged, thus locking the sun gear of the Multiplier epicyclic gear train lock
multiplier to the gearbox housing. The multiplier epicy-
clic gear train can therefore turn. It increases the input
speed with a ratio of 1.423/1. Transmission of movement to Power Shuttle
The piston of brake N of the Dynashift module is pres- and gearbox
surised. Clutch M is locked by the Belleville washers.
The primary shaft drives the ring gears of the two
epicyclic gear trains. On the secondary epicyclic gear
train, the sun gear is fixed in relation to the gearbox
housing and the ring gear drives the secondary planet
carrier and the primary sun gear.
P M N
MA-05-05245A
Fig. 14

Ratio F (1.423/1) (Fig. 15) Legend

Brake P is engaged, thus locking the sun gear of the Multiplier epicyclic gear train lock
multiplier to the gearbox housing. The multiplier epicy-
clic gear train can therefore turn. It increases the input
speed with a ratio of 1.423/1. Transmission of movement to Power Shuttle
The two pistons of brakes L and N of the Dynashift and gearbox
module are not pressurised. The two clutches M and
O are locked by the Belleville washers. The primary
and secondary ring gears receive the input speed. The
secondary sun gear is attached to the secondary shaft,
thus mechanically locking the Dynashift module.
The input and output speeds are identical. The ratio is
1/1.
P M L N O
MA-05-05246A
Fig. 15

D . Removing and refitting the

Powershift module
Preliminary steps
1. Disconnect the tractor between housing C of the
2. Separate housing C1 from the engine (see
C C1 C
chapter 2).
3. Remove the hydraulic control unit located to the
right of housing C1 together with its connecting
pipes T (Fig. 16).
4. From housing C1 (Fig. 17) remove:
- the PTO shaft;
- the reverse layshaft;
- the reverse driven gear.
MA-05-05247A
Fig. 16
C1
MA-05-05248A
Fig. 17

5. Stabilise housing C1 of the Powershift module in a

vertical position on wooden blocks (Fig. 18).
Removal C1
6. Unscrew three screws (2) from the multiplier cover
plate (Fig. 19). In their place, fit locally obtained
flanges B using screws V (Fig. 19) with the correct
thread length.
7. Unscrew the eight M10 screws V2 without
working on the M8 screws V1 (Fig. 20).
IMPORTANT: Unscrewing the M8 screws would
cause the Powershift module to separate, which is
not desired.
8. Sling the Powershift module (Fig. 20). MA-05-05249A
9. To remove the Powershift module from housing

Fig. 18
C1, proceed as follows:
- Using a suitable sling and hoist, lift the Power-
shift module slightly out of housing C1.
- Turn the Powershift module so that lug O of the
reverse layshaft gear is positioned between the B V
two bosses B (Fig. 20).
- Tilt the Powershift module steeply towards lug O
and continue to lift it so that it enters groove A
(approx. Ø 310 mm) of housing C1 (Fig. 20).
- Definitively remove the Powershift module from
housing C1.
B B
10. Remove and discard seal J (Fig. 21).
11. Place the Powershift module in a vertical position
on a suitable support S (Fig. 22).
V V
MA-05-05250A
2
Fig. 19

MA-05-05252A
Fig. 21
C1 V1 V2
MA-05-05253A
Fig. 22
C1
A
MA-05-05251A
Fig. 20

Refitting
12. Lightly smear "O" ring J with miscible grease. Fit it
into the groove of the Powershift module housing
(111) (Fig. 23).
13. Check that dowel P is present on housing C1
(Fig. 24).
14. Clean mating face F of the Powershift module
(Fig. 23) and that of housing C1 (Fig. 24). F
IMPORTANT: If mating face F of housing C1 was
chipped or deformed during the removal of the
Powershift module, smooth it off with fine sand- J
paper. 111
15. To refit the Powershift module in housing C1,
proceed as follows:
- Use flanges B and the sling used during removal
MA-05-05254A
(see previous steps).
- Mark the location of dowel P with a line of paint Fig. 23
on housing C1 (Fig. 24) and on the Powershift
module.
- Position the Powershift module at the opening of
groove A of housing C1, positioning lug O of the
reverse layshaft gear between the two bosses B
(Fig. 20).
- Tilt the Powershift module steeply towards lug O
and continue to lower it so that it enters groove
A of housing C1 (Fig. 20).
When it has entered the groove of housing C1,
continue to lower the Powershift module slowly,
turning it gently to bring it into position with the P
paint lines made previously.
- Definitively refit the Powershift module in housing F
C1.
16. Screw the eight M10 screws V2 (Fig. 26). Tighten
to 57-77 Nm. C1
MA-05-05255A
17. On the multiplier cover plate (Fig. 26):
Fig. 24
- Unscrew screws V. Remove the locally obtained
flanges B.
- Screw in the original screws (2). Tighten to a
torque of 37 Nm.
O T
MA-05-05258A
Fig. 25

Final steps
18. Stabilise front housing C1 of the Powershift module
in a horizontal position.
19. Refit (Fig. 27):
- the reverse driven gear;
- the reverse layshaft;
- the PTO shaft.
20. Clean the mating faces (Fig. 25):
- of the hydraulic cover plate;
- of the hydraulic control cover plate on housing
C1.
21. Check that transfer pipes T are present (Fig. 25).
22. Lightly smear the mating face of the hydraulic
cover plate on housing C1 with Loctite 510 or
equivalent.
NOTE: Do not block low-pressure hydraulic port O
(approx. 21 bar) (Fig. 25) supplying ranges 1 to 4 of
the robotic gearbox.
23. Refit the hydraulic control unit. V2
Screw in the screw. Tighten to 57-77 Nm. B V
24. Fit housing C1 to the engine (see chapter 2).
25. Reconnect the tractor between housing C of the
module (Fig. 16 and chapter 2). B
B
V
V
2
MA-05-05256A
Fig. 26
C1
MA-05-05257A Fig. 27

E . Disassembling and reassembling .

Preliminary steps
26. Remove the Powershift module (see § D).
27. Make a paint mark R on the Dynashift module
housing (111) and on the rear cover plate (52) in R
order to correctly replace them at reassembly
(Fig. 28).
50
28. Unscrew the M10 screws (50) (Fig. 28).
29. Using the sling and flanges B used in § D, open the
Powershift module between the housing (111) and 50 R
the rear cover plate (52) of the Dynashift module
(Fig. 28).
When opening, slowly turn and lift the multiplier
module/Dynashift assembly so that notches E of
piston (49) of brake N engage with the planet gears 68
(68) (90) (Fig. 28). 111
NOTE: The piston (49) of brake N may come loose 90
from the housing (111) during opening. In this
case, recover the piston for subsequent refitting.
52
R
S
E
49
E E
MA-05-05259A
Fig. 28

Disassembling clutch O/brake N of the

Dynashift module
58
30. Place the rear part of the Powershift module on a
suitable support S, with the cover plate and planet 51
carriers facing upwards (Fig. 29).
- the twelve springs (51); 58
- planet carrier assembly E (primary/secondary).
NOTE: If is necessary to replace the primary (68)
E
and/or secondary (90) planet gears, refer to § G.
- clutch O/brake N; 51
- the friction washer (107);
- the first disc (87) of brake N; S
- the hub (79); MA-05-05260A
Fig. 29
- the waved washer (spring) (100).
33. Unscrew the screws (84). Remove the secondary
sun gear (85).
34. Unscrew the screws (71). Remove the cover plate
(72) of clutch O. 79
35. Make a note of the order in which the elements are
stacked in the bell housing (73) of clutch O.
Remove:
- the remaining discs (87) of brake N and the inter-
mediate plates (88);
- the discs (76) of clutch O and the intermediate
plates (77);
- the junction plate (74) of clutch O/brake N;
- the Belleville washers (75).
36. If necessary, on the rear cover plate (52), unscrew
the screws (101) and remove the thrust plate (102)
(Fig. 31).
O/N
87 100
107
MA-05-05261A
Fig. 30

Reassembling clutch O/brake N of the

Dynashift module
37. If disassembled, refit the thrust plate (102) on the
rear cover plate (52) (Fig. 31).
Lightly smear the thread of the M6 screws (101) 52
with Loctite 242 or equivalent. Screw in and
tighten the screws to 16 Nm.
38. Lightly smear the friction washer (107) with 101
miscible grease. Position it against the bell housing
(73) of clutch O.
39. Refit the bell housing (73)/friction washer (107) 102
assembly on the thrust plate (102).
40. On the rear cover plate (52), fit the first disc (87) of MA-05-05262A
brake N (Fig. 32).
41. Assemble the parts of the bell housing (73) of
clutch O/brake N in the following order (Fig. 33):
Fig. 31
- the Belleville washers (75)
IMPORTANT: Ensure these washers are fitted in
the correct direction;
- the junction plate (74) of clutch O/brake N;
- the hub (79);
- the discs (76) of clutch O and the intermediate
plates (77);
52
- the discs (87) of brake N and the intermediate
plates (88).
IMPORTANT: If the brake discs and clutch discs have
42. Refit the cover plate (72) of clutch O (Fig. 33,
Fig. 34).
43. Lightly smear the thread of the screws (71) with
Loctite 242 or equivalent (Fig. 34). Screw in and 87
MA-05-05263A
Fig. 32
76 79
77 73
72 74
75
87
88
MA-05-05264A
Fig. 33

44. Refit the secondary sun gear (85) (Fig. 34).

45. Lightly smear the thread of the screws (84) with 85 84
Loctite 242 or equivalent (Fig. 34). Screw in and
46. Fit the spring washer (100) with its back against
the cover plate (72) of clutch O (Fig. 34).
47. Refit (Fig. 35): 100
- planet carrier assembly E (primary/secondary);
- a new snap ring (58);
- the twelve springs (51).
71
72
MA-05-05265A Fig. 34
58
51
58
51
S
Fig. 35
MA-05-05266A

Disassembling clutch M/brake L of the

Dynashift module
48. Place the front part of the Powershift module on a
suitable support S, with the primary and secondary
ring gears facing upwards (Fig. 36).
49. If the piston (49) of brake N did not come out of its
cavity when the Powershift module was opened
(housing (111)/rear cover plate (52)), make a paint R
mark R on the piston (49) in line with the one
already marked on the housing (111) (Fig. 36).
Drive out the piston (49) fitted with its "O" rings (47) 49
(48).
50. Insert a pin or pin punch 8 mm in diameter into one 111
of the holes located on the rim of the secondary
bell housing (96) to immobilise the housing in rota-
tion (Fig. 40). S
Unscrew the screws (94). Remove the secondary MA-05-05267A Fig. 36
ring gear carrier (93) (Fig. 40).
51. Using tool ref. 3376920M2 and two locally
obtained cylindrical spacers E (Fig. 40 and § I),
gently compress the waved washer (spring) (54),
without forcing, via the ring gear (66) and primary 66 105
bell housing (105).
52. Remove the circlip (57) (Fig. 40). Discard it.
53. Remove the primary bell housing (105)/ring gear (66)
assembly (Fig. 37). If necessary, extract the ball
bearing (55) from the primary bell housing using a
makeshift tool.
- the waved washer (spring) (54);
- the input shaft (23) and hub (56).
55. Insert a pin or pin punch 8 mm in diameter into one of
the holes located on the rim of the secondary bell
housing (96) to immobilise the housing in rotation
MA-05-05269A
(Fig. 39).
Fig. 37
56. Unscrew the screws (97).
Remove the secondary bell housing (96) (Fig. 39).
54
23
56
MA-05-05270A
Fig. 38

96
97
Ø 8 mm
MA-05-05271A
Fig. 39
Ø 8 mm
57
96
3376920M2
93 94 E
MA-05-05268A
Fig. 40

57. Remove "O" rings J from the hydraulic ports (21 bar)
located on the rim of the Dynashift module housing
(111) (Fig. 41).
58. Make a paint mark R on the Dynashift module
housing (111) and on the multiplier module J
housing (32) in order to correctly replace them at
reassembly (Fig. 42).
59. Unscrew the four M8 screws (4) (Fig. 44).
60. Remove the Dynashift module housing (111).
61. Discard the "O" rings (34) (112) located between
the Dynashift module housing (111) and the multi- 111
plier housing (32) (Fig. 44).
NOTE: The "O" ring (34) ensures the housings (111)
and (32) are sealed. The "O" ring (112) ensures the
hydraulic channel (21 bar) to the multiplier is
MA-05-05272A
sealed.
62. Make a paint mark R on the piston (45) of brake L Fig. 41
in line with the one already marked on the housing
(111) (Fig. 43).
63. Drive out the piston (45) fitted with its seals (44)
(46).
64. Remove the twelve springs (43).
stacked in the bell housing (59) of clutch M. 111
Remove (Fig. 45):
- the discs (98) of brake L and the intermediate
plates (99);
- the discs (109) of clutch M and the intermediate
plates (110);
- the junction plate (61) of clutch M/brake L;
66. Remove (Fig. 45): R 32
- the bell housing (59);
- the friction washer (40). S
MA-05-05273A
Fig. 42
45 R 111
MA-05-05275A
Fig. 43

98 99 109 110 59
111
4 32
61 60 40 61
S
32
59
34
112 MA-05-05276A
MA-05-05274A
Fig. 44 Fig. 45

Reassembling clutch M/brake L of the

Dynashift module 40
67. Ensure the parts are clean.
68. Lightly smear the friction washer (40) with miscible
grease and position it against the bell housing (59) of
clutch M (Fig. 46).
69. Refit the bell housing (59)/friction washer (40)
assembly on the thrust plate (41).
70. On the multiplier housing (32), fit the first disc (98) of
brake L (Fig. 47).
71. Assemble the parts of the bell housing (59) of
clutch M/brake L (Fig. 47) in the following order
(Fig. 48):
- the Belleville washers (60). 59
the correct direction; MA-05-05277A Fig. 46
- the junction plate (61) of clutch M/brake L;
- the input shaft (23) and hub (56);
- the discs (109) of clutch M and the intermediate
plates (110);
- the remaining discs (98) of brake L and the inter- 32
mediate plates (99).
59
72. Refit the twelve springs (43) (Fig. 48).
73. On the Dynashift, module unit (111), ensure the
hydraulic channels (21 bar) are not blocked (Fig. 41). 98
MA-05-05278A Fig. 47
109 23 56
M
110
61
98
99 60
43
MA-05-05279A Fig. 48

74. Fit new, lubricated "O" rings (44) (46) into the grooves
of the piston (45).
75. Fit the piston (45) in the Dynashift module housing
(111) according to paint marks R (Fig. 49). 45 R 111
Fit the piston in the housing, tapping it moderately
on its rim using a plastic hammer.
IMPORTANT: The piston (45) has openings that
allow it to fit into lugs T of the multiplier module
If it is necessary to fit a new piston (without
marks), openings O of the piston must be correctly
positioned in the Dynashift module housing (111)
in relation to lugs T of the multiplier module
housing (32). In this case, proceed as follows to
correctly position openings O of the piston
(Fig. 50): MA-05-05280A
- Test fit the new piston (45) on the multiplier

Fig. 49
module housing (32).
- Ensure the twelve springs (43) are in positions r
on the piston and that all openings O are in line
with all lugs T of the multiplier module housing
(32).
- Make a paint mark R on the piston (45) in line
with the one already marked on the multiplier
module housing (32). 32
- Fit new, lubricated "O" rings (44) (46) into the
grooves of the new piston (45).
- Position the new piston (45) on the Dynashift O
module housing (111) according to the marks.
Definitively fit the piston in the housing (111),
tapping it moderately on its rim using a plastic r
hammer. r
T 45
r
r
r
r
45 R 45
111
43 T 43 32 R
MA-05-05281A
Fig. 50

76. Oil two new "O" rings (34) (112).

Install (Fig. 51): 32
- the "O" ring (34) in groove G;
- the "O" ring (112) in countersunk port O (21 bar).
34
77. Refit the Dynashift module housing (111), aligning
its mark with that of the multiplier module housing
(32). G
Screw in and tighten the four M8 screws (4)
(Fig. 52) to 25-35 Nm.
78. Oil "O" rings J. Fit them in the hydraulic ports
(21 bar) of the Dynashift module housing (111)
(Fig. 41). O
79. Refit the secondary bell housing (96) on clutch
M/brake L (Fig. 53). Lightly smear the thread of the 112
screws (97) with Loctite 242 or equivalent. Screw in
the screws. Immobilise the secondary bell housing
as in step 50. Tighten the screws to 33 Nm. MA-05-05282A
Fig. 51
80. Refit the waved washer (spring) (54) (Fig. 53).
81. If the ball bearing (55) was removed from the
primary bell housing (105), fit the housing with a
new ball bearing.
Refit the primary bell housing/ring gear (66) and
ball bearing assembly on the waved washer
(spring) (54).
111
4 32
S
MA-05-05283A Fig. 52
96
97
54
MA-05-05284A Fig. 53

82. Using tool ref. 3376920M2 and the two locally

obtained cylindrical spacers E, repeat step 51 to fit 57
a new circlip (57) (Fig. 54).
83. Refit the secondary ring gear carrier (93). Immobi-
lise the secondary bell housing (96) (Fig. 40).
Loctite 242 or equivalent. Screw in and tighten the
screws to 16 Nm.
84. Fit new, lubricated "O" rings (47) (48) into the
grooves of the piston (49).
3376920M2
MA-05-05285A Fig. 54

85. Position the piston (49) in the Dynashift module

housing (111) according to marks R (Fig. 55).
111 49
IMPORTANT: The piston (49) is has openings that
allow it to fit into lugs T of the rear cover plate (52)
of the Dynashift module (Fig. 56).
positioned in the Dynashift module housing (111)
in relation to lugs T of the rear cover plate (52) of
the Dynashift module. In this case, proceed as
follows to correctly position openings O of the
piston (49) (Fig. 56):
- Test fit the new piston (49) on the rear cover 49 R
plate (52) of the Dynashift module.
- Ensure the twelve springs (51) are in positions r MA-05-05286A
Fig. 55
with all lugs T of the rear cover plate (52) of the
Dynashift module.
- Make a paint mark R on the piston (49) in line O
with the one already marked on the rear cover
plate (52) of the Dynashift module.
grooves of the new piston (49). r
r
- Position the new piston (49) on the Dynashift
module housing (111) according to the marks. r
Definitively fit the piston in the housing (111), r
tapping it moderately on its rim using a plastic
hammer.
r
r
52 T 49 O 111
R 49 R 49
51 T 52
MA-05-05287A Fig. 56

Final steps
86. Position a secondary planet gear (90) of the planet
carrier (86) in line with a primary planet gear (68) of
the planet carrier (63) (Fig. 57).
63
Make a visible mark to identify the positioning of
notch E of the piston (49) in the Dynashift module
housing (111) (Fig. 58). 68
NOTE: The alignment of the planet gears (90) (68)
with notch E of the piston (49) systematically
aligns the remaining planet gears and notches E. 86
87. Using sling ref. 3376920M2 (see § I) and flanges B
used in § D, slowly close the Powershift module 90
(housing (111)/rear cover plate (52)) (Fig. 58).
IMPORTANT: When closing, make sure to align
(Fig. 58):
- notch E of the piston (49) with the planet gears MA-05-05288A
(68) (90) (Fig. 57); Fig. 57
- marks R on the housing (111) and rear cover
plate (52).
88. Screw in the M10 screws (50) (Fig. 58). Tighten to 49 111
a torque of 77 Nm.
89. Refit the Powershift module in the front gearbox
housing (see § D).
52
S
50
MA-05-05289A
Fig. 58


the multiplier module 1
Preliminary steps
90. Remove the Powershift module (see § D).
91. Remove clutch M/brake L of the Dynashift module
(see § E).
R
Disassembly
92. Using the sling and flanges B used in § D, place the
multiplier module on a workbench with the cover
plate (1) facing upwards (Fig. 59). 32
93. Make two paint marks R, one on the housing (32), MA-05-05290A
the other on the cover plate (1) of the multiplier Fig. 59

module (Fig. 59) so that each part can be replaced
in its original position at reassembly.
94. Unscrew the M8 screws (2) (Fig. 60).
95. Position guard xxxM1 (see Fig. 60 and § I) on the 10
input shaft (10) (Fig. 60).
96. Separate the cover plate (1) from the housing (32).
Remove the cover plate. Recover the twelve
springs (31). If necessary, extract the lip seal (29)
(Fig. 61).
Remove and discard the "O" ring (30).
- clutch Q/brake P;
- the friction washer (28); xxxM1
2
brake P disc.
MA-05-05291A
Fig. 60
31
29
1 32
30
MA-05-05292A
Fig. 61

98. Unscrew the screws (19). Remove the cover plate

(20) fitted with the sun gear (22) (Fig. 63). Q/P
NOTE: The sun gear (22) is joined to the cover plate
(20) by the snap ring (21).
stacked in the bell housing (12) of clutch Q/brake P.
Remove:
- the discs (17) of brake P and the intermediate
plates (18);
- the discs (15) of clutch Q and the intermediate
plates (16);
- the junction plate (14) of clutch Q/brake P;
100.Remove (Fig. 64):
- the input shaft (10) fitted with the waved washer P 28
(spring) (37);
- the ball bearing (11). MA-05-05293A Fig. 62
21 22
19
20
MA-05-05294A S
Fig. 63
10 37
11
MA-05-05295A Fig. 64

101.Make a paint mark R on the piston (27) in line with

the one already marked on the multiplier module
102.Drive out the piston (27) fitted with its seals (26)
(33).
- the planet carrier (5)/planet gear (8) assembly 27
NOTE: If it is necessary to replace the planet
gears (8), refer to § H;
- the ring gear carrier (6)/ring gear (7) assembly
fitted with its ball bearings (24) (35) and the R
splined bronze washer (36).
If necessary, extract the ball bearing (35) from
the ring gear carrier (6) with a suitable puller.
104.If necessary, unscrew the screws (42) and remove
the thrust washer (41) (Fig. 67). R 32
MA-05-05296A Fig. 65
Reassembly
105.Ensure the parts are clean.
106.Place the bell housing (12) on a suitable support S 5 8 6 7 24 35
(Fig. 68).
107.Assemble the parts of the bell housing (12) of clutch
Q/brake P in the following order (Fig. 68):
- the input shaft (10) fitted with the waved washer
(spring) (37);
- the Belleville washers (13)
the correct direction;
- the junction plate (14) of clutch Q/brake P;
- the discs (15) of clutch Q and the intermediate 36
plates (16);
- the discs (17) of brake P and the intermediate
MA-05-05297A
plates (18). Fig. 66
108.Refit the cover plate (20) fitted with the sun gear
(22) (Fig. 68). Lightly smear the thread of the
screws (19) with Loctite 242 or equivalent. Screw
in and tighten the screws to 37 Nm.
Place the cover plate (1) of the multiplier module on a 42
suitable support, positioning its internal face upwards.
41
MA-05-05298A
Fig. 67

109.Lightly smear the friction washer (28) with miscible

grease and position it against the bell housing (12)
of clutch Q (Fig. 69).
110.On the cover plate (1), position the last disc (17) of
brake P.
111.Slide guard xxxM1 (see § I) over the splines of the 12
input shaft (10) (Fig. 69).
11
10
37
S
14 15 16
13
Q/P
20
14 17 18 19
22
MA-05-05299A Fig. 68
10
xxxM1
28 12 Q
MA-05-05300A Fig. 69

112.Refit the clutch Q/brake P and shaft (10) assembly

in the cover plate (1) (Fig. 70).
113.Remove the guard on the input shaft (10).
114.Refit the planet carrier (5) (Fig. 70), if possible
aligning the lubrication holes of the planet carrier
with those of the input shaft splines.
115.Refit the ball bearing (24), the splined bronze
washer (36) and the twelve springs (31) (Fig. 70).
116.Refit the ring gear carrier (6)/ring gear (7) assembly
fitted with the ball bearing (35) into the multiplier
module housing (32) (Fig. 71).
117.Fit new, lubricated "O" rings (26) (33) into the
grooves of the piston (27).
118.Position the piston (27) on the multiplier module
housing (32) according to marks R (Fig. 72).
IMPORTANT: The piston (27) has openings that
allow it to fit into lugs T of the multiplier module
cover plate (1) (Fig. 73).
positioned in the multiplier module housing (32) in
relation to lugs T of the multiplier module cover
plate (1). In this case, proceed as follows to
correctly position openings O of the piston (27)
(Fig. 73):
- Test fit the new piston (27) on the multiplier
module cover plate (1).
- Ensure the twelve springs (31) are in positions r
with all lugs T of the multiplier module cover
plate (1).
- Make a paint mark R on the piston (27) in line
with the one already marked on the multiplier
module cover plate (1).
grooves of the new piston (27).
- Position the new piston (27) in the multiplier
module housing (32) according to the marks.
Definitively fit the piston (27), tapping it moder-
ately on its rim using a plastic hammer.
119.Grease a new "O" ring (30). Fit it into the groove of
the multiplier module cover plate (1) (Fig. 74).

36
1
5
Q/P
1 T T O O
r
31 r
24
MA-05-05301A
r
Fig. 70 r
27 r
r
6 R 32
7
35
31 T 31 1
32
R 27
MA-05-05302A
MA-05-05304A Fig. 73
Fig. 71
27
1
32
30 S
MA-05-05305A Fig. 74
R
MA-05-05303A
Fig. 72

120.Make a visible mark to identify the positioning

(Fig. 75): R
- of notch E of the piston (27);
- of a plant gear (8) on the planet carrier (5).
121.Using the sling and flanges B used previously,
close the multiplier module (housing (32)/cover
plate (1)). When closing, make sure to align 32
(Fig. 75):
- notch E of the piston (27) and planet gear (8)
marked previously; 27
- mark R on the housing (32) and cover plate (1).
122.Screw in the M8 screws (2). Tighten to a torque of
37 Nm.
Final steps
123.Reassemble clutch M/brake L. 5
Close the Dynashift module (see § E).
124.Refit the Powershift module (see § D).
8
MA-05-05306A
Fig. 75

G . Removing and refitting the E

planet gears of the Dynashift
module
58
Preliminary steps
125.Remove the Powershift module from the front
63
gearbox housing (see § D).
126.Open the Dynashift module (see § E).
127.Remove (Fig. 76, Fig. 77):
- planet carrier assembly E (63) (86);
86
- the spacer (81). S
128.Separate the secondary planet carrier (86) from the MA-05-05307A Fig. 76
primary planet carrier (63).
Removing the primary planet gears

(Fig. 77)
The primary planet carrier (63) is fitted with six planet E 82 78
gears (68). It transmits drive from the engine to the
transmission via the Power Shuttle.
129.Using a press and a suitable fixture, extract the pin

(64) of a planet gear (68) in the direction of the thin
part of the primary planet carrier (63).
130.Remove the planet gear and the wear plates (65).
Recover the bearing needles.
131.Repeat steps 129 and 130 for the other five planet
gears. 62 81
Removing the secondary planet gears

(Fig. 77) 83
The secondary planet carrier (86) is fitted with four
planet gears (90). It controls the rotational speed of the 65
primary sun gear.
69
132.Unscrew the screws (95). Remove the primary sun
gear (70).
133.Remove the ball bearing (83).
134.If necessary, remove the snap ring (62). 67
(91) of a planet gear (90) in the direction of the thin 86 95 64 91 68
part of the secondary planet carrier (86).
90
136.Remove the planet gear and the wear plates (69).
Recover the bearing needles.
63
137.Repeat steps 135 and 136 for the other three
planet gears.
70
MA-05-05308A Fig. 77

Refitting the primary planet gears

138.Clean and check all components. Replace those
that are defective. R
IMPORTANT: In particular, check:
- that rivet R is present on one end of the planet
gear pin (64) (Fig. 78);
- that there are no filings in:
-the hydraulic ports of the primary planet carrier 64
(63),
-the central channel and radial holes of the planet
gear pin (64).
139.Fit the bearing needles (67), smeared with miscible
grease, into a primary planet gear (68).
140.Place the primary planet carrier (63) on a suitable
fixture positioned on a table press, with holes T MA-05-05309A
facing upwards to allow the planet carrier to be

Fig. 78
fitted freely (Fig. 79).
NOTE: The planet gear pin (64) fits freely into hole
T drilled into the thin part of the planet carrier (63)
(Fig. 79). P
141.Slide and centre a primary planet gear (68) fitted
with its bearing needles (67) and wear plates (65)
into one of the cavities of the primary planet carrier 64
(63) (Fig. 79).
142.Fit the planet gear pin (64) as follows (Fig. 79):
- Make a paint mark on the pin (64) identifying the O
position of radial hole O, in line with the mark
made for the corresponding lubrication hole O on
the primary planet carrier (63).
- Partially engage the pin into one of the holes T, 65 67 68 63
which allow the primary planet carrier (63) to be
fitted freely. T
- Position the paint marks on the pin (64) and lubri-
cation hole O of the primary planet carrier (63) in
line with one another.
- Gradually fit the pin (64) using press P, while
simultaneously ensuring the progression and O
free rotation of the planet gear.
NOTE: When the pin (64) is fitted definitively, its
end (inserted side) should be almost level with
face F of the primary planet carrier (63) (Fig. 79).
IMPORTANT: Insert an iron wire into the hydraulic
channel of the planet carrier (63) to check that F 64 63
the hydraulic ports are correctly aligned.
143.Repeat steps 138 to 142 for the other five planet
gears.
MA-05-05310A
Fig. 79

Lubricating the primary planet gears

The primary planet gears (68) (Fig. 80) are lubricated by
the low-pressure lubrication system via the upper 68
shaftline.
Refitting the secondary planet gears

The principle of refitting the secondary planet gears
(90) is identical to the principle used to refit the primary
planet gears (68).
IMPORTANT: Before refitting the planet gears, check
the presence of oil deflector D (Fig. 81) and the
imprints of its crimping on the secondary planet carrier
(86).
MA-05-05311A
Lubricating the secondary planet gears
Fig. 80
The secondary planet gears (90) (Fig. 82) are lubricated
by the low-pressure lubrication system via the upper
shaftline.
86
MA-05-05312A
Fig. 81
90
MA-05-05313A
Fig. 82

Final steps
144.Reassemble the two planet carriers (primary 78
(63)/secondary (86)).
82
145.Refit (Fig. 83):
- the spacer (81);
81
- a new snap ring (78);
- planet carrier assembly E on the rear part of the
Dynashift;
- a new snap ring (58).
146.Close the Dynashift module (see § E). Refit it in the
front gearbox housing (see § D).
86
58
63
MA-05-05314A
Fig. 83

H . Removing and refitting the multi-

plier module planet gears
9
Preliminary steps
147.Remove the Powershift module from the front
gearbox housing (see § D).
148.Open:
- the Dynashift module (see § E).
- the multiplier module (see § F)
149.Remove the planet carrier (5) (see § F). 5
8
Removing the planet gears (Fig. 84)
The planet carrier (5) of the multiplier module is fitted 9
with three planet gears (8). It transmits drive from the
engine to the transmission via the Dynashift module
and the Power Shuttle.
(9) of a planet gear (8) in the direction of the thin
part of the planet carrier (5).
151.Remove the planet gear and the wear plates (38)
(39). Recover the bearing needles (25).
152.Repeat steps 150 and 151 for the other two planet
39
gears.
25 8
Refitting the planet gears

38
The principle of refitting the planet gears (8) (Fig. 84) is
identical to the principle used to refit the primary (68)
and secondary (90) planet gears of the Dynashift
module. MA-05-05315A
Fig. 84
Lubricating the planet gears

The planet gears (8) (Fig. 85) are lubricated by the
low-pressure lubrication system via the upper
shaftline.
8
Final steps
153.Close:
- the multiplier module (see § F);
- the Dynashift module (see § E).
154.Refit the Powershift module in the front gearbox
housing (see § D).
MA-05-05316A
Fig. 85

I . Service tools
3376920M2
E
• 3376920M2: Compression tool for the primary ring
gear of the Dynashift module (Fig. 86)
• xxxM1: Guard for the lip seal of the multiplier module

input shaft (Fig. 87)
MA-05-05317A
Fig. 86
Fig. 87

5D13 - GBA15 - Robotic mechanical gearbox
CONTENTS
A . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Principles of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
C . Kinematics of the ranges and description of the gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
D . Removing the gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
E . Removing and refitting the primary shaft/output shaft unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
F . Disassembling and reassembling the primary shaft and output shaft. . . . . . . . . . 22
G . Shimming the primary shaft, reverse layshaft gear and output shaft . . . . . . . . . . 35
H . Adjusting the selector rails controlling the forks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
I . Adjusting the safety device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
J . Fitting the speed sensor on the gearbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
K . Final steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
L . Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51


A . General
The GBA15 gearbox is fitted to tractors with Dyna-6
transmission. This transmission is fully automated. It
allows shifting between all the ratios without
declutching.
The GBA15 gearbox is divided into two sections:

- the Powershift module, with six ratios for shifting
under load (see relevant section);
- the robotic mechanical gearbox, with four ratios.
The transmission assembly is controlled electronically

by an Autotronic 5 controller (see chapter 11).
Fig. 1
B . Principles of operation
The GBA15 gearbox has 24 ratios provided by:
- the six Powershift module ratios for shifting under
load and
- the four mechanical ratios of the gearbox, which are
controlled like a ratio for shifting under load.
The ratios can be controlled manually or automatically

using Autodrive mode.
In manual mode, the ratios are controlled by two levers
(Fig. 1):
- the Power Control lever (1) located under the
steering wheel;
- the range lever (2) located on the armrest.
The gearbox is located between the Powershift

module and the rear axle. It comprises two shafts
(primary shaft on the upper shaftline and output shaft
on the lower shaftline), on which four constantly
engaged helical gear trains rotate.
Input drive is transmitted via the Power Shuttle to the
primary shaft. Output drive is transmitted via the output
shaft to a creeper gearbox or directly to the pinion of the
crownwheel and pinion.

Lubrication
The oil from the lubrication system coming from the L54 L55 L59 L58
tractor's 5 bar valve is sent to the lower shaftline and
the upper shaftline of the gearbox. A network of chan-
nels and ports in the gearbox channels the oil to the
parts requiring lubrication.
Selecting ratios
The range is selected by two double cone synchro-
nisers. Each synchroniser is engaged individually.
The synchronisers are controlled by two selector rails
and two forks. Each selector rail has a double acting
piston, which allows range shifting. This piston is
controlled hydraulically via the tractor's 21 bar L52 L53 L57 L56
MA-05-05142A
hydraulic system. Fig. 2
Four solenoid valves L52, L53, L54 and L55 (Fig. 2)

located on the right-hand side of the gearbox control
selector rail movement.
Four switches L56, L57, L58 and L59 (Fig. 2) inform
the controller of the selector rail positions.
NOTE: The switches are pressed in by pins (131)
(Fig. 3) controlled by the selector rails.
Each range has a solenoid valve and switch (see table
below).
131
MA-05-05146A
Fig. 3
Solenoid valves Switches

L52 L53 L54 L55 L56 L57 L58 L59
Neutral 0 or 12 V 12 V
Range 1 12 V 0V 0V 0V 0V 12 V 12 V 12 V
Range 2 0V 12 V 0V 0V 12 V 0V 12 V 12 V
Range 3 0V 0V 12 V 0V 12 V 12 V 0V 12 V
Range 4 0V 0V 0V 12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V 0V
Correspondence between ranges, solenoid valves and switches

Parts list (Fig. 4, Fig. 5, Fig. 6) (52) 1st driving gear

(53) Relay pinion or 3rd driven gear (depending on
(1) 3rd/4th double cone synchroniser
the range engaged)
(2) 1st/3rd double gear
(54) Spacer
(3) Snap ring
(55) 4th driven gear
(4) Circlip
(57) Circlip
(5) Bearing cup
(58) 1st/2nd double cone synchroniser
(6) Bearing cup
(59) Bearing cone
(7) Shim(s)
(60) Output shaft
(8) Snap ring
(61) Bearing cup
(9) Snap ring
(62) 4th driving gear
(10) Thrust washer
(63) Primary shaft
(64) Ring
(12) Thrust washer
(65) Bearing cone
(13) Spacer
(66) Bearing cup
(14) Bearing cone
(67) Liner
(15) Bearing cone
(68) "O" ring
(16) Thrust washer
(69) Piston
(17) Circlip
(70) "O" ring
(18) Robotic gearbox housing
(71) Circlip
(19) Bearing cup
(72) Liner
(20) Shim(s)
(73) "O" ring
(21) Bearing cone
(74) Piston
(22) Bearing cup
(75) "O" ring
(23) Shim(s)
(76) Snap ring
(24) Synchroniser spring
(77) "O" ring
(25) Synchroniser hub
(78) 1st/2nd gear fork
(26) Spring
(79) Pin
(27) "O" ring
(80) 1st/2nd selector rail
(28) Lubrication pipe
(81) Stop (range 1)
(29) Bearing cone
(82) Stop (range 3)
(30) Removable compartment
(83) Locking screw
(31) Bearing cup
(84) Locking screw
(85) Screw
(33) Bearing cone
(86) Screw
(34) Bearing cone
(89) Adjustable nut (range 2)
(35) Shim(s)
(36) Undercut spacer
(38) Synchroniser sliding coupler
(39) Ball bearing
(93) Interlock mechanism
(94) Counter-nut
(41) Ring
(95) Adjustable nut (not reversed)
(42) Flange
(96) Interlock mechanism
(43) Brake cone
(97) "O" ring
(44) Cone
(98) Cover plate
(46) Circlip
(99) "O" ring
(47) Thrust washer
(100) Circlip
(48) Bearing cup
(101) "O" ring
(49) 2nd gear
(102) Liner
(50) Screw
(103) "O" ring
(51) Dowel
(104) Circlip

(105) "O" ring

(106) Liner
(107) "O" ring
(108) "O" ring
(109) 3rd/4th gear fork
(110) Pin
(111) 3rd/4th selector rail/piston assembly
(112) "O" rings
(113) Spring
(114) Snap ring
(115) "O" ring
(116) "O" ring
(117) Cover plate
(118) Circlip
(119) Bearing cup
(120) Bearing cone
(121) Reverse layshaft gear
(122) Bearing cup
(123) Bearing cone
(124) Circlip
(125) Reverse layshaft
(126) Circlip
(127) Reverse driven gear
(128) Ball bearing
(129) Reverse driving gear
(130) Shim(s)
(131) End-of-travel pins
(132) Plug
(133) Plug
(134) Screw
Legend (Fig. 6)
1 Primary shaftline
2 Output shaftline
3 Reverse layshaft line


1
2 3 4 5 6 7
38 39 40 41 42
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
3ème/4ème
18
17,53 +/- 0,03 24

C
19 43
66
20
44
2 65 21
64 25
22 32 31 33 34 35 36 29 23
63
23
62
26
61
1 8 27
58
60 22
28
59 46
29
47
30
49 48
51
50
1ère/2ème
57 55 54 53 52 49
MA-05-05147A
Fig. 4


18 114 113 112 111 109 110 108 107 105 106 104 103 102 101 100
99
98
115
97
96
129
116
95
117
118
94
67 93
120 119 121 122 123 124 134 125 126 127 128 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 18
91 92
130
81
90
30
82
89
60 49 83
80
84
11
85
18
86
MA-05-05148A
Fig. 5


Blown-up view 2
4
31 65 13
33 66
5
34 62 14
48
35 64 1
36 1
47 63
8
46 9 19
6 21
29 10
22 11 15 7 20
23 12 16
3 17
109
110
108
24 106
44 104
39 111
43 101
132 3/4
40 107
133 57 42 102
32 43 98
58 44
42
52 41 105
49 25 103
24 38 99
39 79 97
40 41 100
1/2 117 114
90
67
69 76 92
113
18 78
118 74
115 72
59
61 42 116
2 73 112
44
55 71 89
43 91
54 77
41 70
25 81
38 75 112 131
53 68 80 83
41
60 125
43
119 44
26 126
121 42
27 120
122 85
28
130 3 127
123 128
124
131
30
84
129 93 96 82 86
MA-05-05318A
Fig. 6


C . Kinematics of the ranges and

N
description of the gearbox 1
The robotic gearbox allows four ranges to be obtained

with only four gear trains, two shafts and two double
cone synchronisers.
63
Kinematics (Fig. 7)
1 Range 1
Reduction is achieved via three gear trains. The first 1
gear train drives the second train via the 1st synchro-
niser, then the third train.
2 N
2 Range 2
Reduction is achieved via the first gear train. The 2nd
synchroniser attaches the relay gear to the output
shaft.
63
3 Range 3
Reduction is achieved via the third gear train. The 3rd
synchroniser attaches the 3rd gear to the primary
shaft. 2
4 Range 4
Reduction is achieved via the fourth gear train. The 4th 3
3
synchroniser attaches the 4th gear to the primary
shaft.
NOTE: In forward position, input drive comes directly

from the Power Shuttle to the primary shaft (63). 63
In reverse position, input drive is transmitted to the
2nd driven gear (49), which is constantly meshed with
the reverse layshaft gear (121). The latter is linked to
the gear (129) via the shaft (125) and the gear (127)
(Fig. 5).
N
4 4
63
N
MA-05-05154A
Fig. 7

Description of the gearbox Lubrication

A central channel and radial holes machined on the
Primary shaft (63) (Fig. 4, Fig. 5, Fig. 6)
output shaft ensure the lubrication under pressure of:
At the front, the primary shaft (63) is splined to the hub - the tapered roller bearings (31) (33), (34) (48) and (59)
of the Power Shuttle forward clutch. It is supported by (61);
two tapered roller bearings (19) (21) and (65) (66). The
- the needle roller bearing (32);
preload shimming of these bearings is carried out
using the shim(s) (20). - the bores of the 1st driving gear (52) and the 2nd
driven gear (49);
The primary shaft is hollow. This allows the PTO main-
shaft to pass through to the engine flywheel. - the 1st/2nd double cone synchroniser (58).
The machined teeth at the front of the primary shaft
act as a driving input gear. It is constantly meshed with Synchronisers
the 2nd driven gear (49), which is fitted to the output The double cone synchroniser (58) of the lower shaft-
shaft (60). line synchronises the driving and driven gears of
The 1st/3rd double gear (2) turns freely on the primary ranges 1 and 2. The synchroniser hub is splined to the
shaft. It is: 2nd driven gear (49). The axial clearance of this hub is
- supported by two tapered roller bearings (5) (14) and limited by a circlip (57) selected from three possible
(6) (15), and a needle roller bearing (11); thicknesses.
- positioned on the primary shaft at a position set The double cone synchroniser (1) of the primary shaft
according to the location of the 3rd/4th double cone synchronises the driving and driven gears of ranges 3
synchroniser (1); and 4. The synchroniser hub is integral in rotation with
- shimmed by clearance or preload using the shim(s) the primary shaft (63) and held in position by the snap
(7). ring (8).
The 4th driving gear (62) turns freely on a bearing Selecting ratios (Fig. 7)
comprised of a ring (64). This ring is inserted between
Each synchroniser sliding coupler is moved conven-
the 3rd/4th double cone synchroniser and the bearing
tionally by selector rails (80) (111) and forks (78) (109).
cone (65).
The selector rails are controlled hydraulically by double
Lubrication acting pistons. On the selector rail (80) that controls
The upper shaftline is lubricated by a film of oil under the 1st/2nd synchroniser, the two pistons (69) and (74)
pressure which runs between the PTO mainshaft and are assisted by the spring (113), which times the
the primary shaft. synchronisation of ranges 1 and 2.
The forks are adjusted by castellated nuts (91) (89) and
(92) (90) located at the front end of the selector rails.
Output shaft (60) (Fig. 4, Fig. 5, Fig. 6)
After adjustment, the castellated nuts are immobilised
The output shaft (60) turns on two tapered roller bear- by locking screws (83) (84).
ings (22) (29) and (59) (61). The preload shimming of
the bearings is carried out using the shim(s) (23).
Mechanical locking of ranges
The 2nd gear (49) turns freely on the output shaft (60).
It is: The range locking safety system is located on the
removable compartment (30) of the gearbox. It
- supported by two tapered roller bearings (31) (33)
comprises two adjustable round fingers. The machining
and (34) (48), and a needle roller bearing (32);
of the selector rails allows these fingers to be moved
- shimmed by clearance or preload using the shim(s) and housed. When a selector rail selects a range (1, 2,
(35). 3 or 4), this forces the fingers to move along to lock the
The 2nd gear (49) also supports the 1st driving gear passive selector rail in neutral position.
(52) and the 1st/2nd double cone synchroniser (58).
The 3rd (53) and 4th (55) driven gears are splined to the
output shaft. They are held in position by a spacer (54).

D . Removing the gearbox

1. Drain the transmission oil.
3. Remove:
- the parts around the gearbox that may hinder the C C
separation of housings C (Fig. 8);
- the PTO shaft.
4. Remove the gearbox by separating the two hous-
ings C (Fig. 8) with a hoist and a suitable sling.
MA-05-05163A
E . Removing and refitting the Fig. 8
primary shaft/output shaft unit
Removing the primary shaft/output shaft
unit
5. Locally manufacture four legs approximately
120 mm in length. Fit them to the gearbox as in
Fig. 9.
6. Sling the front of the gearbox using a hoist or a suit-
able lift system.
Place the gearbox vertically on the four legs
(Fig. 9).
M14
120 mm
MA-05-05166A
Fig. 9

7. Remove the stops of ranges 1 and 3 (81) (82).

Unscrew the adjustable nuts of ranges 1 and 2 (89)
(91) and ranges 3 and 4 (90) (92) (Fig. 10). 81 93 94 95 96 82
8. Decrease the length of the interlock mechanism
(93) (96) of the safety device to the minimum
(Fig. 10).
9. Remove the two plugs (132) and (133) (Fig. 11).
Drive out the two pins (79) and (110) holding the
forks on the selector rails (Fig. 11).
IMPORTANT: The pins will fall into the gearbox
housing. They must be recovered when the
gearbox is disassembled.
10. Remove the circlip (118) at the rear of the gearbox
(Fig. 12).
11. Using a plastic hammer, drive out the selector rail
(80) in the direction of the rear of the gearbox
(Fig. 12).
NOTE: The selector rail control piston assembly is
fitted to the selector rail and is removed with it.
The liner (72) remains in the housing. If it must be
removed, first take off the circlip (71).
12. Remove the screws (50) from the compartment
(30) (Fig. 13). 91
13. Screw two screws V or two makeshift handles in
diametric opposition into the two tapped holes in
92
the compartment (30).
14. Extract and remove the compartment (30) without
losing the "O" rings.
15. Recover:
89
- the bearing cups (19) (22) (122);
- the shim(s) (20) (23) (130).
16. Recover the lubrication pipe (28), the "O" ring (27) 90
and the spring (26) (Fig. 14). MA-05-05168A
Fig. 10
132
110 79 133
MA-05-05169A
Fig. 11

118
80
MA-05-05170A Fig. 12
V 30
50
MA-05-05171A
Fig. 13
28
27
MA-05-05172A
26
Fig. 14

17. Remove the circlip (100) (Fig. 15).

18. Using a plastic hammer, drive out the selector rail
(111) in the direction of the top of the gearbox 111
(Fig. 15).
NOTE: The selector rail control piston assembly is
fitted to the selector rail and is removed with it.
The liner (106) remains in the housing. If it must be
removed, first take off the circlip (104).
19. To allow it to enter the gearbox housing, turn the
3rd/4th gear fork (109) on its axis and in the direc-
tion of the primary shaft (63)/output shaft (60) unit.
20. Fit service tool ref. 3378804M1 (see § L) into the
primary shaft and output shaft as indicated Fig. 16. 100
Sling the tool using a pulley hoist or a suitable
lifting system.
21. Remove the primary shaft (63)/output shaft (60)
MA-05-05173A
unit (Fig. 18), simultaneously removing the reverse Fig. 15
layshaft gear (121) (Fig. 18) from the gearbox
housing.
NOTE: The total weight of the two shafts is approx-
imately 52 kg:
- the output shaft and its gears = 31 kg; 3378804M1
- the primary shaft and its gears = 21 kg.
22. Remove the assembly and place it on a work-
bench.
Remove the tool.
Separate the two shafts.
23. If necessary, extract the bearing cups (61) (66)
(119) from the gearbox housing.
63
60
MA-05-05175A Fig. 16

Disassembling and reassembling the

assistance mechanism of the 1st/2nd
selector rail (80)
24. Remove the "O" rings (68) (75).
25. Tighten the pistons (69) (74) in a vice with protec-
tive jaws to compress the spring (113). 114 69 68 112 112 75
26. Remove:
- the snap ring (114); 74
- the pistons and spring.
27. Discard the "O" rings (68) (75) (112).
80
Reassembly (Fig. 17)
28. Clean and check all components. Replace those 113
that are defective. Fig. 17
MA-05-05174A
29. Lubricate the new "O" rings (112). Fit them into the
grooves of the selector rail (80).
30. Reassemble the selector rail (80) by carrying out
the disassembly steps in reverse order.
31. Lubricate the new "O" rings (68) (75). Fit them into
the grooves of the pistons (69) (74).
60
Refitting the primary shaft/output shaft

unit 121
that are defective.
33. Check that the lubrication holes and low-pressure 63
ports are not blocked.
34. Lubricate the new "O" rings (70) (73) (77) of the 109
MA-05-05176A
1st/2nd selector rail and (103) (105) (108) of the
3rd/4th selector rail. Fit them respectively in the
grooves of the gearbox housing. Fig. 18
35. Check that the bearing cones (61) (66) (119) are
present in the gearbox housing (18).
36. Fit together the gear train of the primary shaft (63)
with that of the output shaft (60).
Position tool ref. 3378804M1 (see § L) in the two
shafts (Fig. 19).
37. Fit the 1st/2nd gear forks (78) and 3rd/4th gear 63 60
forks (109) on the synchroniser sliding couplers,
positioning their offset side D upwards (Fig. 19).
Turn the forks to face each other (Fig. 19).
NOTE: The forks are identical.
D
109 78
MA-05-05177A
Fig. 19

38. Simultaneously:
- insert the primary shaft/output shaft unit into the
98 97 99
gearbox housing and
- fit the reverse layshaft gear (121), fitted with its
bearing cones (120) (123). 111
40. Refit the lubrication pipe (28) fitted with a new "O"
ring (27) and the spring (26) (Fig. 14).
41. If the liner (106) and circlip (104) have been
removed, grease the liner and insert it into the
groove in the gearbox housing. Fit the circlip (104).
100
42. Lightly lubricate the selector rail/piston assembly
(111) of ranges 3 and 4 (Fig. 20).
Slide this assembly into the fork (109). In order to
assist its insertion into the fork, shake the fork up
109
and down, using a pin punch (Ø 8 mm) inserted
MA-05-05178A
into the port in the fork via the plug (132) port. Fig. 20
43. Fit (Fig. 20):
- the hydraulic cover plate (98) fitted with two
new, pre-lubricated "O" rings (97) (99);
- the circlip (100). 80 118 117
44. If the liner (72) and circlip (71) have been removed,
grease the liner and insert it into the groove in the
gearbox housing. Fit the circlip (71).
45. Lightly lubricate the selector rail (80) of ranges 1
and 2.
Slide it into the fork (78). In order to assist its inser-
tion into the fork, shake the fork up and down,
using a pin punch (Ø 8 mm) inserted into the port
in the fork via the plug (133) port.
46. Fit (Fig. 21):
- the hydraulic cover plate (117) fitted with two
new, pre-lubricated "O" rings (115) (116);
- the circlip (118). 117 115 116 80
47. Align the holes in the forks (78) and (109) with MA-05-05179A
Fig. 21
those in the corresponding selector rails.

48. Fit new pins to attach the forks to the selector rails.
Refit the plugs (132) and (133) (Fig. 22).
49. Check that the safety device is present. Increase
the length of the interlock mechanism (93) (96) to
the maximum, by adjusting the adjustable nut (95)
and counter-nut (94) (Fig. 23).
50. Fit the four switch pins (131) into their housing
(Fig. 23) with a bit of miscible grease to hold them 132
in position.
51. In the compartment (30), fit the bearing cups (19)
(22) (122), smeared with miscible grease to hold
them in position.
Also fit:
- the original shim thickness if the tapered roller
79 133
bearings have not been replaced;
110
- the calculated shim thickness if the tapered roller
bearings have been replaced (see § G); MA-05-05180A Fig. 22
- the "O" rings of the 21 bar channel.
52. Refit the compartment (30).
53. Screw in the screws (50) (Fig. 13) of the compart-
ment (30), lightly smeared with Loctite 242 or
equivalent. Tighten to 57-77 Nm.
54. Adjust:
- the selector rails and forks (see § H);
131
- the safety device (see § I).
93 94 95 96
MA-05-05181A
Fig. 23


the primary shaft and output shaft
65
55. Remove the primary shaft (63)/output shaft (60)
unit (see § E).
IMPORTANT: If the tapered roller bearings of the
primary shaft and output shaft can be reused, pair
up the cone and cup of each bearing prior to
removal.
Disassembling the primary shaft

21 S
NOTE: The bearing cones (21) (65) are fitted tightly onto
the primary shaft (Fig. 24).
MA-05-05182A
56. Hold the primary shaft in a vertical position on a Fig. 24

workbench using a suitable support S (Fig. 24).
57. Fit a suitable shouldered end fitting to the upper
end of the primary shaft (Fig. 25).
58. Use a puller to remove the gear (62). Remove the
bearing cone (65).
59. Recover the ring (64).
60. Remove:
- the complete 3rd/4th double cone synchroniser 65
(1);
- the snap ring (8). 1 62
- the circlip (17);
- the 1st/3rd double gear (2).
NOTE 1: The needle roller bearing (11) remains in
the 1st/3rd double gear (2). 21
NOTE 2: The bearing cones (14) (15) remain on the S
primary shaft (63). MA-05-05183A
62. Recover (Fig. 26): Fig. 25

- the washer (16);
- the shim(s) (7).
63. Remove the bearing cup (5) from the double gear 11
(2) (Fig. 26).
Check whether or not there is a shim behind the
cup.
5
2
14
15
7
16
63
17
MA-05-05184A Fig. 26


- the snap ring (9). 3
- the needle roller bearing (11) with the thrust
washers (10) (12); 2
- the snap ring (3) (if required).
65. Remove:
- the circlip (4); 11 12
- the spacer (13);
- the bearing cones (14) (15).
66. If necessary, extract the bearing cone (21).
Reassembling the primary shaft

67. Prepare the cones (14) (15) paired up with their
9 10
bearing cup (5) (6).
68. Fit onto the primary shaft (63) (Fig. 28): MA-05-05185A Fig. 27
- the bearing cones (14) (15);
- the spacer (13);
- the circlip (4).
13 14 15 63
NOTE: "X" assembly. The bearing cones are fitted
back to back.
69. Fit the cup (5) into the double gear (2) (Fig. 28).
70. Check that the snap ring (3) is present in the double
gear (Fig. 27).
71. Fit into the double gear (2) (Fig. 27):
- the needle roller bearing (11);
- the snap ring (9).
72. Slide the prepared double gear (2) onto the primary
shaft (63).
4 2 5
MA-05-05186A
Fig. 28

Shimming the tapered roller bearings of the

1st/3rd double gear (2) (Fig. 29) 14 5 15 6
The tapered roller bearings of the double gear can be
shimmed either before or after adjusting the position 17
of this gear (steps 83 to 90 or 91 to 94, depending on
the chosen solution).
73. Fit: 16
- the thrust washer (16); 63
C 7
- the circlip (17), temporarily excluding the shim(s)
(7) in order to measure the clearance for shim-
ming the double gear (2). 2
74. Tighten the double gear (2) as required in a vice
fitted with protected jaws.
75. Place a dial gauge feeler pin at the end of the
primary shaft (63).
76. Pull firmly on the shaft while turning it alternately Fig. 29
to the right and left in order to correctly position the MA-05-05187A
cone (15) in the bearing cup (6).

77. Set the dial gauge needle to zero.
78. Repeat step 76, pushing firmly to correctly position
the bearing cone (14) in the bearing cup (5).
79. If the clearance reading on the dial gauge exceeds
0.05 mm, select a definitive shim thickness (7) to
obtain shimming C (Fig. 29). This shimming must
be between a clearance of 0.05 and a preload of
0.05.
NOTE: As far as possible, shim to the preload
without exceeding the value indicated.
80. Remove the circlip (17) and the thrust washer (16).
81. Fit the previously selected shim(s) (7) between the
bearing cup (6) and the thrust washer (16).
IMPORTANT: It is imperative that the shim(s) are
positioned as indicated.
Position the thickest shim against the bearing cup.

Adjusting the position of the 1st/3rd double

gear (2)
The position of the double gear (2) must be checked or
adjusted in relation to the position of the 3rd/4th
double cone synchroniser. This adjustment is essential
for the correct operation of range 3 synchronisation. It
can be achieved:
- either by first adjusting the position of the 1st/3rd
double gear (2), then shimming its tapered roller
bearings (solution 1, see steps 83 to 90);
- or by first shimming the tapered roller bearings of the
1st/3rd double gear (2), then adjusting the position of
this gear (solution 2, see steps 91 to 94).

Solution 1
83. Place the primary shaft (63) fitted with its elements
(4) (13) (14) (15) in a vertical position on a work-
bench (Fig. 30).
84. Onto the primary shaft, slide the 1st/3rd double
gear (2) fitted with its elements (3) (5) (9) (10) (11)
(12).
85. Temporarily exclude:
- the bearing cup (6);
- the shim(s) (7);
- the circlip (17).
86. Fit the snap ring (8) (Fig. 30).
NOTE: The snap ring (8) acts as a stop for the
3rd/4th double cone synchroniser (1).
87. Rotate the 1st/3rd double gear (2) several turns to
correctly position the cone (14) in the bearing cup
(5) (Fig. 30).
88. Slide tool ref. xxx (see § L) onto the primary shaft
(63), against the snap ring (8) (Fig. 30).
NOTE 1: The spherical section of the snap ring (8)
prevents a depth gauge from being used to
measure distance A.
NOTE 2: The service tool acts as a gauge. The
simplified sketch (Fig. 30) clearly displays distance
A, which must be between 17.50 and 17.56 mm.
89. Apply manual pressure to the tool.
Using a set of thickness shims, gauge space E at
three equidistant points (Fig. 30) in order to vali-
date the correct position of the 1st/3rd double gear
(2).
Calculate the average of the three readings (this
average will be referred to as E):
- if E < 0.05 mm, the position of the 1st/3rd
double gear (2) is correct;
- if E > 0.05 mm, fit a 0.4 mm shim between the
shoulder of the 1st/3rd double gear (2) and the
bearing cup (5) (Fig. 31).
IMPORTANT: The position of the 1st/3rd double
gear (2) must be corrected with a single shim
0.4 mm in thickness. Do not fit a shim with
different dimensions.
90. After setting the position of the 1st/3rd double
gear (2) (Fig. 31), shim its tapered roller bearings
(see steps 73 to 82).

63 xxxxxM1
A 9
10 A = 17,53 +/- 0,03
11
4 63
12
5
3
14
15
E
8
2 13
2
8
MA-05-05188A
Fig. 30
5 0,4 mm
2
MA-05-05189A
Fig. 31

Solution 2
91. As the tapered roller bearings of the 1st/3rd double

gear (2) are shimmed (see steps 73 to 82), fit the
snap ring (8) (Fig. 32).
NOTE: The snap ring (8) acts as a stop for the
3rd/4th double cone synchroniser (1).
92. Slide tool ref. xxx (see § L) onto the primary shaft
(63), against the snap ring (8) (Fig. 32).
NOTE 1: The spherical section of the snap ring (8)
prevents a depth gauge from being used to
measure distance A.
NOTE 2: The service tool acts as a gauge. The
simplified sketch (Fig. 32) clearly displays distance
A, which must be between 17.50 and 17.56 mm.
93. Apply manual pressure to the tool.
Using a set of thickness shims, gauge space E at
three equidistant points (Fig. 32) in order to vali-
date the correct position of the 1st/3rd double gear
(2).
Calculate the average of the three readings (this
average will be referred to as E):
- if E < 0.05 mm, the position of the 1st/3rd
double gear (2) is correct;
- if E > 0.05 mm, fit a 0.4 mm shim (7) between
the shoulder of the 1st/3rd double gear (2) and
the bearing cup (5) (Fig. 33).
IMPORTANT: The position of the 1st/3rd double
gear (2) must be corrected with a single shim
0.4 mm in thickness. Do not fit a shim with
different dimensions.
94. If it was necessary to correct the position of the
1st/3rd double gear, check that the shimming of
the tapered roller bearings of the 1st/3rd double
gear (2) is still correct.

63
xxxxM1
2 A = 17,53 +/- 0,03
63
5
7
E
8
8
MA-05-05190A Fig. 32
0,4mm
MA-05-05191A
5 2
Fig. 33

95. Once the position of the 1st/3rd double gear (2) is

set, either via solution 1 or solution 2, fit the
3rd/4th double cone synchroniser (1), positioning
its recess E towards the snap ring (8) (Fig. 34,
Fig. 35). 62
96. Slide the 4th driving gear (62) fitted with the ring
(64) onto the primary shaft (Fig. 35).
97. Using a press and a suitable fixture, fit (Fig. 35): 1 8
- the bearing cone (65) at a maximum of 2500 daN
IMPORTANT: When the bearing cone reaches its
travel limit stop, the fitting load is applied to the
snap ring (8) (Fig. 34). For this purpose, the
maximum fitting load to apply to the bearing
cone (65) must not be exceeded; E
2
- the bearing cone (21) (if necessary).
98. Manually check that the double cone synchroniser
MA-05-05192A
(1) engages correctly in range 3 and range 4. Fig. 34
62 65
21 64
MA-05-05193A Fig. 35

Disassembling the output shaft

IMPORTANT: Take care not to pull the gear (49) or the 32
1st/2nd double cone synchroniser (58) will come apart.
NOTE: The bearing cone (29) is freely mounted on the
output shaft (60).
60 55 53 58 49
99. Remove the bearing cone (29) and the undercut
spacer (36) (Fig. 36).
100.Place the shaft in a vertical position on the gear
(49), braced against a suitable fixture. Pull the shaft
(60) upwards using the gears (53) (55), taking care 36
not to disassemble the 1st/2nd double cone
synchroniser (58) (Fig. 36).
101.Recover the needle roller bearing (32) (Fig. 36).
102.Remove (Fig. 37): 29
MA-05-05194A
Fig. 36
- the 1st/2nd double cone synchroniser (58);
- the gear (52).
103.Turn over the gear (49).
Remove (Fig. 38):
- the circlip (46); 58
- the shims (35).
104.Remove and pair up the bearing cones (33) (34)
and cups (31) (48) (Fig. 38).
57 52
MA-05-05195A
Fig. 37
33 34 48 46
31
49 35 47
MA-05-05196A
Fig. 38

105.Use a puller to remove the gear (55) (Fig. 39).

- the bearing cone (59);
- the spacer (54);
- the gear (53). 60
59
Reassembling the output shaft 55
107.On the shaft (60), refit (Fig. 39):
- the gear (53);
- the spacer (54);
54
- the gear (55). 53
108.Fit the bearing cone (59) using a press and a suit-
able fixture.
109.In the gear (49), fit the bearing cones (33) (34) and MA-05-05197A
Fig. 39
cups (31) (48) (Fig. 40).
Shimming the tapered roller bearings of the

gear (49) (Fig. 40)
110.Fit the thrust washer (47) and the circlip (46), 31 33 34 48
temporarily excluding the shim(s) (35).
111.As the gear (49) is prepared, test fit it onto the
output shaft (60).
112.Place the shaft/gear assembly on a hydraulic table
press.
113.Slide the spacer (36) onto the end of the shaft (60),
positioning its undercut part towards the bearing
cone (34).
114.Refit the bearing cone (29).
REMINDER: The bearing cone is free on the pin.
115.Using a press and a suitable sleeve M, exert a
gentle force E on the internal ring of the bearing
cone (29) (Fig. 40). 46 47 35 49
NOTE: This force will allow the undercut spacer E
(36) and bearing cones (34) (33) to be held against
the shoulder of the output shaft (60). M
116.Place a dial gauge feeler pin on the upper surface
of the gear (49) (Fig. 40).
117.Apply firm manual pressure at two opposite points
of the gear while turning it alternately to the right
and left in order to correctly position the cone (34)
in the bearing cup (48).
49 36 29
60
MA-05-05198A
Fig. 40


119.Repeat step 117, applying a firm manual pulling
force to the gear in order to correctly position the C
35
cone (33) in the bearing cup (31).
120.If the clearance reading on the dial gauge exceeds
0.05 mm, select a definitive shim thickness (35) to
obtain shimming C (Fig. 41). This shimming must
be between a clearance of 0.05 and a preload of 46
0.05.
NOTE: As far as possible, shim to the preload 47
without exceeding the value indicated.
121.Remove the circlip (46) and the thrust washer (47). 48
122.Fit the previously selected shim(s) (35) between
the bearing cup (48) and thrust washer (47). 49
IMPORTANT: It is imperative that the shim(s) are
positioned as indicated. MA-05-05199A
Position the thickest shim against the bearing cup. Fig. 41

123.Fit the circlip (46).
124.Position the gear (49) flat on a suitable support S
(Fig. 42).
125.Refit (Fig. 42):
- the lubricated gear (52);
57 32
- the 1st/2nd synchroniser (58)
IMPORTANT: A lubricating groove on the surface
of the synchroniser hub (1st gear (52) side) must
be lined up with the radial holes on the 2nd gear
(49);
- the lubricated needle roller bearing (32). 58
126.Slide the output shaft (60) vertically into the gear
(49), ensuring that it slides correctly into the needle S 49
roller bearing (32) (Fig. 43).
Mesh the splines of the gear with those of the 52
synchroniser flange. MA-05-05200A
127.Without disassembling the 1st/2nd synchroniser, Fig. 42
remove the complete output shaft from support S.
32
49 S 60
MA-05-05201A
Fig. 43

128.On the shaft (60), refit (Fig. 44):

- the spacer (36), positioning its undercut part
towards the bearing cone (34);
36 34 60
- the bearing cone (29).
129.While holding the gear in place (49), manually
check that the 1st/2nd double cone synchroniser
(58) engages correctly in range 1 and range 2.
29
MA-05-05202A
Fig. 44

G . Shimming the primary shaft,

reverse layshaft gear and output 66
shaft
The primary shaft and reverse layshaft gear will be test 18
fitted, temporarily excluding the output shaft (60) and
its gears. This will allow shimming to be carried out
efficiently and will, as far as possible, prevent the 119
unnecessary hindrance caused by gears engaging.
130.Check that the bearing cups (66) (119) are present

in the gearbox housing (18) (Fig. 45).
131.In the gearbox housing, simultaneously fit the
primary shaft (63) assembled in previous steps and
the reverse layshaft gear (121).
IMPORTANT: The reverse layshaft gear (121) must MA-05-05203A
Fig. 45
be fitted with a makeshift fixture (see composition
below) (Fig. 46). This fixture, fitted in the bore of
the gear, allows the gear to engage properly in
order to correctly position the tapered roller
bearing cones in their cups.
Elements Qty Specifications

Washers 2 Internal Ø = 17 mm
External Ø = 42 mm
Thickness = 6 mm
M16 threaded 1 Length = approx.
rod 400 mm
M16 nuts 3
Handle obtained 1
by operator 121
Composition of the makeshift fixture (Fig. 46)
MA-05-05204A
132.Lightly smear the rims of the bearing cups (19) Fig. 46

(122) with miscible grease to prevent them from
falling off when refitting the compartment (30). Fit
them in the compartment, temporarily excluding
the shim(s) (20) (130), to measure the clearance.
133.Refit the compartment (30). Fit and tighten the 50
screws (50) to 57-77 Nm (Fig. 47).
50
30
50
MA-05-05205A
Fig. 47

Shimming the primary shaft

134.Using a plastic hammer, strike the front end of the
primary shaft (63) while turning it alternately to the
63
right and left in order to position the cone (65) in
the bearing cup (66).
135.Place a dial gauge feeler pin on the bearing cone
(21) at the front end of the primary shaft (63)
(Fig. 48).
Set the dial gauge needle to zero.
136.Using a lever of suitable length (approx. 600 mm),
exert a vertical force on the rear end of the primary
shaft (63), as indicated by the arrow (Fig. 49).
137.Depending on the clearance reading on the dial
gauge, select a definitive shim thickness (20) in 21
order to obtain a preload P1, ensuring that (Fig. 50):
P1 = 0.05 to 0.15 mm.
MA-05-05206A
NOTE: As far as possible, shim to the maximum Fig. 48
preload.
Example
For a clearance of 0.73, the shim (20) thickness to
select must:
- be between (0.73 + 0.05) and (0.73 + 0.15) and
- be as close as possible to (0.73 + 0.15).
138.Make a note of the shim (20) thickness. These
shims will be fitted between the bearing cup (19)
and the compartment (30) (Fig. 50) when the
compartment is definitively refitted.
63
MA-05-05207A
Fig. 49
30
P1 = 0,05/0,15
20
19
MA-05-05208A
Fig. 50

Shimming the reverse layshaft gear

139.Place a dial gauge feeler pin on the front end of the
reverse layshaft gear (Fig. 51).
140.In order to correctly position the cone (120) in the
bearing cup (119), push firmly on the makeshift
tool fitted to the reverse layshaft gear in step 131,
while turning it alternately to the right and left.
142.Repeat step 140, pulling firmly to correctly position
the cone (123) in the bearing cup (122).
gauge, select a definitive shim thickness (130) in
order to obtain a preload P2, ensuring that (Fig. 52):
P2 = 0.05 to 0.15 mm.
NOTE: As far as possible, shim to the maximum
preload.
MA-05-05209A
144.Make a note of the shim (130) thickness. These Fig. 51
145.Remove the screws (50) and the compartment 30 121
(30).
146.Remove the primary shaft and reverse layshaft
gear from the gearbox housing.
P2 = 0,05/0,15
130
122
MA-05-05210A Fig. 52

Shimming the output shaft

The output shaft will be test fitted, temporarily
excluding the primary shaft (63), its gears and the
reverse layshaft gear (121). This will allow shimming to
be carried out efficiently and will, as far as possible,
prevent the unnecessary hindrance caused by gears
engaging. 18
147.Check that the bearing cup (61) is present in the

gearbox housing (18) (Fig. 53).
148.Fit the output shaft, assembled in previous steps,
into the gearbox housing.
149.Lightly smear the rim of the bearing cup (22) with 61
miscible grease to prevent it from falling off when
refitting the compartment (30). Fit it in the
compartment, temporarily excluding the shim(s)
(23), to measure the clearance. MA-05-05211A
Fig. 53
150.Refit the compartment (30). Fit and tighten the

screws (50) (Fig. 54) to 57-77 Nm.
151.Using a plastic hammer, strike the front end of the
output shaft (60) while turning it alternately to the 50
50
right and left in order to position the cone (59) in
the bearing cup (61).
152.Place a dial gauge feeler pin on the front end of the
output shaft (60) (Fig. 55).
153.Using a lever of suitable length (approx. 600 mm),
exert a vertical force on the rear end of the output
shaft (60), as indicated by the arrow (Fig. 56).
gauge, select a definitive shim thickness (23) in 50 30
order to achieve a preload P3, ensuring that
(Fig. 57): P3 = 0.05 to 0.15 mm.
NOTE: As far as possible, shim to the maximum
preload. MA-05-05212A
155.Make a note of the shim (23) thickness. These Fig. 54

156.Remove the screws (50) and the compartment
(30).
157.Remove the output shaft from the gearbox
housing.
60
MA-05-05213A
Fig. 55

158.Refit the primary shaft (63)/output shaft (60) unit in

the gearbox housing (see § E).
159.To ensure each bearing cup sticks to the compart-
ment (30) during refitting, lightly smear their rims
160.Refit the compartment (30) fitted with the shim
(20) (130) (23) thickness noted in steps 138, 144
and 155, ensuring that the dowels (51) are present
(see § E).
161.Fit and tighten the screws (50) to 57-77 Nm.
60
MA-05-05214A
Fig. 56
P3 = 0,05/0,15
23
30
22
MA-05-05215A
Fig. 57

H . Adjusting the selector rails L58 L59 L56 L57

controlling the forks
IMPORTANT: Before adjusting the selector rails that
control the forks, the following must be correctly
shimmed:
- the 1st/3rd double gear (2);
- the 2nd gear (49);
- the primary shaft (63);
- the output shaft (60).

L52 Range 1 solenoid valve
L54 Range 3 solenoid valve L55 L54 L53 L52
MA-05-05216A Fig. 58
L56 Range 1 switch
L57 Range 2 switch
L58 Range 3 switch
L59 Range 4 switch
Preliminary steps
2 3
162.Fit solenoid valves L52, L53, L54 and L55 along
with their flanges. Tighten the screws.
163.To select ranges 1, 2, 3 and 4 in the removed
gearbox, make a compressed air duct comprising
(Fig. 59):
- the original hydraulic pipe (1);
- elbow union (2) ref. 3385713M91 fitted with nut
(3) ref. 353436X1;
- the support (4) (40 flat bar) with two holes:
4 1 5
- Ø 15 mm to attach the support to the gearbox,
- Ø 20 mm to fit the union (2);
- the M14 mounting bolt (5) and its washer.
MA-05-05217A Fig. 59

164.Install the original pipe in the 21 bar channel of the

gearbox compartment (30).
Supply the solenoid valve control circuit with air 4 bar
compressed to a maximum of 4 bar (Fig. 60,
Fig. 61).
165.Temporarily remove limit switches C (Fig. 61).
166.Connect the harnesses of ranges 1, 2, 3 and 4 (as
indicated on harnesses) via tool ref. 3378805M1
(see § L) to solenoid valves L52, L53, L54 and L55
(Fig. 58, Fig. 61).
30
MA-05-05218A
Fig. 60
L55 L54 L52 L53
3378805M1
MA-05-05219A Fig. 61

Checking the movement of the selector

rails before adjustment F
The movement of selector rails is checked before
adjustment largely to ensure that there are no X1
assembly faults in the gears or range control of the
gearbox.
167.Activate switches 1, 2, 3 and 4 in turn from tool

ref. 3378805M1 (see § L) to supply the solenoid
valves and check the movement of the selector
rails.
NOTE: Use switch R (four solenoid valves supplied) 1/3 F
so the selector rails return automatically to neutral
after each activation of switches 1, 2, 3 and 4.
168.Using a suitable depth gauge, measure (Fig. 62): Y
- X1: The distance between face F of the gearbox
housing and the end of the selector rail of the
engaged range, 1 or 3;
- Y: The distance between face F of the gearbox
housing and the end of the selector rail in neutral
position; N
- Z1: The distance between face F of the gearbox
housing and the end of the selector rail of the F
engaged range, 2 or 4.
The adjustment is correct if the values match
those in the following table: Z1

X1 60.385 ± 1 61.61 ± 0.86
Y 71.815 ± 1.245 73.24 ± 1.105
Z1 83.225 ± 0.9 84.15 ± 0.8 2/4
MA-05-05220A
Fig. 62
169.If the measured distances do not match those in

the table, turn the gearbox gears via the shaft (125)
and the reverse driven gear (127) (Fig. 63). This
should fully engage the synchroniser teeth with
those of the relevant gear.
Repeat the measurements (step 168).
If they are still incorrect, identify the faulty part(s).
127
125
MA-05-05221A
Fig. 63

Adjusting selector rail travel

Selector rail (80) of ranges 1 and 2
170.Place the selector rail (80) in neutral, supplying the 89
four solenoid valves using tool ref. 3378805M1
(see step 167).
171.Screw in the castellated nut (89) without tightening
(Fig. 64).
172.Supply L53 using tool ref. 3378805M1 (see
step 167) to engage range 2 (Fig. 61, Fig. 62,
Fig. 64).
IMPORTANT: If the teeth of the 1st/2nd synchro-
niser do not fully engage with those of the relevant
gear, slowly turn the gearbox gears using the shaft
(125) and the reverse driven gear (127) (Fig. 63). L53 30
173.Tighten the nut (89) against the compartment (30) MA-05-05222A
(Fig. 64).
Fig. 64
174.Reposition the selector rail to neutral.
Tighten the nut (89) by two more slots (Fig. 64).
175.Mark with paint the position of the nut (89) in rela-
tion to the compartment (30) (Fig. 64).
176.Tighten the castellated nut (91) against the nut (89)
without turning the latter and without removing
the paint mark (Fig. 65).
177.Fit the stop (81). 85 81
Screw in the screws (85) (Fig. 65). Their threads
should be previously smeared with Loctite 242 or
equivalent. Tighten to a torque of 29-37 Nm. 91
178.Supply L52 to engage range 1 (Fig. 61, Fig. 62,
Fig. 66). 89
179.Unscrew the nut (91). Position it against the stop
(81) (Fig. 66). MA-05-05223A
180.Reposition the selector rail to neutral.

Unscrew the nut (91) by two more slots (Fig. 66).
181.Mark with paint the position of the nut (91) (Fig. 66)
in relation to the mark already made on the Fig. 65
compartment (30) in step 175.
91 81
L52
30 30
MA-05-05224A
Fig. 66

182.Provisionally screw in the locking screw (83) of the

nuts (89) (91), ensuring that the marks remain
aligned (Fig. 67).
81
IMPORTANT: The locking screw (83) should be fitted
in the slot following the two slots used to adjust
each nut (89) (91). 83
183.Check the operation of ranges 1 and 2, ensuring
that:
- the castellated nut (89) of range 2 is fitted against 91
the compartment (30) (Fig. 67);
- the nut (91) of range 1 is fitted against the stop 89
(81) (Fig. 67).
184.Unscrew the locking screw (83). Lightly smear its
thread with Loctite 242 or equivalent. Tighten it
30
definitively to 12-16 Nm.
MA-05-05225A
Range 3 and 4 selector rail/piston (111) Fig. 67

The adjustment method of the selector rail (80) also
applies to the adjustment of the selector rail/piston
(111).
185.To adjust the selector rail/piston (111) using the

nuts (90) (92), repeat steps 170 to 184, supplying
solenoid valves L54 and L55 and ensuring that the
following tightening torques are applied:
- screw (86) with Loctite 242 or equivalent:
29-37 Nm;
- locking screw (84) with Loctite 242 or equiva-
lent:
12-16 Nm.

Checking the movement of the selector F

rails after adjustment
The movement of selector rails is checked after adjust-
X2
ment to definitively ensure the total travel and neutral
position of the 1st/2nd and 3rd/4th synchronisers.
186.Connect and use tool ref. 3378805M1 (step 167).

187.Using a suitable depth gauge, measure (Fig. 68):
- X2: The distance between face F of the gearbox
engaged range, 1 or 3;
- Z2: The distance between face F of the gearbox 1/3
engaged range, 2 or 4.
Calculate the total travel of the selector rails,
Z2-X2.
The adjustment is correct if the values match F
those in the following table:

X2 60.855 ± 1.095 62.08 ± 0.955 Z2
Z2 82.755 ± 0.995 83.68 ± 0.895
Z2-X2 21.9 ± 1.4 21.625 ± 1.405
188.If the measured distances do not match those in

the table, turn the gearbox gears via the shaft (125)
and the reverse driven gear (127) (Fig. 63). This
should fully engage the synchroniser teeth with
those of the relevant gear.
Repeat the measurements (step 187).
If they are still incorrect, identify the faulty part(s).
2/4
MA-05-05226A
Fig. 68

Checking the limit switches

189.After adjusting the travel of the selector rails,
check that the pins (131) are present.
Fit limit switches L56, L57, L58 and L59 along with
their seals. Tighten the switches to a maximum of
5 Nm (Fig. 69).
131 L-- 5 Nm
190.Connect the harnesses of ranges 1, 2, 3 and 4 (as
indicated on harnesses) via tool ref. 3378805M1
(see § L) to (Fig. 58, Fig. 70):
- solenoid valves L52, L53, L54 and L55;
- limit switches L56, L57, L58 and L59.
Using the tool, engage a range by via the corre-
sponding switch. The LED of the engaged range
should light up. If the LED does not light up, check
the electrical condition of the switch and the move-
ment of the pin (131) (Fig. 69). MA-05-05227A
Fig. 69
L59 L58 L56 L57
L54 L55 L52 L53
3378805M1
MA-05-05228A
Fig. 70

I . Adjusting the safety device 94 95 96

Adjustment (Fig. 70, Fig. 71)
The safety device, or lock, secures the gearbox by
locking one selector rail when the other is engaging a
range and vice versa.
IMPORTANT: The safety device should be adjusted after
the selector rails (80) (111) have been set.
191.Screw home the interlock mechanism (96) on the

reverse pitch nut (95) (Fig. 71).
192.Using tool ref. 3378805M1 (see § L), engage a
range. Leave the other selector rail in neutral.
193.Unscrew the interlock mechanism (93) (Fig. 71)
until the lock has an axial clearance (Fig. 72), 80 93 111
ensuring that: J = 0.1 to 0.3 mm. MA-05-05229A Fig. 71
194.Tighten the counter-nut (94) (Fig. 72).

Checking the adjustment (Fig. 72)

195.Using tool ref. 3378805M1 (see § L) and turning
the gearbox gears via the shaft (125) and reverse
driven gear (127) (Fig. 63), engage a range.
196.Try to engage a range on the other selector rail. It
should not engage.
197.Return the two selector rails to neutral.
198.Repeat step 195 with a different range than was
initially engaged.
199.Repeat step 196, also selecting another range.
93 94
J = 0,1/0,3
MA-05-05230A
Fig. 72

J . Fitting the speed sensor on the

gearbox
200.Lightly smear the thread of sensor C (Fig. 74) with
201.Screw sensor C onto the gearbox (Fig. 74). Posi-
tion its end against the 2nd gear (49) (Fig. 73)
without forcing it. Loosen the sensor by 3/4 of a
turn, which should leave approximately 1 mm
between the end of the sensor and the gear teeth.
202.Tighten the counter-nut of the sensor to a torque
of 5 – 7 Nm (Fig. 74).
C 49
MA-05-05231A
Fig. 73
577
5 - 7 Nm
MA-05-05232A C
Fig. 74

K . Final steps
134
203.Clean the mating faces of the gearbox and the
housing/Powershift module assembly.
204.Smear the mating face of the gearbox with 5206
Loctite 5206 or equivalent (Fig. 75).

205.Check that the positioning pins are present on the
housing/Powershift module assembly.
206.Screw two diametrically opposed guide studs onto C
the housing/Powershift module assembly. C
207.Using the sling used in step 4, fit the gearbox to
the housing/Powershift module assembly.
208.Screw in the screws (134) (Fig. 75) while removing
the guide stud at the same time. Tighten to
150-200 Nm.
MA-05-05233A 134
209.Refit the parts around the gearbox that were
Fig. 75
removed to prevent them hindering the separation
of housings C (Fig. 75).
210.Top up the oil level in the housings and check it
using the sight glass located to the left of the rear
PTO housing.
211.Calibrate the gearbox (see chapter 11).
Carry out a road test on the transmission.

L . Service tools
• 3378804M1: Primary shaft/output shaft unit slinging
tool (Fig. 77)
• xxxM1: 1st/3rd double gear positioning tool (2) (Fig. 76)
• 3378805M1: Electric control tool for solenoid valves

and limit switches (Fig. 78)
1 to 4 Range switches
(5) Limit switch connector GBA15
(6) Solenoid valve connector
R Neutral setting switch for selector rails (four
supplied solenoid valves) MA-05-05234A Fig. 77
r References 1, 2, 3 and 4 printed on the
connector and solenoid valve harnesses
5 1 6
r
12V
3378805M1
R 1 2 3 4
MA-05-05235A
Fig. 76 Fig. 78


GBA15 - Creeper
5D14 - GBA15 - Creeper
CONTENTS
A . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B . Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
C . Removing and refitting the creeper gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
D . Disassembling, reassembling and adjusting the gear selection mechanism . . . . 11
E . Disassembling and reassembling the final drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
F . Adjusting the control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

GBA15 - Creeper

GBA15 - Creeper
A . General
The creeper unit mechanism comprises two parts:
• the creeper final drive unit (24)
It is fitted as an option to GBA15 Dyna-6 gearboxes.
It comprises an epicyclic gear train of simple kine-
matics including a planet carrier/ring gear assembly
housed at the rear of the gearbox (Fig. 1).
• the cable control
The rod fitted to the front right-hand side of the
centre housing operates the control fork of the final 22 24
drive unit via a cable linked to a lever located in the
cab.
IMPORTANT: The coupler with spur cut teeth can only
be activated when the tractor is stopped.
MA-05-05341A
Fig. 1

GBA15 - Creeper
B . Operation
The coupler (29) is splined to the pinion (9) (Fig. 2).
When the control lever in the cab is moved to the Snail
position, the coupler is moved backwards (detail C,
Fig. 2) and locked to the planet carrier (20) via the
coupler ring (22) (Fig. 1, Fig. 2).
The rotational speed of the pinion is one quarter that of
the output shaft of the gearbox.
In normal gears, the coupler is moved forwards (detail
A, Fig. 2) to link the gearbox output shaft to the pinion,
thus ensuring direct drive.
Lubrication
The final drive is lubricated by the splashing caused by
its moving parts.

GBA15 - Creeper
20
22 29
MA-05-05342A
Fig. 2

GBA15 - Creeper
Parts lists (Fig. 3, Fig. 4)

(1) Snap ring
(2) Snap ring
(9) Pinion
(11) Snap ring
(13) Pins
(15) Planet gears
(16) Ring gear
(17) Spacers
(18) Needle roller bearings
(19) Shim(s)
(20) Planet carrier
(21) Snap ring
(22) Coupler ring
(23) Screw
(24) Planet carrier assembly (final drive unit)
(26) Special nut
(27) Fork
(28) Selector rail
(29) Coupler
(35) Detent plunger
(36) Spring
(37) Plug
(38) Pin
(39) Finger
(40) "O" ring
(41) Pin
(42) Rod
(43) Screw
(44) Cover plate
(45) Centre housing
(51) Dowel
(60) Output shaft
Legend
A Direct drive
C Creeper position (Snail)

GBA15 - Creeper

F
26 28 27 45
35
36
27 37
40 41 19 38 39 27
A 29
9
60
221 23 18 17
49
F
14
14
13 21 29 C
24
22 1
15
20
11 44
B
12 16
45 43 42
242
MA-05-05343A
Fig. 3

GBA15 - Creeper

GBA15 - Creeper
Blown-up view
51
17
14
15
60
18
11
13
12
16
20
12
14
44
23
37 38
49
36
42
43 45
35
26
28
27
2
21
22
29
1
39
19
41
40
MA-05-05344A
Fig. 4

GBA15 - Creeper

creeper gearbox
Preliminary step
Removal
2. Remove the snap ring (2) and screws (23) fitted
respectively to the output shaft (60) and cover
plate (44).
3. Remove the final drive assembly (24).
Refitting
4. Carry out a visual inspection of all parts.
5. Lightly smear the final drive faces with miscible
grease. Fix a friction washer (12) to each face of
the final drive, fitting its tabs into the relevant
grooves on the final drive.
6. Reassemble the final drive assembly on the output
shaft.
7. Check that parts are correctly positioned.
Loctite 221 or equivalent. Tighten these screws to
100-130 Nm.
Manually check the rotation of the gearbox output
shaft.
Final steps
8. Reconnect the tractor between the gearbox and
the rear axle (see chapter 2).
9. Reconnect the gear selection mechanism cable. If
necessary, adjust the cable (see § F).
10. Carry out a road test on the creeper and normal
gears.

GBA15 - Creeper
D . Disassembling, reassembling
and adjusting the gear selection 35 S
mechanism
36
Preliminary steps
37
11. Disconnect the control cable fitted to the rod (42) PDF
located to the right of the gearbox and centre
27
housing.
axle (see chapter 2). 28
26
Disassembly (Fig. 5, Fig. 6)
13. Remove the plug (37). Recover the spring (36) and 29
detent plunger (35). MA-05-05345A
Fig. 5
14. Remove the selector rail (28)/special nut (26)
assembly. If necessary, unlock and unscrew the
special nut of the selector rail. Discard this nut.
15. Remove the fork (27) in the direction of the front of
the centre housing. If necessary, remove the
coupler (29).
NOTE: To access the coupler, remove the PTO
clutch and its support S (Fig. 5) (see chapter 7).
16. Remove the control rod (42) located on the
right-hand side of the centre housing.
Drive out the pin (38).
Remove the finger (39).
Recover the shim(s) (19).
Remove the pin (41) fitted with its "O" ring (40).

GBA15 - Creeper
Reassembly (Fig. 5, Fig. 6)

that are defective.
18. If it is necessary to replace the control rod (42), the
finger (39) or the pin (41), refit these parts,
following step 16 in reverse order.
19. Check the axial clearance of the pin (41). This clear-
ance should be 0.1 to 0.6 mm. If the clearance
does not fall within the tolerance values, deter-
mine a new shim (19) thickness.
NOTE: If possible, shim to the minimum tolerance.
20. After shimming, check that the finger (39) and the
control rod (42) are correctly positioned.
with Loctite 242 or equivalent. Moderately tighten
this screw.
21. If work is necessary on the coupler (29), position it
correctly and slide it onto the pinion splines. Refit
the PTO clutch and its support (see chapter 7).
22. Refit:
- the fork (27);
- the selector rail (28)/special nut (26) assembly.
IMPORTANT: If it is necessary to remove the special
nut (26) of the selector rail (28), use a new special
nut when refitting.
If necessary, adjust the fork (see step 26).
Final steps
23. Reconnect the tractor between the gearbox and
the centre housing (see chapter 2).
24. Reconnect the selection mechanism control cable.
Adjust if necessary (see § F).
25. Carry out a road test on the creeper and normal
gears.

GBA15 - Creeper
Fig. 6

GBA15 - Creeper
Adjusting the creeper fork (Fig. 7)

26. If the creeper fork requires adjusting, proceed as
follows:
- Fit the detent plunger (35) and the spring (36).
Partially screw in the plug (37).
- Place the coupler (29) and the fork (27) in the
direct drive position as per F1 (the locking device
(35) (36) (37) in the front slot of the selector rail
(28)).
- Hold the fork pads lightly in contact with the
coupler as per F4.
- Hold the special nut (26) in position to prevent it
from turning (detail A). Screw or unscrew the
selector rail (28) in the nut, to obtain a distance of
51.75 mm between the front surface of the
coupler and that of the centre housing (45).
nut (26) must be held against face B of the centre
housing (45) as per F3.
- Definitively tighten the plug (37) to 50-70 Nm.
- Check the movement of the coupler (29) in each
position (creeper gears and direct drive), while
holding the special nut (26) against face B of the
centre housing as per F3.
NOTE: When the tractor is coupled between the
gearbox and rear axle, the selector rail (28) is
immobilised by the contact of the special nut (26)
with rear surface F2 of the gearbox (detail A).

GBA15 - Creeper
26 A 28
F2
F3
28 35 36 45
51,75 mm
26
37
27
F4
C F1
29
MA-05-05346A
Fig. 7

GBA15 - Creeper
E . Disassembling and reassembling

the final drive
27. Remove the creeper gearbox (see § C).
28. Remove the snap ring (11).
29. Remove the friction washers (12).
30. Drive out the pins (13).
31. Remove the planet gears (15) from the planet
carrier (20), taking care not to lose the needle
rollers (18), the spacers (17) or the friction plates
(14).
NOTE: The coupler ring (22) is fitted in the planet
carrier using a press. The snap ring (21) provides
additional locking for the combined parts.
Reassembly (Fig. 8)
32. Check and clean all components. Replace those
that are defective.
33. Fit each planet gear with two rows of needle
rollers smeared with miscible grease and sepa-
rated by a spacer.
34. Refit the planet gears and centre the friction plates
(14).
35. Refit the pins (13), correctly positioning them to fit
the snap ring (11).
36. Fit the snap ring. Manually check the axial clear-
ance and rotation of each planet gear.
37. Lightly smear the final drive faces with miscible
grease. Fix a friction washer (12) to each face of
the final drive, fitting its tabs into the relevant
grooves on the final drive.
38. Refit the creeper gearbox (see § C).

GBA15 - Creeper
15
18
17
21
14
22 13
14
11
12
24 20
12
MA-05-05347A
Fig. 8

GBA15 - Creeper
F . Adjusting the control

On lever A (Fig. 9)
39. Place control lever A in the Snail position.
40. Screw the clevis (1) level with the end of the
threaded part of the cable (6).
41. Fit the clevis (1) onto lever A with the clip (7).
Tighten the nut (2).
42. Tighten the nut (3) of the sheath end (5).
43. Fit the sheath end and the Grower washer on the
support. Tighten the nut (4), ensuring that the
cable is not pinched.
On rod B (Fig. 10)

44. Place rod B in the "Creeper" position (the coupler
(29) splined to the planet carrier (20) (Fig. 2, detail
C) with the fork locked.
45. Screw the clevis (9) level with the threaded part of
the cable (6).
46. Fit the clevis (9) to rod B using the clip (10). Tighten
the nut (11).
47. Adjust the stop (12) using the nut (13) on the
support (49), making sure that rod B is still firmly
locked.
48. Tighten the nut (14), ensuring that the cable is not
pinched.
49. Check that the control is operating and that it is
locked in the "direct drive" position.
Fig. 9
14
49
13
12
11
10 B
9 Fig. 10
MA-05-05348A

MF 6400 Gearbox Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MF 6400 Gearbox Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Gearbox

5A10 - General - GBA20 operation

5A11 - GBA20 input unit

5A12 - GBA20 Power shuttle

5A13 - GBA20 Dynashift

5A15 - GBA20 Selector rails

5A16 - GBA20 Output shaft

5A17 - GBA20 Mainshaft

5A18 - GBA20 Layshaft

5A20 - GBA20 - Super Creeper unit

5B10 - GBA10 - General - Operation

5B11 - GBA10 - Input unit

5B12 - GBA10 - PowerShuttle

5B13 - GBA10 - Dynashift

5B14 - GBA10 - Selector cover

5B15 - GBA10 - Selector rails

5B16 - GBA10 - Output shaft

5B17 - GBA10 - Mainshaft

5B18 - GBA20 - Layshaft

Massey Ferguson 6400 Contents - i

5B19 - GBA10 - Creeper unit

5C10 - GBA25 - General - Operation

5C11 - GBA25 - PowerShuttle

5C12 - GBA25 - Powershift module

5C13 - GBA25 - Robotic mechanical gearbox

5C14 - GBA25 - Creeper unit

5C15 - GBA25 - Super Creeper unit

5D10 - GBA15 - General - Operation

5D11 - GBA15 - Power Shuttle

5D12 - GBA15 - Powershift module

5D13 - GBA15 - Robotic mechanical gearbox

5D14 - GBA15 - Creeper

Contents - ii Massey Ferguson 6400

5A10 - General - GBA20 operation

B . Construction and description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Massey Ferguson 6400 - Edition 4.a 5A10.1

5A10.2 Massey Ferguson 6400 - Edition 4.a

Parts list (70) Snap ring

Massey Ferguson 6400 - Edition 4.a 5A10.3

5A10.4 Massey Ferguson 6400 - Edition 4.a

Gearbox overall view

Massey Ferguson 6400 - Edition 4.a 5A10.5

5A10.6 Massey Ferguson 6400 - Edition 4.a

Dynashift input unit assembly

Gearbox input gear train

Massey Ferguson 6400 - Edition 4.a 5A10.7

5A10.8 Massey Ferguson 6400 - Edition 4.a

Synchronizers (double cone) (Fig. 2)

Massey Ferguson 6400 - Edition 4.a 5A10.9

Low range (Tortoise)

High range (Hare)

5A10.10 Massey Ferguson 6400 - Edition 4.a

Overhaul (double cone)

Massey Ferguson 6400 - Edition 4.a 5A10.11

D . Specifications for transmission

5A10.12 Massey Ferguson 6400 - Edition 4.a

1,5 BAR VALVE 6 -8 Nm

PRELOAD = 0;05 TO PLAY = 0,05

Massey Ferguson 6400 - Edition 4.a 5A10.13

5A10.14 Massey Ferguson 6400 - Edition 4.a

5A11 - GBA20 input unit

E . Adjusting the progressivity sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7